Panasonic DMC FZ300 Owner’s Manual For Advanced Features En Adv Om

User Manual: panasonic DMC-FZ300 - Owner’s Manual for Advanced Features Free User Guide for Panasonic Camera, Manual - page1

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 363 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

Finding the information you need
How to use this manual
Contents
Contents by Function
Before Use
Preparations
Basics
Recording mode
Picture Quality and coloring Settings
Adjusting the focus and brightness (exposure)
Shutter and Drive Settings
Functions for specific subjects and purposes
Stabilizer, Zoom and Flash
Recording motion pictures
Playing Back and Editing Pictures
Wi-Fi
Connecting with other devices
Others

Owner’s Manual

for advanced features

Digital Camera

Model No. DMC-FZ300

SQW0419

M0715KZ0

Message Display →332

Please read these instructions carefully before using this product,

and save this manual for future use.

Q&A Troubleshooting →340

Finding the information you need →2

Contents →4

Contents by Function →12

Menu list →336

http://shop.panasonic.com/support

(U.S. customers only)

2SQW0419

Finding the information you need

In this “Owner’s Manual for advanced features”, you can find the information you need

from the following pages.

By clicking a page number, you can jump to the linked page and quickly find the

information.

Search from “Contents” 4 -

Search from the list of function

names

“Contents by Function”

12 -

Search from “Names and

Functions of Main Parts” 18 -

Search from “List of monitor/

viewfinder displays” 325 -

Search from the list of

on-screen messages

“Message displays”

332 -

Search from the menu list

“Menu list” 336 -

[Rec] ............................ 336

[Motion Picture]............ 337

[Custom] ...................... 338

[Setup] ........................ 339

[Playback] .................... 339

Search from “Q&A

Troubleshooting” 340 -

For details on how to use this manual,

see the next page.

Wi-Fi® function →256

3SQW0419

How to use this manual

Click this icon to jump to “Finding the information you need”.

Click this icon to jump to “Contents”.

Click this icon to jump to “Menu list”.

Click this icon to return to the previously displayed page.

Recording mode icons

Recording mode:

In Recording modes that show icons in black, you can select and execute indicated

menus and functions.

• Click a cross reference in the text to jump to the corresponding page.

■About the symbols in the text

Indicates that the menu can be set by pressing [MENU/SET] button.

Indicates that the Wi-Fi setting can be made by pressing [Wi-Fi] button.

Configurations that can be performed in the [Custom] menu.

Tips for skillful use and points for recording.

(→00) Indicates the reference page. Click to go to the corresponding page.

Click to view the description on the next page.

In this Owner’s Manual, steps for setting a menu item are described as follows:

→ [Rec] → [Quality] → [ ]

4SQW0419

Contents

■

Finding the information you need ..... 2

■

How to use this manual ...................... 3

■

Before use ......................................... 15

■

Standard Accessories ...................... 17

Before Use

■

Names and Functions

of Main Parts ..................................... 18

Preparations

■

Attaching the Lens Hood ................. 20

■

Attaching the Lens Cap/

Shoulder Strap .................................. 22

Attaching the Lens Cap .............................22

Attaching the Shoulder Strap ..................... 23

■

Charging battery ............................... 24

Estimated number of recordable pictures

and operating time .....................................26

■

Inserting and removing the battery/

the card (optional) ............................. 28

■

About the Card .................................. 29

Formatting the card (initialization)..............30

Estimated recording capacity

(number of pictures/recording time) ........... 31

■

Opening the Monitor/

Adjusting the Monitor ....................... 33

■

Setting the clock ............................... 34

Changing time settings ..............................35

■

Contents by Function ....................... 12

5SQW0419

■

Holding the camera ........................... 36

■

Buttons/Dials/Levers

Used for Recording ........................... 37

Zoom Lever/Side Lever (Use Zoom) .........37

Shutter button (Taking pictures) ................. 38

Motion picture button

(Recording motion pictures).......................39

Mode dial (Select the recording mode) ...... 40

Focus mode lever ......................................40

Side dial / Rear dial....................................41

Side button.................................................44

Cursor button / [MENU/SET] button

(Selecting/setting items) ............................45

[DISP.] button

(Switching the display information) ............ 46

[LVF] button

(Recording pictures using the viewfinder)

... 50

■

Touch screen (Touch operations).... 52

Touching the screen and recording

(Touch Shutter function).............................54

Easily Optimizing the Brightness for a

Specified Area ([Touch AE]) .......................55

■

Setting the menu ............................... 56

How to set the menu .................................. 56

■

Calling frequently-used menus

instantly (Quick Menu) .................... 59

Change the Quick Menu to your

preferred item ............................................60

■

Assigning frequently used

functions to the buttons

(Function buttons) ............................ 61

Using the function buttons during

recording .................................................... 62

Using the function buttons during

playback.....................................................63

Contents

Basics

■

Using the [Setup] menu .................... 64

[Clock Set] .................................................64

[World Time] ...............................................64

[Travel Date] ..............................................65

[Wi-Fi] ........................................................65

[Beep] ........................................................66

[Live View Mode] .......................................66

[Monitor Display] / [Viewfinder] ..................67

[Monitor Luminance] ..................................68

[Economy] .................................................. 69

[USB Mode] ...............................................70

[TV Connection] .........................................70

[m/ft] ........................................................... 72

[Menu Resume] .........................................72

[Menu Background]....................................72

[Menu Information] ..................................... 72

[Language] ................................................. 72

[Version Disp.]............................................73

[Exposure Comp. Reset]............................73

[Self Timer Auto Off] ...................................73

[No.Reset] .................................................. 73

[Reset] .......................................................74

[Reset Wi-Fi Settings] ................................74

[Format] .....................................................74

■

Entering Text ..................................... 75

6SQW0419

Contents

Recording mode

■

Taking pictures with

automatic settings

(Intelligent Auto Mode) ..................... 76

Taking pictures using a handheld camera

([iHandheld Night Shot]) ............................78

Combining pictures into a single

still picture with rich gradation ([iHDR])......79

Defocusing the background

(Defocus control function) .......................... 80

Recording images by changing the

brightness (exposure) or color tone ........... 81

About Intelligent Auto Plus Mode and

Intelligent Auto Mode .................................82

■

Taking pictures after

automatically setting the aperture

value and shutter speed

(Program AE Mode)........................... 84

■

Taking pictures by setting the

aperture value and shutter speed ... 86

Taking pictures by setting the aperture

value (Aperture-Priority AE Mode) .............86

Taking pictures by setting the shutter

speed (Shutter-Priority AE Mode) ..............87

Taking pictures by setting the

aperture value and shutter speed

(Manual Exposure Mode) ..........................88

Checking the effects of the aperture value

and shutter speed (Preview Mode) ............ 90

Easily set aperture / shutter speed for

suitable exposure (One Push AE)..............92

■

Recording panorama pictures

(Panorama Shot Mode) ..................... 93

■

Taking pictures according to the

scene (Scene Guide Mode) ............. 96

■

Taking Pictures with

different picture effects

(Creative Control Mode) ................. 101

■

Recording motion pictures by

setting the aperture value/shutter

speed (Creative Video Mode) ........ 108

Recording Slow Motion Pictures

([High Speed Video]) ...............................109

Minimizing operational sounds during

motion picture recording .......................... 110

■

Registering your own settings

and recording

(Custom Mode) .................................111

Registering your own settings

([Cust.Set Mem.])..................................... 111

Recording using registered custom set ... 112

7SQW0419

Contents

Adjusting the focus and brightness (exposure)

■

Taking pictures with Auto Focus ... 128

Select the focus mode

(AFS, AFF, AFC) ......................................129

Switching [AF Mode] ................................ 130

Changing the position and size of the

AF area ....................................................137

Setting the AF area position with

the touch pad ...........................................141

Optimizing the focus and brightness

for a touched position ..............................142

Setting your preferred focusing

method ..................................................... 143

■

Taking close-up pictures

(Macro recording) ........................... 145

■

Taking pictures with

Manual Focus .................................. 147

Quickly adjusting the focus using

Auto Focus...............................................149

■

Taking pictures by locking

the focus and/or exposure

[AF/AE Lock] ................................... 152

■

Taking pictures with

Exposure Compensation ................ 154

■

Setting the ISO Sensitivity ............. 155

Setting the upper limit of

ISO Sensitivity .........................................157

Setting the incremental value of

ISO Sensitivity .........................................157

■

Setting the metering mode ............. 158

Picture Quality and coloring Settings

■

Adjusting the picture quality with

effects [Photo Style] ...................... 113

■

Taking pictures using picture

effects [Filter Settings] .................. 115

■

Adjusting highlights and shadows

[Highlight Shadow] ......................... 117

■

Adjusting the White Balance ......... 118

■

Setting the picture quality

and size ............................................ 122

Changing the aspect ratio of the

still pictures ..............................................122

Setting the picture size ............................122

Setting the compression rate of pictures

([Quality]) .................................................123

■

Using the picture correction

functions effectively ....................... 125

Correcting contrast and exposure

([i.Dynamic]).............................................125

Enhancing the impression of

high-resolution ([i.Resolution]) ................. 125

Combining still pictures with different

exposures ([HDR]) ...................................126

Raising the resolution when the aperture

is closed ([Diffraction Compensation]) .....127

Setting the color space ............................127

8SQW0419

Contents

Shutter and Drive Settings

■

Setting the Shutter Type ................. 159

■

Selecting a Drive Mode ................... 160

■

Burst function ................................. 161

■

Recording 4K Photos ..................... 164

Recording with [4K Burst] ........................167

Recording with [4K Burst(S/S)] ................167

Recording with [4K Pre-Burst] .................168

Selecting pictures from 4K burst file and

saving ......................................................169

Notes on the 4K Photo function ............... 175

■

Recording while exposure is

changed automatically

[Auto Bracket] ................................. 178

■

Taking pictures with self-timer ...... 180

Functions for specific subjects and purposes

■

Taking pictures automatically

at set intervals

[Time Lapse Shot] ........................... 182

■

Creating stop motion animation

[Stop Motion Animation] ................ 185

■

Performing multiple exposures

for a single picture [Multi Exp.] .... 189

■

Disabling the beeps and flash

at the same time

[Silent Mode] ................................... 191

Stabilizer, Zoom and Flash

■

Correcting jitter ............................... 199

■

Using Zoom ..................................... 201

Zoom types and use ................................201

Using the zoom by performing touch

operations (Touch zoom) .........................205

■

Taking pictures with flash .............. 206

■

Setting the Flash Functions ........... 208

Changing the firing mode

(Manual flash) ..........................................208

Changing Flash Mode..............................208

Setting the 2nd curtain sync .................... 211

Adjusting the flash output ........................212

Synchronizing the flash output with

the camera during

Exposure Compensation .........................212

■

Taking Pictures with

Wireless Flashes ............................. 213

■

Recording with the

Face Recognition function

[Face Recog.] .................................. 192

■

Setting the profile for a baby or

pet to record in a picture ................ 195

■

Displaying the appropriate

screen for specific recording

conditions ........................................ 196

■

Recording while monitoring

camera images ................................ 198

9SQW0419

Contents

Recording motion pictures

■

Recording motion pictures ............ 215

Recording 4K motion pictures..................217

Setting the format, picture size and

recording frame rate ................................218

Adjusting the focus while recording

motion pictures ([Continuous AF]) ...........219

■

Taking still pictures while a

motion picture is being

recorded ........................................... 220

■

Recording Snap Movies ................. 221

Setting up [Pull Focus] ............................. 222

■

Using the [Motion Picture] menu ... 224

[Snap Movie] ............................................ 224

[Rec Format] ............................................224

[Rec Quality] ............................................224

[Exposure Mode]......................................224

[High Speed Video] .................................. 224

[Picture Mode]..........................................224

[Continuous AF] .......................................225

[Level Shot] .............................................. 225

[Conversion].............................................225

[Flkr Decrease] ........................................225

[Silent Operation] .....................................225

[Mic Level Disp.] ......................................226

[Mic Level Adj.].........................................226

[Special Mic.] ...........................................226

[Mic Level Limiter] .................................... 226

[Wind Noise Canceller] ............................227

[Wind Cut] ................................................227

[Zoom Mic] ...............................................227

Playing Back and Editing Pictures

■

Viewing your pictures ..................... 228

■

Viewing motion pictures ................ 229

Capturing still pictures from

motion pictures ........................................230

■

Switching the Playback Method .... 231

Zooming in and viewing

“Playback Zoom”......................................231

Viewing a list of pictures

“Multi Playback” .......................................231

Viewing pictures by their recording date

“Calendar Playback” ................................232

Viewing group pictures ............................232

■

Deleting pictures ............................. 234

■

Using the [Playback] menu ............ 236

[Slide Show] ............................................. 237

[Playback Mode] ......................................238

[Location Logging] ...................................240

[RAW Processing] ....................................241

[Clear Retouch] ........................................ 244

[Title Edit] ................................................. 245

[Text Stamp] ............................................. 246

[Video Divide] ........................................... 247

[Time Lapse Video] ..................................248

[Stop Motion Video] .................................248

[Resize] .................................................... 249

[Cropping] ................................................250

[Rotate] / [Rotate Disp.] ...........................251

[Favorite] .................................................. 252

[Print Set] .................................................253

[Protect] ...................................................254

[Face Rec Edit] ........................................254

[Picture Sort] ............................................255

[Delete Confirmation] ...............................255

10 SQW0419

Contents

Wi-Fi

■

What you can do with the

Wi-Fi® function ................................ 256

■

Wi-Fi Function ................................. 257

■

Operating the camera by

connecting it to a smartphone ....... 260

Installing the smartphone/tablet app

“Panasonic Image App” ...........................260

Connecting to a smartphone....................261

Taking pictures via a smartphone

(remote recording) ...................................267

Playing back pictures in the camera

on a smartphone ...................................... 268

Saving pictures in the camera to a

smartphone .............................................. 268

Sending pictures in the camera to

social networking services .......................269

Adding location information to pictures

in the camera from a smartphone ............ 269

Combining motion pictures recorded

with Snap Movie according to your

preference on a smartphone....................271

■

Displaying still pictures on a TV .... 273

■

Sending pictures ............................. 274

■

Sending pictures to a

smartphone ..................................... 277

■

Wireless printing ............................. 278

■

Sending pictures to AV device ....... 279

■

Sending pictures to a PC ............... 280

■

Using WEB services ....................... 282

When sending images to WEB service....282

When sending images to

[Cloud Sync. Service] ..............................286

■

Using “LUMIX CLUB” ..................... 287

About the [LUMIX CLUB] ......................... 287

■

About connections ......................... 292

[Via Network]

Connecting via a wireless access point ... 293

[Direct]

Connecting directly ..................................296

Connecting quickly with the same

settings as used previously

([Select a destination from History] /

[Select a destination from Favorite]) ........ 297

■

[Wi-Fi Setup] .................................... 299

Connecting with other devices

■

Enjoying 4K motion pictures ......... 301

Viewing 4K motion pictures .....................301

Storing 4K motion pictures.......................302

■

Viewing on TV screen ..................... 303

VIERA Link (HDMI) (HDAVI Control™) ....305

■

Storing recorded still pictures

and motion pictures on your PC ... 307

About supplied software ..........................308

Installing supplied software......................310

Copying still pictures and

motion pictures ........................................ 311

■

Storing recorded still pictures

and motion pictures in the

recorder ........................................... 313

Copying by inserting the card into the

recorder ...................................................313

Dubbing with non-compatible

equipment ................................................313

■

Printing ............................................ 314

Printing multiple pictures..........................315

Printing with date and text .......................316

Making print settings on the camera ........ 317

11 SQW0419

Others

■

Optional accessories ...................... 318

Conversion Lens (optional) ...................... 318

Filter (optional) ......................................... 320

External Flash (optional) .......................... 321

Using the AC adaptor (optional) and

DC coupler (optional) instead

of the battery ............................................ 322

Shutter Remote Control (optional) ........... 323

External Microphone (optional) ................ 323

■

List of monitor/viewfinder

displays ............................................ 325

■

Message displays ........................... 332

■

Menu list .......................................... 336

■

Q&A Troubleshooting .................... 340

■

Usage cautions and notes ............. 355

Contents

12 SQW0419

Contents by Function

Recording

Recording mode ...........................................40

[Preview] ....................................................... 90

Panorama Shot Mode ...................................93

Macro recording ..........................................145

[Time Lapse Shot] .......................................182

[Stop Motion Animation] ..............................185

[Multi Exp.] .................................................. 189

[Silent Mode] ...............................................191

Focus (AF/MF)

Focus Mode ................................................ 129

AF Mode .....................................................130

Adjusting the AF area position .................... 137

Manual Focus .............................................147

AF/AE Lock .................................................152

Drive

Drive Mode .................................................160

[4K PHOTO]................................................164

[Self Timer] .................................................180

Exposure

[Touch AE] ....................................................55

[One Push AE] ..............................................92

AF/AE Lock .................................................152

Exposure Compensation ............................154

ISO sensitivity ............................................. 155

[Metering Mode] ..........................................158

[Auto Bracket] .............................................178

Recording

Picture Quality and Color Tone

[Photo Style] ............................................... 113

[Filter Settings] ............................................ 115

[Highlight Shadow] ...................................... 117

White Balance ............................................ 118

[Picture Size] ..............................................122

[Quality] ......................................................123

[i.Dynamic] .................................................. 125

[i.Resolution] ............................................... 125

[HDR] .......................................................... 126

[Diffraction Compensation] .........................127

[Color Space] .............................................. 127

Flash

[Flash Mode] ............................................... 208

2nd curtain synchro .................................... 211

[Flash Adjust.] .............................................212

Wireless flash settings ................................ 213

Stabilizer

[Operation Mode] ........................................ 199

5-Axis Hybrid Image Stabilizer ...................199

Monitoring

[HDMI Rec Output] .....................................198

Motion Picture

Creative Video Mode ..................................108

[High Speed Video] ..................................... 109

[Silent Operation] ........................................ 110

Motion pictures in 4K ..................................217

[Rec Format] ............................................... 218

[Rec Quality] ...............................................218

Taking still pictures while a motion picture

is being recorded ........................................220

[Snap Movie] ...............................................221

Motion Picture

Audio

[Mic Level Adj.] ...........................................226

[Mic Level Limiter] .......................................226

[Wind Noise Canceller] ...............................227

[Wind Cut] ................................................... 324

Screen settings

[Center Marker] ...........................................196

[Zebra Pattern] ............................................196

[Monochrome Live View] ............................197

[Mic Level Disp.] .........................................226

13 SQW0419

Contents by Function

Playback

[Auto Review] ...............................................39

Picture playback .........................................228

Motion picture playback .............................. 229

Playback Zoom ........................................... 231

Multi Playback ............................................231

Delete .........................................................234

Display/playback settings

[Slide Show] ................................................237

[Rotate]/[Rotate Disp.] ................................251

Playback

Edit

[RAW Processing] .......................................241

[Clear Retouch] ...........................................244

[Resize] ....................................................... 249

[Cropping] ...................................................250

Adding information

[Location Logging] ......................................240

[Title Edit] .................................................... 245

[Text Stamp] ................................................ 246

Image settings

[Favorite] .....................................................252

[Print Set] .................................................... 253

[Protect] ......................................................254

Connect

“Image App” ................................................260

[WPS (Push-Button)] ..........................293, 296

Direct connection ........................................ 296

Image App

Remote recording .......................................267

Saving images ............................................268

Sending images .................................. 269, 277

Sending and adding location information ...269

Combining motion pictures recorded with

[Snap Movie] ...............................................271

Wi-Fi

In combination with other devices

Playing back pictures on a TV ....................273

Printing images ........................................... 278

Sending images to an AV device ................279

Sending images to a PC ............................. 280

Sending images to a WEB service .............282

Using [Cloud Sync. Service] .......................286

Basic settings

[Format] ........................................................30

[Clock Set] ....................................................34

Display switching ....................................46, 49

Diopter adjustment .......................................50

How to set menu items .................................56

[Q.MENU] .....................................................59

[Beep] ...........................................................66

[Economy] .....................................................69

[Reset] (initialization) ....................................74

Setup/Custom

Customization

[CUSTOM] in the Quick Menu ......................60

Function buttons ...........................................61

Custom Mode ............................................. 111

[Custom] menu ...........................................338

14 SQW0419

Contents by Function

“PHOTOfunSTUDIO” ..................................308

SILKYPIX ....................................................309

Transferring images to a PC ....................... 307

Playing Back Pictures on a TV Screen .......303

[VIERA Link] ...............................................305

Connecting with other devices

Recorder

Dubbing ......................................................313

Printer

PictBridge ...................................................314

15 SQW0419

Before Use

Before use

Care of the camera

To avoid damaging your camera and to experience the maximum enjoyment you

should exercise the following precautions.

●The lens, monitor and the camera body can sustain damage if the camera body is dropped or

subjected to excessive temperature, moisture, water or dust.

●The monitor can be damaged if excessive pressure is applied to the screen surface, during actual

use or while cleaning.

■Splash Proof

Splash Proof is a term used to describe an extra level of protection this camera offers

against exposure to a minimal amount of moisture, water or dust. Splash Proof does

not guarantee that damage will not occur if this camera is subjected to direct contact

with water.

In order to minimize the possibility of damage please be sure the following precautions

are taken:

• Make sure the built-in flash is closed.

• Make sure that all doors are securely closed.

• Make sure that you are in a dry and secure place when changing the battery or memory card.

After changing, make sure their protective doors are securely closed.

• If this camera is exposed to water, sand or any other foreign material clean it as soon as possible,

taking the necessary precautions that the foreign substance does not get inside the camera.

• Under no circumstances should you place any foreign objects within the camera.

If sand, dust, or liquids such as water droplets adhere to the camera, wipe them off with

a dry soft cloth.

• Not doing so may result in incorrect recognition of touch operations or erroneous flash display.

• If the monitor is closed when such liquids are present, malfunction may result.

■Condensation

●Condensation may occur on the lens, monitor or in the viewfinder when the room temperature or

humidity changes rapidly. This may cause the image to temporarily become hazy. If this occurs,

turn the camera off and allow the camera to sit so that the camera temperature can stabilize to the

room’s ambient temperature. The required time will vary and can take up to an hour. It will clear

by itself.

●If you know that you will be moving between areas where there will be a large change in

temperature or humidity, you can help prevent condensation forming on the camera by placing the

camera in a large plastic zipper bag, so condensation will form on the bag, not the camera. Allow

the temperature to stabilize before removing the camera from the bag.

16 SQW0419

Before Use

Before use

■Always take a test shot first

Before important events when you will use the camera (at weddings, for example),

always take a test shot to make sure that pictures and sound record correctly.

■No compensation for missed shots

We cannot compensate for missed shots if technical problems with the camera or card

prevent recording.

■Carefully observe copyright laws

Unauthorized use of recordings that contain works with copyright for purposes other

than personal use is prohibited under copyright law. Recording of certain material may

be restricted even for the purpose of personal use.

■Also refer to “Usage cautions and notes” (→355)

■Before using the camera, make sure all accessories specified in the attached

“Basic Owner’s Manual” are supplied.

For details on optional accessories (→318)

17 SQW0419

Before Use

Standard Accessories

Check that all the accessories are supplied before using the camera.

●The accessories and their shape will differ depending on the country or area where the

camera was purchased.

For details on the accessories, refer to “Basic Owner’s Manual”.

●Battery Pack is indicated as battery pack or battery in the text.

●Battery Charger is indicated as battery charger or charger in the text.

●SD Memory Card, SDHC Memory Card and SDXC Memory Card are indicated as card

in the text.

●Please dispose of all packaging appropriately.

●Keep small parts in a safe place out of the reach of children.

■Optional accessories

• Cards are optional.

18 SQW0419

Before Use

Names and Functions of Main Parts

1Shoulder strap eyelet (→22)

2Shutter button (→38)

3Zoom lever (→37)

4Self-timer indicator (→180) /

AF Assist Lamp (→144)

5[ ] (Exposure Compensation) button

(→154) /

[Fn1] button (→61)

6Motion picture button (→39)

7[Fn2] button (→61)

8Wi-Fi® connection lamp (→257)

9Rear dial (→41)

10 Status indicator (→34)

11 Camera [ON/OFF] switch (→34)

12 Mode dial (→40)

Use this to select the recording mode.

13 Flash (→206)

14 Stereo microphone (→226)

Be careful not to cover the microphone

with your finger. Doing so may make

sound difficult to record.

15 Hot shoe (→321)

16 Flash open lever (→206)

The flash opens, and recording with the

flash becomes possible.

17 Diopter adjustment dial (→50)

18 [LVF] button (→50) /

[Fn4] button (→61)

19 [MIC] socket (→323)

An external microphone (optional) can

record higher quality audio than the

built-in microphone.

20 Speaker (→66)

Be careful not to cover the speaker with

your finger. Doing so may make sound

difficult to hear.

21 Side dial (→41)

22 Side button (→44)

23 Side lever (→37)

24 Lens barrel (→36)

25 Lens (→356)

5 6

1112

13 14

19202122232425

19 SQW0419

Before Use

Names and Functions of Main Parts

26 Touch screen (→52) / monitor (→325)

27 Eye cup (→355)

28 Viewfinder (→50)

29 Eye sensor (→50, 51)

30 [AF/AE LOCK] button (→152)

31 Focus mode lever (→40)

32 [ ] (Playback) button (→228)

33 [DISP.] button (→46)

Use this to change display.

34 Cursor button (→45)

[ ] (ISO sensitivity) ( ) (→155)

[ ] (White Balance) ( ) (→118)

[ ] (Drive Mode) ( ) (→160)

[ ] (AF Mode) ( ) (→130)

35 [MENU/SET] button (→45)

36 [Q.MENU ] (Delete/Cancel) button

(→59, 234) /

[Fn3] button (→61)

37 [REMOTE] socket (→323)

38 [HDMI] socket (→303)

39 [AV OUT/DIGITAL] socket (→303)

40 DC coupler cover (→322)

When using an AC adaptor, ensure that

the Panasonic DC coupler (optional) and

AC adaptor (optional) are used.

41 Card/Battery door (→28)

42 Release lever (→28)

43 Tripod mount (→358)

Do not attach this unit to tripods that

have screws with a length of 5.5 mm

(0.22 inch) or more. Doing so may

damage this unit or the unit may not be

secured properly on the tripod.

26 27 28 29

43 42 41 40

20 SQW0419

Preparations

Attaching the Lens Hood

When recording into strong backlight, irregular reflection may occur within the lens. The

lens hood reduces the inclusion of unwanted light in the recorded images and lowers the

drop in contrast. The lens hood cuts off excess lighting and improves the picture quality.

• Do not hold the lens hood in such a way that it will be bent.

• Make sure that the camera is turned off.

• Be sure to close the flash beforehand.

1Align the mounting

mark on the lens

hood a little above the

mounting mark on the

tip of the lens

Mounting mark on

the tip of the lens Mounting mark

on the lens hood

2Turn the lens hood in the

direction of the arrow to secure

3Turn the lens hood until it clicks

and align the mounting mark on

the lens hood with the mark at

the bottom of the camera

• Make sure the lens hood is secured

properly and its reflection does not fall on

images.

Mounting mark on

the lens hood

Mark at the bottom

of the camera

●If you attach the lens hood while using the flash, the flash light would be blocked by the lens hood

causing the bottom part of images to be darkened (vignetting) and also making it impossible to

modulate the light. It is recommended to remove the lens hood before using the flash.

21 SQW0419

Preparations

Attaching the Lens Hood

■Temporarily Storing the Lens Hood

Rotate the lens hood in the direction of the arrow

to detach it

Align the mounting mark ( ) on the lens hood

with the position that is slightly rightward of the

mark ( ) at the bottom of the camera, and then

secure the lens hood

Turn the lens hood in the direction of the arrow

until it clicks, and align the mounting mark on

the lens hood with the mark at the bottom of the

camera

22 SQW0419

Preparations

Attaching the Lens Cap/Shoulder Strap

Attaching the Lens Cap

Cover the lens with the lens cap to protect it when you are not taking pictures. We

recommend attaching the lens cap to the camera using the lens cap string to prevent loss

of the lens cap.

• Do not hang or swing around the camera with the lens cap string.

• Make sure to detach the lens cap when turning this unit on.

• Be careful that the lens cap string does not become entangled with the shoulder strap.

1Pass the string through the shoulder strap

eyelet on the camera

Shoulder strap eyelet

2Pass the same string through the hole on the lens cap

3Attach the lens cap

Pinch here to attach or detach the cap.

23 SQW0419

Preparations

Attaching the Lens Cap/Shoulder Strap

Attaching the Shoulder Strap

We recommend attaching the shoulder strap when using the camera to prevent it from

dropping.

1Pass the shoulder strap through the hole at the shoulder

strap eyelet

• Attach the shoulder strap so that the “LUMIX” Logo is on the outside.

Shoulder strap eyelet

2Pass the end of the shoulder strap through the

stopper, in the direction of the arrow

3Pass the end of the shoulder strap through the

hole on the other side of the stopper Pull the shoulder strap

2 cm (0.066 feet) or

more.

4Pull the shoulder strap and then check that it

will not come out

• Perform steps 1 to 4 and then attach the other side of

the shoulder strap.

• Use the shoulder strap around your shoulder.

– Do not wrap the strap around your neck. It may

result in injury or accident.

• Do not leave the shoulder strap where an infant can

reach it.

– It may result in an accident by mistakenly wrapping

around the neck.

24 SQW0419

Preparations

Charging battery

Always charge before first use! (battery shipped uncharged)

About batteries that you can use with this unit

It has been found that counterfeit battery packs which look very similar to the

genuine products are made available to purchase in some markets. Some of

these battery packs are not adequately protected with internal protection to

meet the requirements of appropriate safety standards. There is a possibility

that these battery packs may lead to fire or explosion. Please be advised that

we are not liable for any accident or failure occurring as a result of use of a

counterfeit battery pack. To ensure that safe products are used we recommend

that a genuine Panasonic battery pack is used.

•Use the dedicated charger and battery.

1Attach the battery paying attention to the

direction of the battery

2Connect the charger to the electrical outlet

• The AC cable

does not fit

entirely into

the AC input

terminal. A

gap will remain.

Plug-in type

Battery

Charger

(model-specific)

Inlet type Charging light

([CHARGE])

On: Charging in progress

Off: Charging complete

If light is flashing:

• Battery temperature is

too high or too low. We

recommend charging in a

location where the ambient

temperature is between 10 °C

and 30 °C (50 °F to 86 °F).

• Battery/charger connector is

dirty. Clean with a dry cloth.

• Charge the battery with the charger indoors.

3Detach the battery after charging is completed

• The battery charger is in the standby condition when the AC power is supplied.

The primary circuit is always “live” as long as the battery charger is connected to

an electrical outlet.

25 SQW0419

Preparations

Charging battery

Notes on charging time

Charging time Approx. 140 min

• The charging time indicated above is the time required for charging in case when the

battery is completely used up. The time required for charging differs depending on

conditions of battery usage. Charging takes longer in cases when temperatures are

either high or low and when the battery has not been used for a long period of time.

Remaining battery

When using the camera, the remaining battery capacity is displayed.

60p

Remaining battery (only when using battery)

(flashes red)

If the battery mark flashes red, recharge or replace a fully charged

battery.

●Always use genuine Panasonic batteries.

●If you use other batteries, we cannot guarantee the quality of this product.

●Remove battery from camera after use.

• Keep the battery in a plastic bag, making sure that it is kept away from metallic objects (such as

clips) when carrying or storing it.

26 SQW0419

Preparations

Charging battery

Estimated number of recordable pictures and operating time

Recording still pictures (When using monitor)

Number of recordable pictures Approx. 380 pictures By CIPA standard

Recording time Approx. 190 min

Recording still pictures (When using viewfinder (LVF))

Number of recordable pictures Approx. 360 pictures By CIPA standard

Recording time Approx. 180 min

■Recording conditions by CIPA standard

CIPA is an abbreviation of “Camera & Imaging Products Association”.

• Program AE Mode

• Temperature: 23 °C (73.4 °F)/Humidity: 50%RH when monitor/viewfinder is on.

• Using a Panasonic SDHC Memory Card.

• Using the supplied battery.

• Starting recording 30 seconds after the camera is turned on (when [Operation Mode] of

[Stabilizer] is set to [ ]).

• Recording once every 30 seconds with full flash every second recording.

• Rotating the zoom lever from Tele to Wide or vice versa in every recording.

• Turning the camera off every 10 recordings and leaving it until the temperature of the battery

decreases.

Number reduced if intervals are longer (e.g. to approx. one quarter for 2-minute

intervals under the above conditions).

27 SQW0419

Preparations

Charging battery

Recording motion pictures (When using monitor)

[Rec Format] [AVCHD] [MP4] [MP4]

[Rec Quality] [FHD/17M/60i] [FHD/28M/60p] [4K/100M/30p]

Available recording time Approx. 175 min Approx. 170 min Approx. 135 min

Actual available recording time*Approx. 85 min Approx. 85 min Approx. 65 min

* The time you can actually record when repeatedly turning the camera on and off, starting and

stopping recording and using zoom.

■Recording conditions

• Temperature 23 °C (73.4 °F), humidity 50%RH

●Motion pictures with their file size set to [FHD], [HD] or [VGA] in [MP4]:

Recording stops when the continuous recording time exceeds 29 minutes and 59 seconds or the file

size exceeds 4 GB.

• Since the file size becomes larger with [FHD], recording with [FHD] will stop before 29 minutes

59 seconds.

●Motion pictures with their file size set to [4K] in [MP4]:

Recording stops when the continuous recording time exceeds 29 minutes 59 seconds. (You can

continue recording without interruption even if the file exceeds 4 GB, but the motion picture file will

be recorded and played back in separate files.)

Viewing pictures (When using monitor)

Playback time Approx. 315 min

●The operating times and number of recordable pictures will differ according to the

environment and the operating conditions.

For example, in the following cases, the operating times shorten and the number of recordable

pictures is reduced.

• In low-temperature environments, such as on ski slopes.

• When operations such as the flash and zoom are used repeatedly.

●If available battery power is significantly reduced, battery is reaching end of lifespan. Please

purchase a new battery.

28 SQW0419

Preparations

Inserting and removing the battery/the card (optional)

• Make sure that the camera is turned off.

1Slide the release lever to the

[OPEN] position and open the

card/battery door

[OPEN]

[LOCK]

Release lever

2Insert the battery and card,

making sure that their

orientation is correct

• Battery:

Insert the battery all the way firmly until

a locking sound is heard, and check that

the lever is hooked over the battery.

• Card:

Insert the card all the way firmly until it

clicks.

Do not touch the terminal

Charged battery (check orientation)

Lever

Card

(check orientation: terminals face monitor)

DC coupler

cover

3Close the card/battery door and

slide the release lever to the

[LOCK] position

• DC coupler cover:

Make sure the DC coupler cover is securely closed, and then close the

card/battery door.

■To remove

•To remove battery:

Move lever in direction of arrow.

•To remove card:

Press the center of the card.

Lever

●Remove battery from camera after use.

●Keep the Memory Card out of reach of children to prevent swallowing.

●To remove the card or battery, turn the camera off and wait until the status indicator turns off.

(Failure to wait may cause the camera to malfunction and may damage the card or recorded

data.)

●The unusable battery should be discarded in accordance with battery recycling laws.

Call the RBRC hotline at 1-800-822-8837 for information.

29 SQW0419

Preparations

About the Card

The following SD standard-based cards (Panasonic brand recommended) can be used.

Type of Card Capacity Notes

SD Memory Cards 512 MB – 2 GB • Can be used with devices compatible with the

respective formats.

• Before using SDXC Memory Cards, check that your

computer and other devices support this type of card.

http://panasonic.net/avc/sdcard/information/SDXC.html

•This unit is compatible with UHS-Ι UHS Speed Class

3 standard SDHC/SDXC memory cards.

• Only the cards listed on the left with the given capacities

are supported.

SDHC Memory Cards 4 GB – 32 GB

SDXC Memory Cards 48 GB – 128 GB

■About motion picture/4K photo recording and speed class ratings

According to the [Rec Format] (→218) and [Rec Quality] (→218) of a motion picture,

the required card differs. To record 4K photos, you need a card with a speed class

rating that supports 4K photo recording. Use a card that meets the following ratings of

the SD Speed Class or UHS Speed Class.

• SD Speed Class and UHS Speed Class are the speed standards regarding

continuous writing. Confirm the SD speed by checking the card label or other card

related materials.

[Rec Format] [Rec Quality] Speed class Label example

[AVCHD] All Class 4 or higher

[MP4] [FHD]/[HD]/[VGA]

[MP4] [4K]/[High Speed Video] UHS Speed Class 3

When recording 4K photos UHS Speed Class 3

• Latest information:

http://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/dsc/

(This site is available in English only.)

Access to the card

The access indication displays red when pictures are being

recorded on the card.

60p

●While the camera is accessing the card (for an operation such as picture writing, reading, deletion,

or formatting), do not turn off the camera or remove the battery, card, AC adaptor (optional) or DC

coupler (optional). Do not subject the camera to vibrations, impact, or static electricity. The card or

the data on the card may be damaged, and this unit may no longer operate normally. If operation

fails due to vibration, impact or static electricity, perform the operation again.

30 SQW0419

Preparations

About the Card

●If you set the write-protect switch to “LOCK”, you may not be able to write, delete

or format the data or display it by recording date.

●It is recommended that you copy important pictures to your computer

(as electromagnetic waves, static electricity, or faults may cause data to be

damaged).

Formatting the card (initialization)

Format the card before recording a picture with this unit. Since data cannot be

recovered after formatting, make sure to back up necessary data in advance.

1Set the menu

→ [Setup] → [Format]

●This requires a sufficiently charged battery, or an AC adaptor (optional) and DC coupler (optional).

●Do not turn off the camera or perform other operations during formatting.

●Always format cards with this camera. Please reformat the card with this camera if it has already

been formatted with a computer or another device.

●If the card cannot be formatted, please try another card before contacting Panasonic.

31 SQW0419

Preparations

About the Card

Estimated recording capacity (number of pictures/recording time)

The number of pictures you can take and the recording time vary in proportion to card

capacity (and depending on recording conditions and type of card).

Recording picture capacity (still pictures)

When [Aspect Ratio] is set to [4:3] and [Quality] is set to [ ]

[Picture Size] 8 GB 16 GB 32 GB 64 GB

L (12M) 1140 2320 4650 9150

M (8M) 1620 3270 6550 13000

S (3M) 3220 6500 13030 24700

When [Aspect Ratio] is set to [4:3] and [Quality] is set to [ ]

[Picture Size] 8 GB 16 GB 32 GB 64 GB

L (12M) 350 720 1450 2880

M (8M) 390 790 1600 3180

S (3M) 450 900 1820 3600

●When the number of recordable pictures exceeds 9,999, “9999+” is displayed.

Recording time capacity (motion pictures)

• The recordable time is the total time of all the motion pictures which have been

recorded.

([h], [m] and [s] indicate “hour”, “minute” and “second”.)

When [Rec Format] is [AVCHD]

[Rec Quality] 8 GB 16 GB 32 GB 64 GB

[FHD/28M/60p] 37m00s 1h15m 2h30m 5h00m

[FHD/17M/60i] 1h00m 2h00m 4h05m 8h15m

[FHD/24M/30p]

[FHD/24M/24p] 43m00s 1h25m 2h55m 5h50m

32 SQW0419

Preparations

About the Card

When [Rec Format] is [MP4]

[Rec Quality] 8 GB 16 GB 32 GB 64 GB

[4K/100M/30p]

[4K/100M/24p] 9m00s 20m00s 42m00s 1h20m

[FHD/28M/60p] 37m00s 1h15m 2h30m 5h00m

[FHD/20M/30p] 49m00s 1h40m 3h20m 6h40m

[HD/10M/30p] 1h30m 3h10m 6h25m 12h50m

[VGA/4M/30p] 3h25m 7h00m 14h10m 28h15m

●If the surrounding temperature is high, or a motion picture is recorded continuously, [ ] is

displayed and recording may be stopped halfway through to protect the camera.

●Motion pictures with their file size set to [FHD], [HD] or [VGA] in [MP4]:

Recording stops when the continuous recording time exceeds 29 minutes and 59 seconds or the

file size exceeds 4 GB.

• Since the file size becomes larger with [FHD], recording with [FHD] will stop before 29 minutes

59 seconds.

●Motion pictures with their file size set to [4K] in [MP4]:

Recording stops when the continuous recording time exceeds 29 minutes 59 seconds. (You can

continue recording without interruption even if the file exceeds 4 GB, but the motion picture file will

be recorded and played back in separate files.)

●The maximum available continuous recording time is displayed on the screen.

Switching the display between the number of recordable pictures

that you can take and the available recording time

→ [Custom] → [Remaining Disp.]

[ ] (Remaining shots):

Displays the number of pictures that can be recorded.

[ ] (Remaining time):

Displays the remaining recording time.

60p

Number of

recordable

pictures

Available

recording time

33 SQW0419

Preparations

Opening the Monitor/Adjusting the Monitor

1Place your finger in the cleft on the

right side of the monitor and open the

monitor toward the left side (maximum

180°)

2It can be rotated 180° to the direction

of the lens

3Return the monitor to its original

position

•Only rotate the monitor after opening it wide enough, and be careful not to use

excessive force. Doing so may cause damage to this unit.

Free angle shooting

The monitor can be rotated to suit your needs. This is convenient as it allows you to take

pictures from various angles by adjusting the monitor.

• Do not block the AF Assist Lamp with your fingers or other objects.

Taking pictures at high angle Taking pictures at low angle

●When not using the monitor it is recommended that you close it with the screen facing inward to

prevent dirt and scratches.

34 SQW0419

Preparations

Setting the clock

The clock is not set when the camera is shipped.

1Turn the camera on

• The status indicator lights up when you turn this unit

on.

• If the language select screen is not displayed, proceed

to step 4.

2Press [MENU/SET] while the message is

displayed

3Press to select the language, and press [MENU/SET]

• The [Please set the clock] message appears.

4Press [MENU/SET]

5Press to select the items (year,

month, day, hour, minute), and press

to set

To set the display order or time display format

• Select [Style] and press [MENU/SET] to display the

setting screen for display order and time display

format.

: Home time

: Destination time

Style

Display order

Time display format

6Press [MENU/SET]

7When [The clock setting has been completed.] is displayed,

press [MENU/SET]

35 SQW0419

Preparations

Setting the clock

8When [Please set the home area] is displayed, press

[MENU/SET]

9Press to set your home area and

press [MENU/SET]

City or area name

Current time

Difference from GMT

(Greenwich Mean Time)

●If the clock is not set, the correct date cannot be printed when you order a photo studio to print the

picture, or when you stamp the date on the pictures with [Text Stamp].

Changing time settings

1Select [Clock Set] from the [Setup] menu

• For details about how to set the menu (→56)

2Set the date and time (Perform steps 5 - 6. (→34))

●Clock settings will be saved for approx. 3 months even after the battery is removed, provided a

fully charged battery was installed in the camera for 24 hours beforehand.

36 SQW0419

Basics

Holding the camera

Hold the camera gently with both hands keeping your arms close to your body

while standing with your feet slightly apart.

•Do not block the flash, AF Assist Lamp, microphone, or speaker with your fingers

or other objects.

• Make sure that the camera does not move at the moment the shutter button is pressed.

• Be sure to remove the lens cap when recording.

• Make sure your footing is stable and there is no danger of colliding with another person

or object in the vicinity while taking pictures.

Speaker

AF Assist Lamp Microphone

• Do not hold the lens barrel as you take

pictures. There is a risk that your finger will

be trapped as the lens retracts.

■About the direction detect function

Still pictures recorded with the camera held vertically can

be automatically displayed in portrait orientation during

playback. (Only when [Rotate Disp.] is set to [ON].)

• The direction detect function may not operate correctly if

pictures are taken with the camera pointing up or down.

• Motion pictures and 4K burst files recorded with the 4K

Photo function are not displayed vertically.

37 SQW0419

Basics

Buttons/Dials/Levers Used for Recording

Zoom Lever/Side Lever (Use Zoom)

You can adjust the area of a picture to be taken using the zoom or side lever.

• When using the Viewfinder to take pictures, if you perform zoom operation using the

side lever, the camera can be kept stable, thus reducing jitters effectively.

• You can also use the zoom function from the touch panel. (→205)

• For details about zoom types and use, refer to (→201).

Zoom lever Side lever

1Move the zoom lever 1Slide the side lever

T side: Telephoto, Enlarge the subject

W side: Wide-angle, Capture a wider area

Turning angle is large: Zoom speed is high

Turning angle is small: Zoom speed is low

Slide width is large: Zoom speed is high

Slide width is small: Zoom speed is low

●Do not touch the lens barrel during zooming.

●Adjust the focus after adjusting the zoom.

●The camera may make a rattling noise and vibrate when the zoom lever or side lever is operated.

This is not a malfunction.

38 SQW0419

Basics

Buttons/Dials/Levers Used for Recording

Shutter button (Taking pictures)

• Press the [ ] button ( ) to set the drive mode to [ ] ([Single]).

1Press the shutter button halfway (press lightly) to

focus on the subject

• The aperture value and shutter speed are displayed. (If the

aperture value and shutter speed are shown in red and flashing,

you do not have the appropriate exposure, unless you are using

the flash.)

Focus display

( When focus is aligned:

illuminated

When focus is not aligned:

flashing)

Aperture value

Shutter speed

2Press the shutter button fully (push the button all the

way), and take the picture

●Pictures can be taken only when the image is correctly focused as long as the [Focus/

Release Priority] (→144) is set to [FOCUS].

●Even during menu operation or picture playback, if you press the shutter button halfway, you can

instantly set the camera ready for recording.

■Focus range

Focus range is displayed when operating the zoom

• The focus range is displayed in red when it is not focused

after pressing the shutter button halfway.

Focus range

The focus range may change gradually depending on the zoom position.

39 SQW0419

Basics

Buttons/Dials/Levers Used for Recording

Example: Range of focus during the Program AE Mode

2 m (6.6 feet)

30 cm (0.98 feet)

Displaying still pictures immediately after taking them

→ [Custom] → [Auto Review]

[Duration Time]

Set the time to display the pictures you have taken after taking still pictures.

[HOLD]: Displaying pictures until you press the shutter button halfway

[5SEC] / [4SEC] / [3SEC] / [2SEC] / [1SEC] / [OFF]

[Playback

Operation

Priority]

[ON]: During [Auto Review], you can switch the playback screen or delete

pictures.

[OFF]: During [Auto Review], you can perform the same button operations as

when you take a picture.

• When [Duration Time] is set to [HOLD], [Playback Operation Priority] is fixed to [ON].

• When recording with the 4K Photo function (→164), settings available for [Duration

Time] in [Auto Review] change to [ON] and [OFF]. [Playback Operation Priority] is fixed

to [ON].

Motion picture button (Recording motion pictures)

1Press the motion picture button to start recording

• Immediately release the motion picture button after pressing it.

2Press the motion picture button again to end recording

40 SQW0419

Basics

Buttons/Dials/Levers Used for Recording

Mode dial (Select the recording mode)

1Set to the desired recording mode

•Rotate the mode dial slowly to select the desired mode.

Intelligent Auto Mode (→76)

Take pictures with automatic settings.

Intelligent Auto Plus Mode (→82)

Allows you to adjust the brightness (exposure) and color hue as desired.

Program AE Mode (→84)

Take pictures with automatic shutter speed and aperture value settings.

Aperture-Priority AE Mode (→86)

Determine aperture, then record pictures.

Shutter-Priority AE Mode (→87)

Determine shutter speed, then record pictures.

Manual Exposure Mode (→88)

Determine aperture and shutter speed, then record pictures.

Creative Video Mode (→108)

Determine aperture and shutter speed, then record motion pictures.

* You cannot take still pictures.

Custom Mode (→111)

Record pictures using pre-registered settings.

Panorama Shot Mode (→93)

Record panorama pictures.

Scene Guide Mode (→96)

Take pictures using Scene modes.

Creative Control Mode (→101)

Take pictures by selecting your preferred picture effect.

Focus mode lever

Set the focusing operation to be performed when the shutter button is pressed halfway.

Position of the focus mode lever Focus operation

[AFS/AFF] / [AFC] Auto Focus

[MF] Manual Focus

41 SQW0419

Basics

Buttons/Dials/Levers Used for Recording

Side dial / Rear dial

Rotate the side dial to adjust focus, and rotate the rear dial to set the aperture value and

shutter speed.

You can also select items and set numeric values.

• This Owner’s Manual describes operations of the dials as follows:

Rotating the side dial:

Rotating the rear dial:

Side dial

You can adjust focus in the following cases:

• In Manual Focus

• In Auto Focus

(Only when [AF+MF] in [Custom] menu is set to [ON] (→144))

Rotating the side dial to the side :

Focusing on a nearby subject

Rotating the side dial to the side :

Focusing on a distant subject

Rear dial

You can set the aperture value, shutter speed, and other settings when in

following recording modes.

Mode dial Rear dial*1

[ ] (→84) Program Shift

[] (→86) Aperture value

[] (→87) Shutter speed

[] (→88) Shutter speed / Aperture value*2

*1 You can make the settings with the side dial as well. (→44)

*2 You can switch between the shutter speed setting operation and the aperture value setting

operation each time the [ ] button/[Fn1] button is pressed.

42 SQW0419

Basics

Buttons/Dials/Levers Used for Recording

Temporarily changing the items assigned to the side/rear dials

([Dial Operation Switch])

You can temporarily change the items assigned to the side/

rear dials using the function button to which [Dial Operation

Switch] is assigned.

[Dial Operation Switch] is assigned to [Fn2] at the time of

purchase. (→61)

1Press [Fn2] button

• A guide will be displayed showing the items assigned to the side/

rear dials.

• If no operations are performed, the guide will disappear in a few

seconds.

2Rotate the side/rear dial while the guide is displayed

• The settings assigned to each dial will change.

3Press [MENU/SET] to set

• You can also complete this step by performing either of the

operations below:

– Press the shutter button halfway

– Press [Fn2] button

●Items that are temporarily assigned to the side/rear dials can be used only while the guide (step 1)

or setting screen (step 2) is displayed.

Enabling/disabling the operation guide display

→ [Custom] → [Dial Guide] → [ON] / [OFF]

• When you set [Dial Guide] to [ON], operation guide appears

on the recording screen.

• The operation guide (above) is displayed at all times during

the operation of temporary assignment of the side dial and

rear dial. Example

43 SQW0419

Basics

Buttons/Dials/Levers Used for Recording

■Scenes and recommended settings

Below are examples of recommended side/rear dial assignment settings for scenes.

Scenes with complex

light sources and

contrast

Recommended settings

• Side dial: White Balance

• Rear dial: ISO sensitivity

Set the color tone by changing the [White

Balance] setting with the side dial, and then

set the ISO sensitivity by changing the ISO

sensitivity setting with the rear dial. (Default

settings)

When recording burst

pictures

Recommended settings

• Side dial: Drive Mode

• Rear dial: 4K Photo

Switch to the Burst or 4K Photo function by

changing the drive mode setting with the side

dial, and then set the method of taking 4K

photos by changing the [4K Photo function]

setting with the rear dial.

Setting the operation methods of the side dial and rear dial

→ [Custom] → [Dial Set.]

[Rotation (F/SS)]

Changes the rotation direction of the dials for adjusting the aperture

value and shutter speed.

[ ] / [ ]

[Exposure Comp.]

Assigns the Exposure Compensation to the side dial or rear dial so that

you can directly adjust it.

[ ] (Side dial) / [ ] (Rear dial) / [OFF]

[Dial Operation Switch

Setup]

Sets the items to be assigned temporarily to the side/rear dials when you

press the function button to which [Dial Operation Switch] is assigned.

[ ] (Side dial operation) / [ ] (Rear dial operation)

• Items that can be set are as follows:

– Macro recording (→145)

– [Sensitivity] (→155)

– [White Balance] (→118)

– [AF Mode/MF] (→128)

– Drive mode (→160)

– [Photo Style] (→113)

– [Filter Select] (→101, 115)

– [Aspect Ratio] (→122)

– [4K PHOTO] (→164)

– [Highlight Shadow] (→117)

– [i.Dynamic] (→125)

– [i.Resolution] (→125)

– [Flash Mode] (→208)

– [Flash Adjust.] (→212)

• [Highlight Shadow] uses the two dials. It will be automatically assigned

to both of the dials when you assign it to either of them.

44 SQW0419

Basics

Buttons/Dials/Levers Used for Recording

Side button

If you press the side button in recording, you can use it in the following

two ways:

• Calling the function for supporting the focus operation

• Switching the operation of the side dial

■Calling the function for supporting the focus operation

In Auto Focus: If you press the side button, the selection

screen for the case when focus is on

a nearby subject (macro recording) is

displayed*. (→145)

* In the Intelligent Auto Mode ([ ] or [ ]), the

AF Tracking function is applicable. (→132)

In Manual Focus: If you press the side button, the Auto Focus starts working

temporarily (One-shot AF). (→149)

■Switching the operation of the side dial

Set the menu

→ [Custom] → [Side Button Setting] → [F/SS]

Press the side button

• You can rotate the side dial to set the aperture value and shutter speed.

You can switch the setting operation of the side dial each time you press the side button.

Aperture value or shutter speed setting Focus adjustment (→144, 147)

●Select [AF /FOCUS] in step to return to the default setting.

●In the Manual Exposure Mode, you can set the aperture value with the side dial, and the shutter

speed with the rear dial. If you press the [ ] button/[Fn1] button, you can switch the setting

operation of both of the dials.

45 SQW0419

Basics

Buttons/Dials/Levers Used for Recording

Cursor button / [MENU/SET] button (Selecting/setting items)

Pressing the cursor button:

Selection of items or setting of values etc., is performed.

Pressing [MENU/SET]:

Confirmation of setting contents, etc., is performed.

• In this manual, the button that is to be used is indicated by

• Even when the camera is operated using the touch

screen, it is possible to operate with the cursor button and

[MENU/SET] button if a guide like the one shown on the

right is displayed.

• Even on menu screens etc. on which the guide is not

displayed, you can make settings and selections by

operating the buttons.

• When the [Cursor Button Lock] is assigned to the function

button, operation of the cursor button and [MENU/SET]

button can be disabled. (→62)

46 SQW0419

Basics

Buttons/Dials/Levers Used for Recording

[DISP.] button (Switching the display information)

1Press [DISP.] button to switch the display

• If the information on the screen is not displayed any longer

because no operation was performed for some time, press the

[DISP.] button or touch the screen to display the information

again.

During recording

You can use [Monitor Disp. Style] and [LVF Disp.Style] in the [Custom] menu to select

either [ ] (Monitor style display layout) or [ ] (Live View Finder style display layout)

for the display screen of the monitor and viewfinder.

■[ ] Monitor style display layout (Example of monitor style display)

With information Without information

With information

level gauge

Without information

level gauge

60p60p

Turned off

Monitor recording

information screen*

■[ ] Live View Finder style display layout (Example of viewfinder style display)

With information

(Detailed information) With information

With information

(Detailed information)

level gauge

With information

level gauge

60p60p

* This screen is displayed only when [Monitor Info. Disp.] in the [Custom] menu is set to [ON].

(→48) Settings can be adjusted directly by touching each of the items displayed on the screen.

47 SQW0419

Basics

Buttons/Dials/Levers Used for Recording

Switching the monitor display method

→ [Custom] → [Monitor Disp. Style]

[ ]: Live View Finder style display layout

[ ]: Monitor style display layout

Switching the viewfinder display method

→ [Custom] → [LVF Disp.Style]

[ ]: Live View Finder style display layout

[ ]: Monitor style display layout

Enabling/disabling the histogram display

→ [Custom] → [Histogram] → [ON] / [OFF]

When set to [ON], you can move the display position of the histogram by pressing .

• Direct touch operation is also possible from the recording screen.

Displays distribution of brightness in picture – e.g.

if the graph peaks at the right, this means there are

several bright areas in the picture. A peak in the center

represents correct brightness (correct exposure). This

can be used as a reference for exposure correction, etc.

(Example)

Dark ← OK → Bright

●When the histogram is not the same as that of the recorded picture under the following

conditions, histogram will be displayed in orange:

• When manual exposure assist indicates settings other than 0 EV in Manual Exposure Mode or

during Exposure Compensation.

• When the flash fires.

• When the correct exposure is not achieved or when the brightness of the screen cannot be

displayed accurately in a dark location.

●The histogram is different from those displayed using the image editing software of a computer.

48 SQW0419

Basics

Buttons/Dials/Levers Used for Recording

Enabling/disabling the guideline display

→ [Custom] → [Guide Line] → [ ] / [ ] / [ ] / [OFF]

• The guideline is not displayed during panorama picture recording.

When you select

[ ]

, you can move the position of the guideline by pressing

•

You can also set the position directly by touching [ ] on the guideline of the recording

screen.

Turning on/off the recording information screen of the monitor

→ [Custom] → [Monitor Info. Disp.] → [ON] / [OFF]

Using the level gauge

If you want to make sure that the camera is not slanted or tilted, for example, when you

take a picture of a landscape, use the level gauge indication as a reference.

1Press [DISP.] button to display the level gauge

The yellow line indicates the current angle. Correct the angle of the camera so that it

matches the white line.

Tilting up or down

• In this case, it is facing upward.

Tilting left or right

• In this case, the right side has

dropped.

• When the camera is tilted very little or not at all, the level gauge will turn green.

●Even when angle is more or less corrected, there may be an error of about ±1 degree.

●When [Level Gauge] is assigned to a function button, you can turn the level gauge on and off

every time you press the function button.

●The level gauge may not be displayed correctly or the direction detect function (→36) may not

operate correctly if the pictures are taken with the camera pointing sharply up or down.

49 SQW0419

Basics

Buttons/Dials/Levers Used for Recording

During playback

With information

Detailed information

display*1Histogram display*1

Without information

([Highlight])*1, *2, *3

100-0001

AM10:00 DEC. 1.2015

100-00011/98

Without information*3

*1 During Playback Zoom, Motion Picture Playback, Automatic Scrolling Playback of panorama

pictures, continuous playback or Slide Show: You can only turn the display on or off.

*2 This screen is displayed only when [Highlight] (below) in the [Custom] menu is set to [ON].

*3 If no operation is performed for a number of seconds, [ ] and other touch icons will disappear.

• A histogram of each color, including R (red), G (green), B (blue), and Y (luminance), is

separately displayed during playback.

Enabling/disabling the overexposed area display

→ [Custom] → [Highlight] → [ON] / [OFF]

You can set overexposed areas (areas that are too bright and where there are no shades

of gray) to flash on the screen when the [Auto Review] function is activated or during

playback. This does not affect recorded pictures.

• To reduce overexposed areas, record a picture by setting

negative exposure compensation (→47) using the histogram

display (→154) and so on as a reference.

• This feature is disabled during Multi Playback, Calendar

Playback or Playback Zoom.

50 SQW0419

Basics

Buttons/Dials/Levers Used for Recording

[LVF] button (Recording pictures using the viewfinder)

Switching between the monitor and viewfinder

You can operate the [LVF] button/[Fn4] button in two ways,

using it either as the [LVF] button or as a function button [Fn4].

You can use this button as the [LVF] button at the time of

purchase.

• For details on the function button, refer to (→61).

Eye Sensor

[LVF] button

1Press [LVF] button

Automatic switching

between viewfinder and

monitor

Viewfinder display Monitor display

■About diopter adjustment

Rotate the diopter adjustment dial to adjust until you

are able to clearly see the characters displayed in the

viewfinder.

51 SQW0419

Basics

Buttons/Dials/Levers Used for Recording

■Automatic switching between viewfinder and monitor

For automatic switching between the viewfinder and monitor, the eye sensor

automatically switches the display to viewfinder when your eye or an object moves

close to the viewfinder.

• The eye sensor may not work correctly depending on the shape of your eyeglasses,

the way you hold the camera, or whether the eyepiece and nearby area are exposed

to strong light. In this case, press the [LVF] button to switch the display.

• During motion picture playback or Slide Show, the eye sensor will not automatically

switch the display to the viewfinder.

Setting the sensitivity of the eye sensor or setting to switch the

display between the viewfinder and monitor

→ [Custom] → [Eye Sensor]

[Sensitivity] Use this setting to set the sensitivity of the eye sensor.

[HIGH] / [LOW]

[LVF/Monitor Switch]

Use this setting to switch the display between the viewfinder and monitor.

[LVF/MON AUTO] (Automatic switching between viewfinder and

monitor) / [LVF] (Viewfinder display) / [MON] (Monitor display)

• After the display is switched using the [LVF] button, the setting of [LVF/

Monitor Switch] will also change.

Adjusting/not adjusting the focus automatically when the eye sensor

is activated

→ [Custom] → [Eye Sensor AF] → [ON] / [OFF]

• Even when [Eye Sensor AF] is set and the camera automatically adjusts the focus, a

beep will not sound.

• [Eye Sensor AF] may not work when the lighting is low.

52 SQW0419

Basics

Touch screen (Touch operations)

Touch screen of this unit is capacitive. Touch the panel directly with your bare finger.

Touch

To touch and release the touch screen. Be sure to touch

the center of the desired icon.

Drag

To touch and slide your finger across the touch screen.

This can also be used to forward or rewind a picture during

playback, etc.

Pinch (spread/pinch)

On the touch screen, spread (pinch out) your 2 fingers to

zoom in, and pinch (pinch in) your 2 fingers to zoom out.

Enabling/disabling the touch operation

→ [Custom] → [Touch Settings]

[Touch Screen]

All touch operations. When set to [OFF], only button and dial operations

can be used.

[ON] / [OFF]

[Touch Tab]

Operation to display the touch icons by touching tabs such as [ ]

displayed on the right of the screen.

[ON] / [OFF]

[Touch AF]

Operation to optimize the focus or both the focus and brightness for a

touched subject.

[AF] (→137) / [AF+AE] (→142) / [OFF]

[Touch Pad AF]

Operation to move the AF area by touching the monitor when the

viewfinder is in use. (→141)

[EXACT] / [OFFSET] / [OFF]

53 SQW0419

Basics

Touch screen (Touch operations)

●Touch the screen with the clean and dry finger.

●If you use a commercially available monitor protection sheet, please follow the instructions that

accompany the sheet. (Some monitor protection sheets may impair visibility or operability.)

●Do not press on the monitor with hard pointed tips, such as ballpoint pens.

●Do not press the touch screen with your fingernails.

●Clean the monitor with a soft, dry cloth if there are fingerprints or other kinds of dirt on it.

●Do not scratch or press the monitor too hard.

●The touch screen may not function normally in the following cases.

• When touched by a gloved hand

• When the touch screen is wet

• When touched by multiple hands or fingers at the same time

54 SQW0419

Basics

Touch screen (Touch operations)

Touching the screen and recording (Touch Shutter function)

Recording mode:

This function enables you to focus and record still pictures simply by touching the

subjects that appear on the screen.

1Touch [ ]

2Touch [ ]

• The icon changes to [ ] and you can now proceed with touch

shutter recording.

3Touch the subject you want to record

• To release the touch shutter function → Touch [ ].

●If shooting with the touch shutter fails, the AF area turns red and disappears.

●Measurement of brightness is performed on the spot touched when the [Metering Mode] (→158) is

set to [ ]. At the edge of the screen, the metering may be affected by the brightness around the

touched location.

55 SQW0419

Basics

Touch screen (Touch operations)

Easily Optimizing the Brightness for a Specified Area

([Touch AE])

Recording mode:

You can easily optimize the brightness for a touched position. When the face of the

subject appears dark, you can brighten the screen according to the brightness of the face.

1Touch [ ]

2Touch [ ]

• The setting screen for the brightness optimization position is

displayed.

• [Metering Mode] is set to [ ], which is used exclusively for the

[Touch AE].

3Touch the subject you want to optimize the brightness

for

• Touching [Reset] will bring the brightness optimization position

back to the center.

SetSet

ResetReset

4Touch [Set]

■Canceling the [Touch AE] function

Touch [ ]

• [Metering Mode] returns to the original setting, and the brightness optimization position is

canceled.

●This function is not available in the following cases:

• When using the Digital Zoom

• During [High Speed Video] recording

• When [Touch AF] in [Touch Settings] of the [Custom] menu has been set to [AF+AE] (→52)

56 SQW0419

Basics

Setting the menu

You can use the menu to set camera and recording functions, operate playback functions,

and perform other operations.

In this Owner’s Manual, steps for setting a menu item are described as follows:

Example: To change the [Quality] setting from [ ] to [ ] in the [Rec] menu

→ [Rec] → [Quality] → [ ]

How to set the menu

You can set the menus using two types of operation—touch operations in which you

touch the screen, and button operations in which you press the cursor button and rotate

the side dial and rear dial.

• The menu types and items that are displayed vary according to the mode.

• The setting methods vary depending on the menu item.

1Press [MENU/SET] to bring up the menu

[Rec]

(→336)

You can perform settings for the aspect ratio, number of pixels, 4K

Photo, etc.

[Motion Picture]

(→337)

You can select the recording format and picture quality and other

settings.

[Custom]

(→338)

Operation of the unit, such as displaying of the screen and button

operations, can be set up according to your preferences. Also, it is

possible to register the modified settings.

[Setup]

(→339)

You can perform settings that make usage more convenient, such

as the changing the clock settings and beep volume. You can also

perform Wi-Fi function-related settings.

[Playback]

(→339)

You can specify picture protection, cropping, print settings, and other

settings for pictures you have taken.

57 SQW0419

Basics

Setting the menu

■Switching menu type

Press

Menu type

Press to select a menu switch icon such as [ ]

• Items can also be selected by rotating the side dial.

Press [MENU/SET]

With touch screen operations

Touch a menu switch icon, such as [ ]

2Press to select the menu item and press

[MENU/SET]

• The menu item can also be selected by rotating the rear

dial.

• You can also switch to the next page by pressing [DISP.]

button or rotating the zoom lever.

With touch screen operations

Touch the menu item

• You can switch to the next page by touching [ ]/[ ].

Page

Item

3Press to select the setting and press [MENU/SET]

• The setting can also be selected by rotating the rear dial.

With touch screen operations

Touch the setting to set

Selected setting

Settings

58 SQW0419

Basics

Setting the menu

4Press the [Q.MENU ] button repeatedly until the

recording or playback screen reappears

• During recording, the menu screen can also be exited by

pressing the shutter button halfway.

With touch screen operations

Touch [ ]

●When [Menu Resume] (→72) in the [Setup] menu is set to [ON], the screen

displayed last after you selected the menu item will reappear.

It is set to [ON] at the time of purchase.

●When the [Menu Information] (→72) in the [Setup] menu is set to [ON],

descriptions of the menu items and settings will appear on the menu screen.

59 SQW0419

Basics

Calling frequently-used menus instantly (Quick Menu)

You can easily call some of the menu items and set them.

• Some items or settings can not be selected depending on the mode or display style the

camera is in.

You can operate the [Q.MENU ] button/[Fn3] button in two ways, using it either as

the [Q.MENU] or as a function button [Fn3].

You can use this button as the [Q.MENU ] button at the time of purchase.

• For details on the function button, refer to (→61).

1Press [Q.MENU ] button

2Rotate the side dial or zoom lever to

select a menu item

• The menu item can also be selected by pressing .

60p

3Rotate the rear dial to select the setting

• The setting can also be selected with .

60p

4Press [Q.MENU ] button to close the

Quick menu

Using the Quick menu on the monitor recording information

screen (→46) of [ ] (monitor style)

(Press the [DISP.] button repeatedly until the screen appears.)

Press [Q.MENU ] button

Rotate the rear dial to select an item

Rotate the side dial to select a setting

Press the [Q.MENU ] button to fix the setting

• You can also set with and [MENU/SET].

60 SQW0419

Basics

Calling frequently-used menus instantly (Quick Menu)

Switching the method for setting Quick Menu items

→ [Custom] → [Q.MENU]

[PRESET]: The default items can be set.

[CUSTOM]: The Quick Menu will consist of desired items (below).

Change the Quick Menu to your preferred item

When [Q.MENU] in the [Custom] menu is set to [CUSTOM] (above), the Quick Menu can

be changed as desired. Up to 15 items can be set to the Quick Menu.

1After pressing the [Q.MENU ] button, press to

select [ ], and press [MENU/SET]

2Press to select the menu item in the top row

and press [MENU/SET]

• Items displayed in the top row can be set even if displayed in

gray.

Top row:

Items that can be set

Bottom row: Set items

3Press to select the empty space in the bottom row

and press [MENU/SET]

• You can also set the menu item by dragging it from the top row to

the bottom row.

• If there is no empty space in the bottom row, you can replace an

existing item with a new select item by selecting the existing item.

• To cancel the setting, move to the bottom row by pressing and

select an item to cancel, and then press [MENU/SET].

4Press [Q.MENU ] button

• It will return to screen of step 1. Press [MENU/SET] to switch to the recording screen.

61 SQW0419

Basics

You can assign frequently-used functions to particular buttons ([Fn1] - [Fn4]) or icons

displayed on the screen ([Fn5] - [Fn9]).

• Certain functions cannot be assigned to some function buttons.

• The function assigned to the function button may not work in some modes or on some

display screens.

1Set the menu

→ [Custom] → [Fn Button Set]

2Use to select [Setting in REC mode] or [Setting in PLAY

mode] and press [MENU/SET]

3Press to select the function button

you want to assign a function to and

press [MENU/SET]

4Press to select the function you want

to assign and press [MENU/SET]

• For details on the functions that can be assigned in

[Setting in REC mode], refer to (→62).

• For details on the functions that can be assigned in

[Setting in PLAY mode], refer to (→63).

• To restore the default function button settings, select

[Restore to Default].

■Configuring the function button settings from the monitor recording information

screen

Touching [ ] on the monitor recording information screen (→46) also allows you to

display the screen in step 2.

Assigning frequently used functions to the buttons

(Function buttons)

62 SQW0419

Basics

Assigning frequently used functions to the buttons (Function buttons)

Using the function buttons during recording

Press the function button to use the assigned function.

■Using function buttons with touch operations

Touch [ ]

Touch [Fn5], [Fn6], [Fn7], [Fn8] or [Fn9]

■Functions that can be assigned in [Setting in REC mode]

[Rec] menu/Recording functions

• [Exposure Comp.] (→154):

[Fn1]*

• [Wi-Fi] (→257): [Fn5]*

• [Q.MENU] (→59): [Fn3]*

• [LVF/Monitor Switch] (→50):

[Fn4]*

• [AF/AE LOCK] (→152)

• [AF-ON] (→143, 152)

• [Macro Mode] (→145)

• [Preview] (→90)

• [One Push AE] (→92)

• [Touch AE] (→55)

• [Level Gauge] (→48): [Fn6]*

• [Focus Area Set]

• [Cursor Button Lock]

• [Dial Operation Switch]

(→42): [Fn2]*

• [Photo Style] (→113)

• [Filter Select] (→115)

• [Aspect Ratio] (→122)

• [Picture Size] (→122)

• [Quality] (→123)

• [AFS/AFF] (→129)

• [Metering Mode] (→158)

• [Burst Rate] (→161)

• [4K PHOTO] (→164): [Fn9]*

• [Auto Bracket] (→178)

• [Self Timer] (→180)

• [Highlight Shadow] (→117)

• [i.Dynamic] (→125)

• [i.Resolution] (→125)

• [HDR] (→126)

• [Shutter Type] (→159)

• [Flash Mode] (→208)

• [Flash Adjust.] (→212)

• [i.Zoom] (→202)

• [Digital Zoom] (→203)

• [Stabilizer] (→199)

• [Sensitivity] (→155)

• [White Balance] (→118)

• [AF Mode/MF] (→128)

• Drive mode (→160)

• [Restore to Default]

[Motion Picture] menu

• [Snap Movie] (→221): [Fn8]*

• [Motion Pic. Set] (→218)

• [Picture Mode] (→220)

[Custom] menu

• [Silent Mode] (→191)

• [Peaking] (→151)

• [Histogram] (→47): [Fn7]*

• [Guide Line] (→48)

• [Zebra Pattern] (→196)

• [Monochrome Live View] (→197)

• [Rec Area] (→215)

• [Zoom lever] (→204)

• [Side Lever] (→204)

• [Touch Screen] (→52)

* Function button settings at the time of purchase.

63 SQW0419

Basics

Assigning frequently used functions to the buttons (Function buttons)

●When [Focus Area Set] is assigned to the function button, you can display the AF area or the MF

Assist position setting screen.

●When [Cursor Button Lock] is assigned to a function button, operation of the cursor button and

[MENU/SET] button is disabled. To enable operation, press the function button again.

●When [Stabilizer] is set, you can make only the [Operation Mode].

●The function assigned to the [Fn2] button will not work in the following cases:

• When using [Time Lapse Shot]

• When [Multi Exp.] is set

• Intelligent Auto Mode

• Intelligent Auto Plus Mode

• Creative Control Mode

• When Auto Focus mode is set to [Custom Multi]

• When recording with [ ] ([4K Burst(S/S)]) of the 4K Photo function.

●The function assigned to the [Fn3] button will not work in the following cases:

• [Miniature Effect], [One Point Color], [Sunshine] ([Creative Control] mode)

●[Fn5], [Fn6], [Fn7], [Fn8], and [Fn9] cannot be used when the viewfinder is in use.

Using the function buttons during playback

You can directly set an assigned function to a selected image by pressing the function

button during playback.

Example: When [Fn1] is set to [Favorite]

1Press to select the picture

2Press [Fn1] button, and then set the picture as

[Favorite]

■Functions that can be assigned in [Setting in PLAY mode]

• The following functions can be assigned to the button [Fn1], [Fn2], or [Fn4].

[Playback] menu/Playback functions

• [Favorite] (→252): [Fn1]*

• [Print Set] (→253)

• [Protect] (→254)

• [Delete Single] (→234)

• [Off]: [Fn2]*, [Fn4]*

• [Restore to Default]

* Function button settings at the time of purchase.

64 SQW0419

Basics

Using the [Setup] menu

[Clock Set] and [Economy] are important for clock setting and battery life. Please

check these before use.

For details on how to select the [Setup] menu settings, refer to (→56).

[Clock Set]

Set time, date, and display format. (→34)

[World Time]

Set the recording date and time with the local time at your destination.

• You can set [Destination] after setting [Home].

Settings: [Destination] / [Home]

1Use to select [Destination] or [Home] and press [MENU/SET]

2Use to select area and press [MENU/SET]

City/area name

Difference with

home time

Current time at selected destination

When [Destination] has been selected When [Home] has been selected

■To set daylight savings

Press in step 2. (Press again to release the setting)

• When daylight savings [ ] is set, the current time is advanced by 1 hour. If the setting is

canceled, the time automatically returns to the current time.

■When you come back from your travel destination

Select [Home] in step 1 and press [MENU/SET].

●If you cannot find your destination in the area displayed on the screen, set based on difference

with home time.

65 SQW0419

Basics

Using the [Setup] menu

For details on how to select the [Setup] menu settings, refer to (→56).

[Travel Date]

If you set your travel schedule and record pictures, the day of your trip on which the

picture was taken will be recorded.

■[Travel Setup]

Settings: [SET] / [OFF]

1Use to select [Travel Setup] and press [MENU/SET]

2Use to select [SET] and press [MENU/SET]

3Use to select the departure date and press [MENU/SET]

4Use to select the return date and press [MENU/SET]

■To record [Location]

Once the [Travel Setup] is set, you can set the location.

Select [Location] in step 1 above, and press [MENU/SET]

Use to select [SET] and press [MENU/SET]

Enter your location (Entering text (→75))

●To print [Location] or the number of days that have passed, either use [Text Stamp] (→246) or

print using the “PHOTOfunSTUDIO” software on the supplied DVD.

●The travel date is calculated from the set departure date and the date set in the camera’s clock.

When destination is set in [World Time], days elapsed are calculated based on local destination

time.

●When [Travel Setup] is set to [OFF], the number of days elapsed is not recorded. It is not

displayed even if [Travel Setup] is set to [SET] after recording.

●When the current date passes the return date, [Travel Setup] is automatically canceled.

●[Travel Date] cannot be recorded for AVCHD motion pictures.

●[Location] is not recorded when you record motion pictures and 4K photos.

[Wi-Fi]

Settings: [Wi-Fi Function] / [Wi-Fi Setup]

Configure the settings required for the Wi-Fi function. (→258, 299)

66 SQW0419

Basics

Using the [Setup] menu

For details on how to select the [Setup] menu settings, refer to (→56).

[Beep]

Sets the beep sounds or shutter sounds.

■[Beep Volume]

Settings: (High) / (Low) / (Off)

■[Shutter Vol.]

Settings: (High) / (Low) / (Off)

■[Shutter Tone]

Settings: / /

●When [Silent Mode] is set to [ON], [Beep Volume] and [Shutter Vol.] are set to “Off”.

[Live View Mode]

Sets the display speed and picture quality of the screen (Live View screen) when

recording pictures.

Settings

[30fps]

Pictures are displayed at 30 fps.

For example, use when you want to record a comparatively slow-moving subject while

confirming the focusing. Minimizes power consumption and the operating time is

extended.

[60fps]

Display speed has higher priority over picture quality and pictures are displayed at

60 fps.

For example, use when you want to record a fast-moving subject.

●The [Live View Mode] setting does not affect the recorded picture.

●The display speed may slow down in dark locations.

●When the AC adaptor (optional) and DC coupler (optional) are used, [Live View Mode] is fixed to

[60fps].

●[Live View Mode] is disabled while the HDMI output is being used for recording.

67 SQW0419

Basics

Using the [Setup] menu

For details on how to select the [Setup] menu settings, refer to (→56).

[Monitor Display] / [Viewfinder]

Adjust brightness and color of the monitor or viewfinder.

Settings

[Brightness] Adjusts the brightness.

[Contrast] Adjusts the contrast.

[Saturation] Adjusts the vividness of colors.

[Red Tint] Adjusts red hues.

[Blue Tint] Adjusts blue hues.

1Press to select the setting item and press to make adjustments

• You can also make adjustments with the rear dial.

2Press [MENU/SET]

●It will adjust the monitor when the monitor is in use, and the viewfinder when the viewfinder is in

use.

●Some subjects may look different from their actual appearance, but the recorded picture will not

be affected.

68 SQW0419

Basics

Using the [Setup] menu

For details on how to select the [Setup] menu settings, refer to (→56).

[Monitor Luminance]

Sets the monitor brightness according to the ambient light level.

Settings

The brightness is adjusted automatically depending on how bright it is around the camera.

The brightness is increased.

The brightness is standard.

The brightness is decreased.

●Some subjects may look different from their actual appearance, but the recorded picture will not

be affected.

●[ ] returns to ordinary brightness if there is no operation for 30 seconds when recording. (Press

any button or touch the screen to make the screen brighter again.)

●Setting [ ] or [ ] reduces the operating time.

●Cannot select [ ] during playback.

●When the AC adaptor (optional) and DC coupler (optional) are used, the initial setting is [ ].

69 SQW0419

Basics

Using the [Setup] menu

For details on how to select the [Setup] menu settings, refer to (→56).

[Economy]

Turn off the camera or make the monitor go dark while not using the camera or if no

operation is performed for a preset period of time to minimize battery consumption.

■[Sleep Mode]

The camera is automatically turned off if the camera has not been used for the time

selected on the setting.

Settings: [10MIN.] / [5 MIN.] / [2 MIN.] / [1 MIN.] / [OFF]

• To restore → Press the shutter button halfway, or turn on the power again.

■[Auto LVF/Monitor Off]

The monitor is automatically turned off if the camera has not been used for the time

selected on the setting.

Settings: [5 MIN.] / [2 MIN.] / [1 MIN.]

• To restore → Press any button or touch the monitor.

●This function is not available in the following cases:

• During motion picture recording/playback

• When recording with [ ] ([4K Pre-Burst]) of the 4K Photo function

• When [Multi Exp.] is set

• When connected to computer/printer

• During Slide Shows

• When using [Time Lapse Shot]

• When [Auto Shooting] of [Stop Motion Animation] is set to [ON]

• While the HDMI output is being used for recording

●When using the AC adaptor (optional) and DC coupler (optional), the [Sleep Mode] is disabled.

●When using the AC adaptor (optional), [Auto LVF/Monitor Off] is fixed to [5 MIN.].

70 SQW0419

Basics

Using the [Setup] menu

For details on how to select the [Setup] menu settings, refer to (→56).

[USB Mode]

Select communication method for when connecting camera to a computer or printer with

USB connection cable (supplied).

Settings

[Select on connection]

Select communication method each time you connect to a computer

or PictBridge-compatible printer.

[PictBridge(PTP)] Select when connecting to a PictBridge-compatible printer.

[PC] Select when connecting to a computer.

[TV Connection]

Change the settings to be used when the camera is connected to a TV or other device.

■[TV Aspect]

This setting performs when an AV cable (optional) is connected.

Settings: [16:9] / [4:3]

71 SQW0419

Basics

Using the [Setup] menu

For details on how to select the [Setup] menu settings, refer to (→56).

[TV Connection] (continued)

■[HDMI Mode (Play)]

Set the format for the HDMI output when playing back on the HDMI compatible high-

definition TV connected with this unit using the HDMI micro cable.

Settings

[AUTO] Automatically sets the output resolution based on information from a

connected TV.

[4K] Outputs pictures with a resolution of 3840×2160 pixels using a progressive

scan method for the number of effective scanning lines (2,160 lines).

[1080p] Outputs pictures using a progressive scan method for the number of effective

scanning lines (1,080 lines).

[1080i] Outputs pictures using an interlace scan method for the number of effective

scanning lines (1,080 lines).

[720p] Outputs pictures using a progressive scan method for the number of effective

scanning lines (720 lines).

[480p] Outputs pictures using a progressive scan method for the number of effective

scanning lines (480 lines).

●If no image appears on the TV with [AUTO], switch the setting to a constant setting other than

[AUTO] to set a format supported by your TV. (Please read the operating instructions for the TV.)

■[HDMI Info Display (Rec)]

Set whether or not to display information when recording an image on the camera while

monitoring it on a TV.

Settings

[ON] The camera display is output as is.

[OFF] Only images are output.

●This will work when the HDMI micro cable is connected.

72 SQW0419

Basics

Using the [Setup] menu

For details on how to select the [Setup] menu settings, refer to (→56).

[TV Connection] (continued)

■[VIERA Link]

Enable automatic linking with other VIERA Link-compatible devices, and operability with

a VIERA remote control when connecting via an HDMI micro cable. (→305)

Settings

[ON]

Operations may be performed via the remote control of the VIERA Link-compatible

device.

• Not all operations will be available.

• Operability of the camera’s own buttons will be limited.

[OFF] Operations must be performed via the camera’s own buttons.

[m/ft]

Select how distance is displayed, in Ft or M.

Settings: [ ] / [ ]

[Menu Resume]

Save the last operated menu position.

Settings: [ON] / [OFF]

[Menu Background]

Set the background color for the menu screen.

[Menu Information]

Explanations of the menu items and settings are displayed on the menu screen.

Settings: [ON] / [OFF]

[Language]

Change display language.

Set the language displayed on the screen.

73 SQW0419

Basics

Using the [Setup] menu

For details on how to select the [Setup] menu settings, refer to (→56).

[Version Disp.]

Check the firmware version of the camera.

●When you press [MENU/SET] while the version is displayed, software information for this unit,

such as the license, is displayed.

[Exposure Comp. Reset]

If the recording mode is changed or the camera is turned off, the exposure compensation

(brightness) setting is reset.

Settings: [ON] / [OFF]

[Self Timer Auto Off]

The self-timer is canceled if the unit is turned off.

Settings: [ON] / [OFF]

[No.Reset]

Reset picture file numbers. (The folder number is updated and the file number starts from

0001.)

• To reset folder number to 100:

First, format the card, and reset the file numbers using [No.Reset]. Then, select [Yes]

on the folder number reset screen.

●A folder number between 100 and 999 can be assigned.

Numbers cannot be reset once folder number reaches 999. In this case, save all necessary

pictures to your computer, and format the card (→30).

74 SQW0419

Basics

Using the [Setup] menu

For details on how to select the [Setup] menu settings, refer to (→56).

[Reset]

The following settings are reset to the default:

– Recording settings (except for [Face Recog.] and [Profile Setup] settings) and drive

mode

– Recording settings ([Face Recog.] and [Profile Setup] settings)

– Setup/custom settings

●When the setup/custom settings are reset, the following settings are also reset:

• The [World Time] setting

• The [Travel Date] setting (Departure date, Return date, [Location])

• The settings of [Rotate Disp.], [Picture Sort], [Delete Confirmation] in the [Playback] menu

●Folder numbers and clock settings will not be reset.

[Reset Wi-Fi Settings]

Returns [Wi-Fi] settings to default settings.

(Excluding [LUMIX CLUB])

[Format]

Format (initialize) a memory card. (→30)

75 SQW0419

Basics

Entering Text

Use the cursor button to enter names with the Face Recognition function and in [Profile

Setup] (babies and pets), or to register locations in [Travel Date] etc.

• Example of operation for displaying a screen:

→ [Rec] → [Profile Setup] → [SET] → [Baby1] → [Name] → [SET]

1Use to select characters

2Press [MENU/SET] several times until the

desired character is displayed

• [ ]: Enter a blank.

■To change the character type

• Press [DISP.] button

• Use to select [ ] and press [MENU/SET]

■To continue entering characters

• Use to select [ ] and press [MENU/SET]

• Move the zoom lever toward T side

• Rotate the rear dial counterclockwise.

■To edit text

Use to select [ ] [ ] and press [MENU/SET]. Then, move the

cursor to the text to edit

• You can also use the side dial or rear dial to reposition the cursor.

Use to select [Delete] and press [MENU/SET]

Use to select the correct text, and press [MENU/SET]

3When you are finished entering text, use to select

[Set] and press [MENU/SET]

●Only alphabetical characters and symbols can be entered.

●A maximum of 30 characters can be entered (maximum of 9 characters when setting names in

[Face Recog.]).

●A maximum of 15 characters can be entered for [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ] and [ ] (maximum of

6 characters when setting names in [Face Recog.]).

76 SQW0419

Recording mode

Taking pictures with automatic settings

(Intelligent Auto Mode)

Recording mode:

This mode is recommended for those who want to point and shoot as the camera

optimizes settings to match the subject and recording environment.

(○: Available, –: Not available)

Intelligent Auto Plus Mode Intelligent Auto Mode

Setting the brightness

(exposure) ○–

Setting the color tone ○–

Defocus control

function ○ ○

Menus that can be set (→83)

1Set mode dial to [ ]

• The camera will switch to either the most recently used

of Intelligent Auto Mode or Intelligent Auto Plus Mode.

At the time of purchase, the mode is set to Intelligent

Auto Plus Mode. (→82)

2Point the camera at the subject

• When the camera identifies the optimal scene, the

icon for each scene turns blue for 2 seconds and then

changes to the normal red indication.

(Automatic Scene Detection)

60p

Auto Focus, Face/Eye Detection, and Face Recognition

[AF Mode] is automatically set to [ ]. If you touch the subject, the camera switches

to [ ] and the AF tracking function starts operating. Switching to [ ] is also possible

by pressing the cursor button or the side button*. Align the AF tracking area with the

subject and press the shutter button halfway to operate the AF tracking function. For

details about AF tracking, refer to (→132).

* When the [Side Button Setting] in the [Custom] menu is set to [AF /FOCUS].

• In [ ], [ ], and [ ], the camera adjusts the focus on the eye that is closest to this

unit and matches the exposure with the face. In Intelligent Auto Plus Mode or Intelligent

Auto Mode, the eye to be focused on cannot be changed. (Face/Eye Detection)

• Automatic Scene Detection does not function until the focus is locked on a subject

during AF Tracking.

• When [Face Recog.] (→192) is set to [ON] and if the camera recognizes a face similar

to a registered face, [R] is displayed on the upper right corner of the [ ], [ ], and

[ ] icons.

77 SQW0419

Recording mode

Taking pictures with automatic settings (Intelligent Auto Mode)

Flash

When the flash is open, the camera automatically sets [ ], [ ] (Auto/Red-Eye

Reduction), [ ], or [ ] based on the type of subject and brightness.

●Open the flash to use the built-in flash. (→206)

●When [ ] or [ ] is displayed, the [Red-Eye Removal] function is activated to automatically

detect red-eye and correct the picture data.

●When [ ] or [ ] is selected, the shutter speed is reduced.

Automatic Scene Detection

When taking pictures

[i-Portrait] [i-Scenery] [i-Macro] [i-Night Portrait]*1

[i-Night Scenery] [i-Handheld Night

Shot]*2[i-Food] [i-Baby]*3

[i-Sunset] When scene does not correspond to any of the above

*1 Displayed only when the built-in flash is open.

*2 When [iHandheld Night Shot] is [ON]. (→78)

*3 When children (that are registered in the camera with Face Recognition) under 3 years old are

recognized.

• When the camera identifies [ ] as the optimal scene and if the camera determines

that jitter is reduced by the use of a tripod or by other means, a shutter speed that

is slower than usual is selected. After pressing the shutter button, do not move the

camera while recording.

• When recording 4K photos, Scene Detection works the same way as when recording

motion pictures.

When recording motion pictures

[i-Portrait] [i-Scenery] [i-Low Light] [i-Macro]

When scene does not correspond to any of the above

●Depending on recording conditions, different scene types may be determined for the same

subject.

About Backlight Compensation

Backlight compensation is automatically activated in Intelligent Auto Plus Mode or

Intelligent Auto Mode. Backlight is a condition where a light shines from behind a subject.

When there is a backlight, the subject appears darker and the camera will automatically

attempt to correct it by increasing the brightness of the picture.

78 SQW0419

Recording mode

Taking pictures with automatic settings (Intelligent Auto Mode)

Taking pictures using a handheld camera

([iHandheld Night Shot])

Recording mode:

If a night scene is detected automatically while the unit is being handheld, [iHandheld

Night Shot] can record a still picture with less jitter and less noise without using a tripod

by combining a burst of pictures.

→ [Rec] → [iHandheld Night Shot] → [ON] / [OFF]

●The angle of view becomes narrow slightly.

●After the shutter button has been pressed, do not move the camera during the burst operation.

●When the camera is fixed in place on a tripod or by other means, [ ] will not be identified.

●The flash is fixed to the [ ] (Forced Flash Off) setting.

●This function will not work for still pictures while motion pictures are being recorded.

●This function is not available in the following cases:

• When recording 4K photos

• When [Quality] is set to [ ], [ ] or [ ]

• When using [Time Lapse Shot]

• When [Auto Shooting] of [Stop Motion Animation] is set to [ON]

79 SQW0419

Recording mode

Taking pictures with automatic settings (Intelligent Auto Mode)

Combining pictures into a single still picture with rich

gradation ([iHDR])

Recording mode:

When there is, for example, strong contrast between the background and the subject,

[iHDR] records multiple still pictures with differing exposures and combines them to

create a single still picture rich in gradation.

[iHDR] is activated when required. When activated, [ ] will be displayed on the screen.

→ [Rec] → [iHDR] → [ON] / [OFF]

●The angle of view becomes narrow slightly.

●After the shutter button has been pressed, do not move the camera during the burst operation.

●Since a burst of still pictures are combined after they have been recorded, it will be a few

moments before you can record another picture.

●In the case of composition from a burst, afterimages may appear if the subject was moving.

●This function will not work for still pictures while motion pictures are being recorded.

●This function is not available in the following cases:

• When recording using the flash

• When using [Burst]

• When recording 4K photos

• When using [Auto Bracket]

• When [Quality] is set to [ ], [ ] or [ ]

• When using [Time Lapse Shot]

• When [Auto Shooting] of [Stop Motion Animation] is set to [ON]

80 SQW0419

Recording mode

Taking pictures with automatic settings (Intelligent Auto Mode)

Defocusing the background (Defocus control function)

Recording mode:

You can easily set the blurriness of the background while checking the screen.

1Press [Fn2] button to display the setting screen

2Rotate the rear dial to adjust the background defocusing condition

250 125 60 30 15

8.05.62.8 4.0

Strong defocusing Slight defocusing

• Press [MENU/SET] to return to the recording screen.

■With touch screen operations

Touch [ ]

Touch [ ] to display the setting screen

Drag the exposure meter to set the blurriness

• Press [MENU/SET] to return to the recording screen.

●Pressing [Fn2] button on the blurriness setting screen will cancel the setting.

●In Intelligent Auto Mode ([ ] or [ ]), Auto Focus Mode is set to [ ]. The position of the AF

area can be set by touching the screen. (Its size cannot be changed)

81 SQW0419

Recording mode

Taking pictures with automatic settings (Intelligent Auto Mode)

Recording images by changing the brightness (exposure) or

color tone

Recording mode:

Setting brightness (exposure)

1Press [ ] button

2Rotate the rear dial to adjust brightness (exposure)

• Press [ ] button again to return to the recording screen.

Setting coloring

1Press to display the setting screen

2Rotate the rear dial to adjust color

• Press [MENU/SET] to return to the recording screen.

■With touch screen operations

Touch [ ]

Touch the item you want to set

[ ]: Coloring

[ ]: Brightness (exposure)

Drag the slide bar to set

• Press [MENU/SET] to return to the recording screen.

●The color setting will return to the default level (center point) when this unit is turned off or the

camera is switched to another Recording mode.

82 SQW0419

Recording mode

Taking pictures with automatic settings (Intelligent Auto Mode)

About Intelligent Auto Plus Mode and Intelligent Auto Mode

■Switching between Intelligent Auto Plus Mode and Intelligent Auto Mode

1Press [MENU/SET]

2Press

3Press to select the [ ] or [ ] tab

• Items can also be selected by rotating the side dial.

4Use to select [ ] or [ ] and press [MENU/SET]

It is also possible to display the

selection screen by touching the

Recording mode icon in recording

screen.

60p

83 SQW0419

Recording mode

Taking pictures with automatic settings (Intelligent Auto Mode)

Available menus

You can set only the following menus.

Intelligent Auto Plus Mode

Menu Item

[Rec] [Photo Style], [Aspect Ratio], [Picture Size], [Quality], [AFS/AFF], [Burst Rate],

[4K PHOTO], [Auto Bracket], [Self Timer], [iHandheld Night Shot], [iHDR], [Time

Lapse Shot], [Stop Motion Animation], [Shutter Type], [Conversion], [Color

Space], [Stabilizer], [Face Recog.], [Profile Setup]

[Motion Picture] [Photo Style], [Snap Movie], [Rec Format], [Rec Quality], [AFS/AFF],

[Continuous AF], [Conversion], [Mic Level Disp.], [Mic Level Adj.], [Special Mic.],

[Mic Level Limiter], [Wind Noise Canceller], [Wind Cut], [Zoom Mic]

[Custom] [Silent Mode], [Half Press Release], [Pinpoint AF Time], [Pinpoint AF Display],

[Focus/Release Priority], [AF+MF], [MF Assist], [MF Assist Display], [MF

Guide], [Peaking], [Histogram], [Guide Line], [Center Marker], [Highlight],

[Zebra Pattern], [Monochrome Live View], [Constant Preview] (M Mode), [Dial

Guide], [LVF Disp.Style], [Monitor Disp. Style], [Monitor Info. Disp.], [Rec Area],

[Remaining Disp.], [Auto Review], [Fn Button Set], [Side Button Setting], [Zoom

lever], [Side Lever], [Zoom Resume], [Q.MENU], [Dial Set.], [Video Button], [Eye

Sensor], [Touch Settings], [Touch Scroll], [Menu Guide]

[Setup] All menu items can be set. (→64)

Intelligent Auto Mode

Menu Item

[Rec] [Aspect Ratio], [Picture Size], [AFS/AFF], [Burst Rate], [4K PHOTO], [Self

Timer], [iHandheld Night Shot], [iHDR], [Time Lapse Shot], [Stop Motion

Animation], [Face Recog.]

[Motion Picture] [Snap Movie], [Rec Format], [Rec Quality], [AFS/AFF], [Special Mic.]

[Custom] [Silent Mode], [Guide Line], [Remaining Disp.]

[Setup] All menu items can be set. (→64)

84 SQW0419

Recording mode

Taking pictures after automatically setting the

aperture value and shutter speed (Program AE Mode)

Recording mode:

Take pictures using automatic aperture values and shutter speed settings in accordance

with the brightness of a subject.

1Set mode dial to [ ]

2Press the shutter button halfway

• If the aperture value and shutter speed flash red, you do not have the correct

exposure.

3While the numeric values are displayed

(approximately 10 seconds), rotate the

rear dial to change the values using

Program Shift

• The operation can also be performed by setting the

[Side Button Setting] in the [Custom] menu to [F/SS],

and then rotating the side dial. (→44)

• To cancel Program Shift, either turn off the camera or

rotate the rear dial until the Program Shift indication

turns off.

• Program Shift can easily be canceled by setting a

function button to [One Push AE]. (→92)

• The camera automatically removes noise when the

shutter speed is slow. Therefore, [Long shutter noise

reduction ongoing] may be displayed.

Although noise reduction requires the same time as

the shutter speed for signal processing, you can take

sharp pictures.

250 125 60 30 15

5.64.02.8

60p

Program Shift indication

Aperture value

Shutter speed

Enabling/disabling the exposure meter display

→ [Custom] → [Expo.Meter] → [ON] / [OFF]

●When you set this function to [ON], an exposure meter is

displayed during Program Shift, aperture setting, and shutter

speed operation.

●

Proper exposure is not possible in the range indicated in red.

●If the exposure meter is not displayed, press the [DISP.]

button to switch the display of the monitor. (→46)

Exposure meter

250 125 60 30 15

5.64.02.8

60p

●The exposure meter will turn off if no operation is performed for approximately

4 seconds.

85 SQW0419

Recording mode

Taking pictures after automatically setting the aperture value and shutter speed (Program AE Mode)

About Program Shift

The function for maintaining the same exposure (brightness) while changing the shutter

speed and aperture value combination is called “Program Shift”. You can use “Program

Shift” to take pictures by adjusting the shutter speed and aperture value even in Program

AE Mode.

2.0

2.8

4.0

5.6

8.0

1234567891011 12 13 14

1/2

1/4

1/8

1/15

1/30

1/60

1/125

1/250

1/500

1/1000

1/2000

(Aperture value)

(EV)

(Shutter speed)

Program Shift amount

Represents the aperture and shutter speed set automatically by the camera at each exposure

value.

Program Shift diagram

Represents the range of the aperture and shutter speed combination you can change with

Program Shift at each exposure value.

Program Shift limit

Represents the range of the aperture and shutter speed you can select when you use Program

Shift with the camera.

●Program Shift cannot be used in the following cases:

• When recording 4K photos

• When ISO sensitivity is set to [ ]

86 SQW0419

Recording mode

Recording mode:

• The effect of the aperture value and shutter speed you have set is not applied to the

recording screen. To check the effect on the recording screen, use Preview Mode.

(→90)

• The brightness of the screen may vary from the actual pictures recorded. Check the

brightness of pictures using the playback screen.

• The camera automatically removes noise when the shutter speed is slow. Therefore,

[Long shutter noise reduction ongoing] may be displayed.

Although noise reduction requires the same time as the shutter speed for signal

processing, you can take sharp pictures.

Taking pictures by setting the aperture value

(Aperture-Priority AE Mode)

When the aperture value is increased, the range of depth in focus expands, and the

picture shows up clearly from the position of the camera to the background. When the

aperture value is reduced, the range of depth in focus shrinks, and the background can

get blurry.

1Set mode dial to [ ]

2Rotate the rear dial to set the aperture value

• The operation can also be performed by setting the [Side Button

Setting] in the [Custom] menu to [F/SS], and then rotating the

side dial. (→44)

Aperture values

that can be set*Shutter speed set (seconds)

F2.8 - F8.0

60 - 1/4000

(When the mechanical shutter is used)

1 - 1/16000

(When the electronic shutter is used)

* Some aperture values are not selectable when using conversion

lens (optional).

250 125 60 30 15

8.05.62.8 4.0

Aperture value

Exposure meter

●When you rotate the rear dial or side dial, an exposure meter is displayed. If the correct exposure

is not achieved, the numeric values of the aperture are shown in red.

●If the correct exposure is not achieved when you press the shutter button halfway, the numeric

values of the aperture and shutter speed are displayed in flashing red.

Taking pictures by setting the aperture value and

shutter speed

87 SQW0419

Recording mode

Taking pictures by setting the aperture value and shutter speed

Taking pictures by setting the shutter speed

(Shutter-Priority AE Mode)

When you increase the shutter speed, you can reduce jitter when recording a subject.

When you decrease the shutter speed, the subject’s movement is shown.

1Set mode dial to [ ]

2Rotate the rear dial to set the shutter speed

• The operation can also be performed by setting the [Side Button

Setting] in the [Custom] menu to [F/SS], and then rotating the

side dial. (→44)

Shutter speeds that can be set (seconds) Aperture value

set

60* - 1/4000

(When the mechanical shutter is used)

1 - 1/16000

(When the electronic shutter is used)

F2.8 - F8.0

* Varies depending on the setting of ISO sensitivity.

8 15 30 60 125

2.85.6 4.0

Shutter speed

Exposure meter

●When you rotate the rear dial or side dial, an exposure meter is displayed. If the correct exposure

is not achieved, the numeric values of the aperture are shown in red.

●If the correct exposure is not achieved when you press the shutter button halfway, the numeric

values of the aperture and shutter speed are displayed in flashing red.

●If you switch the recording mode to Shutter-Priority AE Mode when ISO sensitivity is set to [ ],

ISO sensitivity will change to [AUTO].

●We recommend using a tripod or self-timer when the shutter speed is slow.

88 SQW0419

Recording mode

Taking pictures by setting the aperture value and shutter speed

(Manual Exposure Mode)

Determine the exposure by manually setting the aperture value and the shutter speed.

1Set mode dial to [ ]

2Rotate the rear dial to set the shutter speed and the

aperture value

• You can switch between the shutter speed setting operation and

the aperture value setting operation each time the [ ] button/

[Fn1] button is pressed.

• The operation can also be performed by setting the [Side Button

Setting] in the [Custom] menu to [F/SS], and then rotating the

side dial. (→44)

You can also set the aperture value with the side dial and the

shutter speed with the rear dial. You can switch the setting

operation of both dials by pressing the [ ] button/[Fn1] button.

Aperture values that

can be set*1

Shutter speeds that can be set*2

(seconds)

F2.8 - F8.0

[B] (Bulb),

60*3 - 1/4000

(When the mechanical shutter is used)

1 - 1/16000

(When the electronic shutter is used)

*1 Some aperture values are not selectable when using conversion

lens (optional).

*2 You may not be able to select some shutter speeds depending

on the aperture value.

*3 Varies depending on the setting of ISO sensitivity.

2 4 8 15 30 6

8.05.62.8 4.0

Shutter speed

Manual

Exposure Assist

Aperture value

Exposure meter

You can operate the [ ] button/[Fn1] button in two ways, using it either as the [ ] (Exposure

Compensation) button or as a function button [Fn1]. It is set to [ ] at the time of purchase.

In addition to the [Fn1] button, you can switch between the shutter speed setting operation and

the aperture value setting operation using a function button to which the exposure compensation

function has been assigned.

●When you rotate the rear dial or side dial, an exposure meter is displayed. If the correct exposure

is not achieved, the numeric values of the aperture are shown in red.

●If the correct exposure is not achieved when you press the shutter button halfway, the numeric

values of the aperture and shutter speed are displayed in flashing red.

●If you switch the recording mode to Manual Exposure Mode when ISO sensitivity is set to [ ],

ISO sensitivity will change to [AUTO].

●We recommend using a tripod or self-timer when the shutter speed is slow.

89 SQW0419

Recording mode

Taking pictures by setting the aperture value and shutter speed

Optimizing the ISO sensitivity for the shutter speed and aperture

value

When the ISO sensitivity is set to [AUTO], the camera sets the ISO sensitivity

automatically so that the exposure will be appropriate for the shutter speed and aperture

value.

• Depending on recording conditions, an appropriate exposure may not be set or the ISO

sensitivity may become higher.

Manual exposure assist (estimate)

Shows pictures with standard brightness (appropriate exposure).

Shows brighter pictures. For the appropriate exposure, either use a faster shutter

speed or increase aperture value.

Shows darker pictures. For the appropriate exposure, either use a slower shutter

speed or reduce aperture value.

About [B] (Bulb)

If you set the shutter speed to [B], the shutter stays open while the shutter button is

pressed fully. (Approximately up to 60 seconds)

The shutter closes if you release the shutter button. Use this function when you want to

keep the shutter open for an extended period, for example, to record pictures of fireworks

or night scenes.

• When you take pictures with the shutter speed set to [B], use a sufficiently charged

battery. (→24)

• Manual exposure assist is not displayed.

• When ISO sensitivity is set to [AUTO], ISO sensitivity will change to [100].

• You cannot use this function when the electronic shutter is used.

●We recommend using a tripod or the shutter remote control (DMW-RSL1:

optional) when you take pictures with the shutter speed set to [B]. For details

about the shutter remote control, refer to (→323).

Enabling/disabling the preview of the selected aperture value and

shutter speed effects on the recording screen

→ [Custom] → [Constant Preview] (M Mode) → [ON] / [OFF]

●This function is disabled when the flash is used. Close the flash.

●You can use this function only in Manual Exposure Mode.

90 SQW0419

Recording mode

Taking pictures by setting the aperture value and shutter speed

Checking the effects of the aperture value and shutter speed

(Preview Mode)

Recording mode:

You can use Preview Mode to check the effects of the selected aperture value and shutter

speed.

• Checking the effect of the selected aperture value: This enables you to check the

depth of field (focus range) by physically narrowing the lens aperture blades to the

aperture value used for the actual recording.

• Checking the effect of the selected shutter speed: This allows you to check motion

in a scene by displaying the screen at the shutter speed used for the actual recording.

When the shutter speed is increased, the screen is displayed like a frame dropping.

Use this function to check the effect when you want to capture an image in a scene by

stopping the motion, for example, when you take a picture of water flowing.

1Assign [Preview] to the function button (→61)

• The following step is an example of assigning [Preview] to the [Fn3] button.

2Press the [Fn3] button to switch the confirmation screen

• Every time you press the [Fn3] button, the screen switches.

Normal recording screen

Aperture effect preview

screen

Effect of aperture value: ○

Effect of shutter speed: –

Shutter speed effect

preview screen

Effect of aperture value: ○

Effect of shutter speed: ○

Shtr Speed Effect added.

Fn3

Preview completed.

Fn3

91 SQW0419

Recording mode

Taking pictures by setting the aperture value and shutter speed

Depth of field characteristic

Recording

conditions

Aperture value Small Large

Focal length Telephoto Wide-angle

Distance to a subject Close Far

Depth of field

(Focus range)

Shallow (narrow)

Example:

To take a picture by

deliberately blurring the

background

Deep (wide)

Example:

To take a picture by adjusting

the focus while including the

background

●You can take a picture even when Preview Mode is activated.

●The range in which you can check the effect of a selected shutter speed is between 8 seconds

and 1/16000 seconds.

●This mode cannot be used with [ ] ([4K Pre-Burst]) of 4K Photo.

92 SQW0419

Recording mode

Taking pictures by setting the aperture value and shutter speed

Easily set aperture / shutter speed for suitable exposure

(One Push AE)

Recording mode:

When the exposure setting is too bright or too dark, you can use one push AE to achieve

a suitable exposure setting.

How to tell if the exposure is not adequate

• If the aperture values and shutter speed blink red when the shutter button is pressed

halfway.

• If the Manual Exposure Assistance is anything other than [ ] when in Manual

Exposure Mode. For details about the Manual Exposure Assistance, refer to (→89).

1Assign [One Push AE] to the function button (→61)

2(When exposure is not adequate) Press the function button

Blinks red Exposure meter

5.64.02.8

15 30 125 250

Change to appropriate

exposure

• The exposure meter is not displayed in Creative Control Mode.

• In the following cases, suitable exposure cannot be set.

– When the subject is extremely dark and it is not possible to achieve adequate exposure by

changing the aperture value or shutter speed

– When recording using the flash

– Preview Mode (→90)

93 SQW0419

Recording mode

Recording mode:

Consecutive photos taken while the camera is moved are combined to form a panorama.

1Set mode dial to [ ]

2Press the shutter button halfway to focus

3Press the shutter button fully and pan the camera in a small

circular motion to the recording direction to start recording

Taking pictures from left to right

Horizontal/vertical

guide line

Recording direction and

progress status (approximate)

Image size: [STANDARD] Image size: [WIDE]

• Pan the camera at a constant speed.

• You may not be able to take pictures successfully if you move the camera too quickly or too

slowly.

4Press the shutter button fully again to end recording

• You can also end recording if you stop panning the camera while taking pictures.

• Recording can also be ended by moving the camera to the end of the guide.

Recording panorama pictures (Panorama Shot Mode)

94 SQW0419

Recording mode

Recording panorama pictures (Panorama Shot Mode)

■Changing the recording direction and angle of view (image size) of panorama

pictures

→ [Rec] → [Panorama Settings]

[Direction] Sets the recording direction.

[ ] / [ ] / [ ] / [ ]

[Picture Size] Sets the angle of view (image size).

[STANDARD]: Gives priority to the image quality.

[WIDE]: Gives priority to the angle of view.

• When the same angle of view is recorded, [STANDARD] results in a larger

number of recording pixels.

• The number of recording pixels per horizontal line and vertical line of a panorama

picture varies depending on the picture size, recording direction and number of

stitched pictures. The maximum number of recording pixels is as follows:

Image size Recording direction Horizontal

Resolution Vertical Resolution

[STANDARD] Horizontal 8176 pixels 1920 pixels

Vertical 2560 pixels 7680 pixels

[WIDE] Horizontal 8176 pixels 960 pixels

Vertical 1280 pixels 7680 pixels

Tips

●Pan the camera in the recording direction as steadily as possible.

(If the camera shakes too much, it may not be able to take pictures or may end up

creating a narrow (small) panorama picture.)

Pan the camera to a point slightly ahead of the

point that you want to take.

(However, the last frame is not recorded to the

end.)

95 SQW0419

Recording mode

Recording panorama pictures (Panorama Shot Mode)

■About panorama picture playback

Pressing will start scrolling playback automatically in the

same direction as the recording.

• The following operations can be performed during

scrolling playback.

Start panorama playback / Pause*

Stop

* When the playback is paused, you can scroll forwards and backwards by dragging the screen.

When the scroll bar is touched, the playback position jumps to the touched position.

●The zoom position is fixed to the W end.

●The focus, exposure and White Balance are all fixed to optimal values for the first picture.

If the focusing or brightness of pictures recorded as part of a panorama picture after the first

picture are significantly different from those of the first picture, the panorama picture as a whole

(when all pictures are stitched together) may not have consistent focus and brightness.

●Since several pictures are stitched together to create a panorama picture, some subjects may be

distorted or the joining portions of successively taken pictures that are stitched may be noticeable.

●[Shutter Type] is fixed to [Electronic Shutter].

●Panorama pictures may not be created or pictures may not be recorded properly when taking

pictures of the following subjects or when taking pictures in the following recording conditions:

• Subjects that have a continuous monotone or pattern (sky, beach, etc.)

• Moving subjects (person, pet, vehicle, waves, or flowers swaying in the wind, etc.)

• Subjects whose colors or patterns change quickly (such as an image appearing on a display)

• Dark locations

• Locations with a flickering light source (fluorescent lamp, candle light, etc.)

96 SQW0419

Recording mode

Recording mode:

If you select a scene to suit the subject and recording conditions with reference to the

example images, the camera will set optimal exposure, color, and focus, allowing you to

record in a manner appropriate to the scene.

1Set mode dial to [ ]

2Press to select the scene

• The scene can also be selected by dragging an

example image or the slide bar.

3Press [MENU/SET]

●It is also possible to display the selection screen by touching the

Recording mode icon in recording screen.

●Depending on the [Menu Guide] setting in the [Custom] menu,

either the selection screen or the recording screen is displayed

when the Mode Dial is switched. (→100)

60p

■Switching the scene selection screen display

Press the [DISP.] button to switch the display

• When it is set to the guide display, detailed explanations and tips for each scene are displayed.

Normal display Guide display List display

Taking pictures according to the scene (Scene Guide Mode)

97 SQW0419

Recording mode

Taking pictures according to the scene (Scene Guide Mode)

●In the following scene, the recording screen is displayed like a frame dropping with a slight delay

compared to normal recording.

[Glistening Water], [Glittering Illuminations], [Soft Image of a Flower]

●To change the Scene Guide Mode, select the [ ] tab on the menu screen, select [Scene

Switch], and then press [MENU/SET]. You can return to step 2 on (→96).

●The following items cannot be set in Scene Guide Mode because the camera automatically

adjusts them to the optimal setting.

– Items other than the picture quality adjustment in [Photo Style], ISO sensitivity, [Metering Mode],

[Highlight Shadow], [HDR] and [Multi Exp.]

●Although White Balance is fixed to [AWB] for certain types of scene, you can fine tune the White

Balance or use White Balance bracketing by pressing the cursor button on the recording

screen. (→120, 121)

For the setting procedures for the Scene Guide Mode, refer to (→96)

1: [Clear Portrait]

●The more the zoom is drawn towards T side and the closer the camera is brought to the subject, the

greater the effect will be.

2: [Silky Skin]

●The more the zoom is drawn towards T side and the closer the camera is brought to the subject, the

greater the effect will be.

●If a part of the background etc. is a color close to skin color, this part is also smoothed.

●This mode may not be effective when there is insufficient brightness.

3: [Backlit Softness]

4: [Clear in Backlight]

●Open the flash. (You can set to [ ].)

●White saturation can occur if the subject is too close.

●Flash pictures taken closer or beyond the flash’s rated distance may appear too bright or too dark.

5: [Relaxing Tone]

6: [Sweet Child’s Face]

●When you touch the face, a still picture is recorded with the focus and exposure set for the touched

location.

●The more the zoom is drawn towards T side and the closer the camera is brought to the subject, the

greater the effect will be.

98 SQW0419

Recording mode

Taking pictures according to the scene (Scene Guide Mode)

For the setting procedures for the Scene Guide Mode, refer to (→96)

7: [Distinct Scenery]

8: [Bright Blue Sky]

9: [Romantic Sunset Glow]

10: [Vivid Sunset Glow]

11: [Glistening Water]

●Star filter used in this mode may cause glistening effects on the objects other than water surface.

12: [Clear Nightscape]

●Tripod, self-timer recommended.

●The shutter may remain closed after taking the picture. This is due to signal processing and is not a

malfunction.

●Noise may become visible when you take pictures in dark places.

13: [Cool Night Sky]

●Tripod, self-timer recommended.

●The shutter may remain closed after taking the picture. This is due to signal processing and is not a

malfunction.

●Noise may become visible when you take pictures in dark places.

14: [Warm Glowing Nightscape]

●Tripod, self-timer recommended.

●The shutter may remain closed after taking the picture. This is due to signal processing and is not a

malfunction.

●Noise may become visible when you take pictures in dark places.

15: [Artistic Nightscape]

●Tripod, self-timer recommended.

●The shutter may remain closed after taking the picture. This is due to signal processing and is not a

malfunction.

●Noise may become visible when you take pictures in dark places.

99 SQW0419

Recording mode

Taking pictures according to the scene (Scene Guide Mode)

For the setting procedures for the Scene Guide Mode, refer to (→96)

16: [Glittering Illuminations]

●Tripod, self-timer recommended.

●The shutter may remain closed after taking the picture. This is due to signal processing and is not a

malfunction.

●Noise may become visible when you take pictures in dark places.

17: [Handheld Night Shot]

●After the shutter button has been pressed, do not move the camera during the burst operation.

●The angle of view becomes narrow slightly.

18: [Clear Night Portrait]

●Open the flash. (You can set to [ ].)

●Tripod, self-timer recommended.

●When [Clear Night Portrait] is selected, keep the subject still for about 1 second after taking the

picture.

●The shutter may remain closed after taking the picture. This is due to signal processing and is not a

malfunction.

●Noise may become visible when you take pictures in dark places.

19: [Soft Image of a Flower]

●Tripod, self-timer recommended.

●For close-up recording, we recommend that you close the flash and avoid using it.

●When a subject is close to the camera, the effective focus range is significantly narrowed. Therefore,

if the distance between the camera and the subject is changed after focusing on the subject, it may

become difficult to focus on it again.

●When you take pictures at close range, the resolution of the periphery of the picture may decrease

slightly. This is not a malfunction.

20: [Appetizing Food]

●The more the zoom is drawn towards T side and the closer the camera is brought to the subject, the

greater the effect will be.

●Tripod, self-timer recommended.

●For close-up recording, we recommend that you close the flash and avoid using it.

21: [Cute Dessert]

●The more the zoom is drawn towards T side and the closer the camera is brought to the subject, the

greater the effect will be.

●Tripod, self-timer recommended.

●For close-up recording, we recommend that you close the flash and avoid using it.

100 SQW0419

Recording mode

Taking pictures according to the scene (Scene Guide Mode)

For the setting procedures for the Scene Guide Mode, refer to (→96)

22: [Freeze Animal Motion]

●Default [AF Assist Lamp] setting is [OFF]. (→144)

23: [Clear Sports Shot]

24: [Monochrome]

Displaying/not displaying the selection screen when the mode dial is

switched to [ ]/[ ]

→ [Custom] → [Menu Guide]

[ON]: Displays the selection screen.

[OFF]: Displays the recording screen of the currently selected mode.

101 SQW0419

Recording mode

Taking Pictures with different picture effects

(Creative Control Mode)

Recording mode:

This mode records with additional picture effects. You can set the effects to be applied to

a picture by selecting a sample picture and checking them simultaneously on the screen.

1Set mode dial to [ ] Preview display

2Press to select the picture effect

(filters)

• You can also select the picture effects (filters) by

touching the example images.

3Press [MENU/SET]

●It is also possible to display the selection screen by touching the

Recording mode icon in recording screen.

●Depending on the [Menu Guide] setting in the [Custom] menu,

either the selection screen or the recording screen is displayed

when the Mode Dial is switched. (→100)

60p

■Switching the display of a selection screen for applying picture effects (Filter)

Press the [DISP.] button to switch the display

• When it is set to the guide display, explanations for each picture effect are displayed.

Normal display Guide display List display

102 SQW0419

Recording mode

Taking Pictures with different picture effects (Creative Control Mode)

●In the following picture effect, the recording screen is displayed like a frame dropping with a slight

delay compared to normal recording.

[Rough Monochrome], [Silky Monochrome], [Miniature Effect], [Soft Focus], [Star Filter],

[Sunshine]

●[White Balance] will be fixed to [AWB] and ISO sensitivity to [AUTO].

●The following menu items can be set in the [ ] menu.

– [Filter Select]: Displays the picture effect (filter) selection screen.

– [Simultaneous record w/o filter]: Allows you to set the camera to take a

picture with and without an picture effect simultaneously. (→116)

Adjusting the picture effects according to your preferences

You can easily adjust the setting conditions (such as degree and coloring of an effect) of

the picture effects according to your preferences.

1Press to display the setting screen

2Rotate the rear dial to adjust the setting conditions of

the picture effects

• The settings that can be adjusted vary depending on the selected

picture effect.

• Press [MENU/SET] to return to the recording screen.

• When you select picture effects, [ ] appears on the screen.

• If you do not want to change the current setting, select the center

point (standard) in the adjustment level bar.

Picture effect Items that can be set

[Expressive] Vividness

Subdued coloring Gaudy coloring

[Retro] Coloring

Yellowish coloring Reddish coloring

[Old Days] Contrast

Low contrast High contrast

[High Key] Coloring

Pinkish coloring Light-bluish coloring

[Low Key] Coloring

Reddish coloring Bluish coloring

[Sepia] Contrast

Low contrast High contrast

[Monochrome] Coloring

Yellowish coloring Bluish coloring

103 SQW0419

Recording mode

Taking Pictures with different picture effects (Creative Control Mode)

Picture effect Items that can be set

[Dynamic Monochrome] Contrast

Low contrast High contrast

[Rough Monochrome] Grainy picture effect

Weak grainy picture effect Strong grainy picture effect

[Silky Monochrome] Degree of defocusing

Slight defocusing Strong defocusing

[Impressive Art]Vividness

Black & white Gaudy coloring

[High Dynamic] Vividness

Black & white Gaudy coloring

[Cross Process] Coloring

Greenish coloring / Bluish coloring /

Yellowish coloring / Reddish coloring

• Select the desired color tone by rotating

the rear dial, and press [MENU/SET].

[Toy Effect] Coloring

Orangish coloring Bluish coloring

[Toy Pop] Range in which peripheral brightness is reduced

Small Large

[Bleach Bypass] Contrast

Low contrast High contrast

[Miniature Effect] Vividness

Subdued coloring Gaudy coloring

• For details about [Miniature Effect] (→106)

[Soft Focus] Degree of defocusing

Slight defocusing Strong defocusing

[Fantasy] Vividness

Subdued coloring Gaudy coloring

[Star Filter] Length of the rays of light

Rays of light is short Rays of light is long

Number of the rays of light

Smaller Larger

Angle of the rays of light

Rotate to the left Rotate to the right

104 SQW0419

Recording mode

Taking Pictures with different picture effects (Creative Control Mode)

Picture effect Items that can be set

[One Point Color] Amount of color retained

Leaves a small amount of

color

Leaves a large amount of

color

• For details about [One Point Color] (→107)

[Sunshine] Coloring

Yellowish coloring / Reddish coloring /

Bluish coloring / Whitish coloring

• Rotate the rear dial to select coloring, and

press [MENU/SET].

• For details about [Sunshine] (→107)

105 SQW0419

Recording mode

Taking Pictures with different picture effects (Creative Control Mode)

Taking a picture with a blurred background (Defocus control function)

You can easily set the blurriness of the background while checking the screen.

1Press [Fn2] button to display the setting screen

2Rotate the rear dial to set

• Press [MENU/SET] to return to the recording screen.

• Pressing [Fn2] button on the blurriness setting screen will cancel

the setting.

250 125 60 30 15

8.05.62.8 4.0

●This function is not available in the following case:

• [Miniature Effect] (Creative Control Mode)

Setting brightness (exposure)

1Press [ ] button

2Rotate the rear dial to set

• Press [ ] button again to return to the recording screen.

■Change the settings by using the touch screen

Touch [ ]

Touch the item you want to set

[ ]: Adjusting the picture effect

[ ]: Degree of defocusing

[ ]: Brightness (exposure)

Drag the slide bar to set

• Press [MENU/SET] to return to the recording screen.

106 SQW0419

Recording mode

Taking Pictures with different picture effects (Creative Control Mode)

[Miniature Effect]

■Defocusing a picture

You can create the impression of a diorama by intentionally creating a blurred area and

focusing area using [Miniature Effect]. You can set the recording direction (direction of

blurred area), position and size of the focusing area.

Press [Fn3] button

• Setting screen can also be displayed by touching in order of [ ] then [ ].

Press or to move the focusing area (frame)

• You can also move the in-focus portion by touching the screen on

the recording screen.

• Touching [ ] allows you to set the recording orientation

(defocus orientation).

Rotate the rear dial to select the size of the focusing area

(frame)

• On the touch screen, spread (pinch out) your 2 fingers to zoom

in, and pinch (pinch in) your 2 fingers to zoom out. (→52)

• When you press [DISP.] button, the initial setting condition is

restored.

Press [MENU/SET]

●No audio is recorded for motion pictures.

●When a motion picture is recorded, the finished recording will be approximately 1/10th of the

actual recorded time period. (If you record a motion picture for 10 minutes, the resulting motion

picture recording time will be approximately 1 minute.) The recordable time displayed on the

camera is approx. 10 times of the actual recording time. When the Recording mode is changed,

be sure to check the recordable time.

●If you stop recording motion pictures too soon, the camera may continue recording until a certain

time. Hold the camera until the camera stops recording.

●If [MF] is selected for the focus mode, move the focusing area to the position at which the focus

has been adjusted.

107 SQW0419

Recording mode

Taking Pictures with different picture effects (Creative Control Mode)

[One Point Color]

■Select the color to be retained

Press [Fn3] button

• Setting screen can also be displayed by touching in order of [ ] then [ ].

Select the color to be retained with and press

[MENU/SET]

• You can also select it by touch operations.

• When you press [DISP.] button, the initial setting condition is

restored.

●The selected color may not be retained for some subjects.

[Sunshine]

■Setting the light source

Press [Fn3] button

• Setting screen can also be displayed by touching in order of [ ] then [ ].

Press to move the center of the light source to a different position

• The position of the light source can also be moved by touching the screen.

Tips on positioning the center of the light source

You can move the center of the light source to a point outside the image to obtain a

more natural finish.

Rotate the rear dial to adjust the size of the light source

• On the touch screen, spread (pinch out) your 2 fingers to zoom in, and pinch (pinch in) your 2

fingers to zoom out.

• When you press [DISP.] button, the initial setting condition is restored.

Press [MENU/SET]

108 SQW0419

Recording mode

Recording motion pictures by setting the aperture

value/shutter speed (Creative Video Mode)

Recording mode:

You can record motion pictures by manually setting the aperture value and shutter speed.

1Set mode dial to [ ]

2Set the menu

→ [Motion Picture] → [Exposure Mode]

3Press to select [P], [A], [S] or [M], and press [MENU/SET]

• The operation for changing the aperture value or shutter speed is the same as the

operation for setting the mode dial to [ ], [ ], [ ] or [ ].

It is also possible to display the selection screen by touching the

Recording mode icon in recording screen.

60p

4Press the motion picture button (or shutter button) to start

recording

5Press the motion picture button (or shutter button) to stop

recording

●About aperture value

• To record motion pictures with a sharp focus on both subject and background, set the aperture

value to a higher number. To record motion pictures with a defocused background, set a lower

number.

●About the shutter speed

• To record a sharp motion picture of a fast-moving subject, set a faster shutter speed. To record

a motion picture with a trailing effect for a subject’s movements, set a slower shutter speed.

• When you manually set a faster shutter speed, the screen noise may increase due to the higher

sensitivity.

• When you record a subject in an extremely bright place or under fluorescent or LED lighting

fixtures, etc., the colors and screen brightness may change or horizontal striping may appear on

the screen. If this happens, we recommend changing the Recording mode or manually adjusting

the shutter speed to 1/60 seconds or 1/100 seconds.

●When [Exposure Mode] is set to [M], [AUTO] of the ISO sensitivity will switch to [100].

●Drive mode settings are disabled.

109 SQW0419

Recording mode

Recording motion pictures by setting the aperture value/shutter speed (Creative Video Mode)

Recording Slow Motion Pictures ([High Speed Video])

Slow motion pictures can be recorded by performing recording at a super high speed.

When these recordings are played back, the motion is displayed slowly.

• To record pictures, use a UHS Speed Class 3 card. (→29)

1Set mode dial to [ ]

2Set the menu

→ [Motion Picture] → [High Speed Video]

3Use to select motion picture quality, and press [MENU/SET]

[240fps/VGA] Recording is done at 240 frames/second with [VGA] in [MP4].

[120fps/HD] Recording is done at 120 frames/second with [HD] in [MP4].

4Press the motion picture button (or shutter button) to start recording

5Press the motion picture button (or shutter button) to stop recording

●No sound is recorded.

●Recording stops when the continuous recording time exceeds 7 minutes and 29 seconds or

the file size exceeds 4 GB. (Recording can be performed up to 29 minutes and 56 seconds if

converted to playback time.)

●The settings for the focus, zoom, exposure and White Balance are fixed to the settings specified

when recording was started.

●Flickering or horizontal stripes may appear while recording under fluorescent lighting.

110 SQW0419

Recording mode

Recording motion pictures by setting the aperture value/shutter speed (Creative Video Mode)

Minimizing operational sounds during motion picture

recording

The operational sound of the zoom or button operation may be recorded when it is

operated during the recording of a motion picture. Using touch icons allows silent

operation while recording motion pictures.

1Set the menu

→ [Motion Picture] → [Silent Operation]

2Use to select [ON]

3Start recording

4Touch [ ]

5Touch icon

Zoom

Aperture value

Shutter speed

Exposure Compensation

ISO sensitivity

Mic level adjustment

6Drag the slide bar to set

• The speed of the operation varies depending on the position

you touch.

[ ] / [ ] Changes the setting slowly

[ ] / [ ] Changes the setting quickly

7Stop recording

●Cannot be used during [High Speed Video] recording.

111 SQW0419

Recording mode

Registering your own settings and recording

(Custom Mode)

Recording mode:

You can register the current camera settings as custom settings. If you then record in

Custom Mode, you can use the registered settings.

• Initial setting of the Program AE Mode is registered as the custom settings initially.

Registering your own settings ([Cust.Set Mem.])

To allow recording using the same settings, up to 3 sets of current camera settings can be

registered using [Cust.Set Mem.]. ([ ], [ ], [ ])

Preparations

Select the recording mode you wish to register and set the [Rec] menu, [Motion Picture] menu,

[Setup] menu, etc.

1Set the menu

→ [Custom] → [Cust.Set Mem.]

2Use to select custom set for registration and press [MENU/SET]

●The following menu items are not registered as custom settings.

[Rec] menu [Setup] menu

• Data registered with [Face Recog.]

• The [Profile Setup] setting

• All menus

[Custom] menu [Playback] menu

• [Touch Scroll]

• [Menu Guide]

• [Rotate Disp.]

• [Picture Sort]

• [Delete Confirmation]

112 SQW0419

Recording mode

Registering your own settings and recording (Custom Mode)

Recording using registered custom set

1Set mode dial to [ ]

• The custom set you used last time will be called up.

■To change a custom set

Set mode dial to [ ]

Press [MENU/SET] to bring up the menu

Press to select the custom set you want to use, and press [MENU/SET]

It is also possible to display the selection screen by touching the

Recording mode icon in recording screen.

60p

• The settings are switched to those settings you selected for the

custom set. 60p

Changing the registered content

Even if the menu settings are changed temporarily when the mode dial has been set to

[ ], the currently registered settings will remain unchanged.

To change the currently registered settings, overwrite the registered data using [Cust.Set

Mem.] on the [Custom] menu.

113 SQW0419

Picture Quality and coloring Settings

Adjusting the picture quality with effects [Photo Style]

Recording mode:

You can adjust the colors and picture quality according to the concept of the picture that

you want to create.

→ [Rec] → [Photo Style]

[Standard] Standard setting.

[Vivid]*1Setting with slightly high contrast and saturation.

[Natural]*1Setting with slightly low contrast.

[Monochrome] Setting that creates a picture using monochrome shades of gray only,

such as black and white.

[Scenery]*1Setting that creates a picture using vivid colors for the blue sky and

green.

[Portrait]*1Setting that produces the look of a healthy complexion.

[Custom]*1Setting for using colors and picture quality that were registered in

advance.

[Cinelike D]*2Gives priority to the dynamic range by using a gamma curve*3

designed to create film-like images. Suited for editing.

[Cinelike V]*2Gives priority to the contrast by using a gamma curve*3 designed to

create film-like images.

*1 This setting is not available in Intelligent Auto Plus Mode.

*2 You can use this function only in Creative Video Mode.

*3 When the actual brightness and the brightness to be captured are adjusted at each brightness level,

the relationship between these two kinds of brightness is plotted as a nonlinear curve. This is called

the gamma curve.

●In Intelligent Auto Plus Mode, the setting will be reset to [Standard] when the camera is switched

to another Recording mode or this unit is turned on and off.

●Only picture quality adjustment can be set in the Scene Guide Mode.

114 SQW0419

Picture Quality and coloring Settings

Adjusting the picture quality with effects [Photo Style]

■Adjusting the picture quality

• Picture quality cannot be adjusted in the Intelligent Auto Plus Mode.

Press to select the type of Photo Style Standard

Press to select an item and press to adjust

[Contrast] [+] Increases the contrast in a picture.

[–] Decreases the contrast in a picture.

[Sharpness] [+] Enhances the outlines in a picture.

[–] Softens the outlines in a picture.

[Noise Reduction]

[+] Increases the noise reduction effect to reduce noise.

This setting may slightly lower the resolution.

[–] Lowers the noise reduction effect to achieve a picture

quality with clearer resolution.

[Saturation]*1[+] Gaudy coloring

[–] Subdued coloring

[Color Tone]*1[+] Bluish coloring

[–] Yellowish coloring

[Filter Effect]*2

[Yellow] Enhances the contrast of a subject. (Effect: Low)

Records a blue sky clearly.

[Orange] Enhances the contrast of a subject. (Effect: Medium)

Records a blue sky with vibrant colors.

[Red] Enhances the contrast of a subject. (Effect: High)

Records a blue sky with even more vibrant colors.

[Green]

Applies subdued coloring for the skin and lips of a

person. Emphasizes green leaves and makes them

brighter.

[Off] —

*1 [Color Tone] is displayed only when [Monochrome] is selected. Otherwise, [Saturation] is

displayed.

*2 Displayed only when [Monochrome] is selected.

• When the picture quality is adjusted, [+] will be displayed in the [Photo Style] icon.

Press [MENU/SET]

■Registering the setting for the adjusted picture quality to [Custom]

Perform the picture quality adjustment in Step of “Adjusting the picture quality” and

press the [DISP.] button

115 SQW0419

Picture Quality and coloring Settings

Taking pictures using picture effects [Filter Settings]

Recording mode:

You can apply picture effects (filters) that are available for Creative Control Mode to

images in other modes, such as Aperture-Priority AE Mode or Panorama Shot Mode. For

details (→101).

→ [Rec] → [Filter Settings] → [Filter Select]

• If you do not want to add picture effects, please select [No Effect].

■Change the settings by using the touch screen

Touch [ ]

EXPSEXPS

Touch the item you want to set

[ ]: Picture effects (Filter)

[ ]: Adjusting the picture effect

●Cannot be used during [High Speed Video] recording.

●[Rough Monochrome], [Silky Monochrome], [Miniature Effect]*, [Soft Focus], [Star Filter] and

[Sunshine] are not available in the following cases.

• Creative Video Mode

• During motion picture recording

• When recording 4K photos

* In Creative Video Mode or when recording motion pictures, this item is not available only if the

motion picture size is set to [4K] in [Rec Quality].

●The following functions are not available in Panorama Shot Mode.

– [Toy Effect], [Toy Pop], [Miniature Effect], [Sunshine]

●When recording panorama pictures, the following effects are not applied to the recording screen.

– [Rough Monochrome], [Silky Monochrome], [Soft Focus], [Star Filter]

●When recording a panorama picture in a scene with low brightness, you may not be able to

achieve the desired results if [High Key] is used in the Panorama Shot Mode.

●The available ISO sensitivity settings will be limited up to [3200]. The ISO sensitivity for [High

Dynamic] will be fixed to [AUTO].

●Settings will be stored even if the recording mode is changed or the camera is turned off.

116 SQW0419

Picture Quality and coloring Settings

Taking pictures using picture effects [Filter Settings]

Taking two still pictures with and without picture effects

([Simultaneous record w/o filter])

You can take two still pictures at the same time by pressing the shutter button once; one

with effects and one without effects.

→ [Rec] → [Filter Settings] → [Simultaneous record w/o filter]

Settings: [ON] / [OFF]

• When [ON] is set, the camera will take a still picture with the effects applied and then a still picture

without the effects.

• After taking the picture, [Auto Review] will display only the still picture with the effects applied.

• If the drive mode is set to [Burst], [4K PHOTO] or [Auto Bracket], it is switched to [Single].

●This function is not available in the following cases:

• Panorama Shot Mode

• During motion picture recording

• Taking still pictures while a motion picture is being recorded (Only when [ ] (Video Priority) is

set.)

• When [Quality] is set to [ ], [ ] or [ ]

• When using [Time Lapse Shot]

• When using [Stop Motion Animation]

117 SQW0419

Picture Quality and coloring Settings

Adjusting highlights and shadows [Highlight Shadow]

Recording mode:

You can adjust the highlights and shadows in a picture while confirming the brightness of

these areas on the screen.

1Set the menu

→ [Rec] → [Highlight Shadow]

2Press to select the item

([Standard]) No adjustments.

([Higher contrast]) Makes the highlighted areas brighter and shadowed areas

darker.

([Lower contrast]) Makes the highlighted areas darker and shadowed areas

brighter.

([Brighten shadows]) Makes the shadowed areas brighter.

/ / (Custom) You can set a custom registration shape.

3Rotate the side dial to adjust the

brightness of the highlighted areas

and rotate the rear dial to adjust the

brightness of the shadowed areas

• To register your preferred settings, press to select

the registration target icon (Custom 1, Custom 2, and

Custom 3).

• Adjustments can also be made by dragging the graph.

Highlighted area

Shadowed area

Preview display

4Press [MENU/SET]

●You can press the [DISP.] button on the brightness adjustment screen to switch the screen display.

●The settings registered in [ ], [ ], or [ ] will be retained even if the camera is turned off.

●The settings adjusted in [ ], [ ], [ ], or [ ] will be restored to the default settings when the

camera is turned off.

118 SQW0419

Picture Quality and coloring Settings

Adjusting the White Balance

Recording mode:

In sunlight, under incandescent lights or in other such conditions where the color of white

takes on a reddish or bluish tinge, this item adjusts to the color of white which is closest to

what is seen by the eye in accordance with the light source.

1Press [ ] button ( )

2Rotate the side or rear dial to select the White Balance and

press [MENU/SET]

• You can also press the shutter button halfway to set the White Balance.

[AWB]Automatic adjustment in accordance with the light source.

[ ] Adjust to the color under a clear sky.

[ ] Adjust to the color under a cloudy sky.

[ ] Adjust to the color in the shade.

[ ] Adjust to the color under incandescent lights.

[ ]*Adjust to the color that is optimal for taking pictures using

the flash.

[ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ] Use the White Balance value that was set manually.

(→119)

[ ] Use the preset color temperature setting. (→120)

* The [AWB] setting is applied while recording motion pictures or 4K photos.

Under fluorescent lighting, LED lighting fixtures, etc., the optimal White Balance will

vary depending on the lighting type, so use [AWB], [ ], [ ], [ ] or [ ].

●The White Balance may not operate correctly if you take pictures using a flash or the subject is

recorded outside of the effective flash range (→207).

●In Scene Guide Mode, changing the scene or recording mode will return White Balance settings

(including the White Balance fine adjustment setting) back to [AWB].

●In the Scene Guide Mode, settings suitable for each scene are made.

119 SQW0419

Picture Quality and coloring Settings

Adjusting the White Balance

■Auto White Balance

When [AWB] (Automatic White Balance) is set, the coloring is adjusted in accordance

with the light source. However, if the scene is too bright or too dark or if other extreme

conditions apply, the pictures may appear reddish or bluish. The White Balance may

not operate correctly if there is a multiple number of light sources. In that case, set the

[White Balance] to settings other than [AWB] to adjust the coloring.

: [AWB] operational range

10000K

9000K

8000K

7000K

6000K

5000K

4000K

3000K

2000K

Cloudy sky (rain)

Shade

Incandescent lighting

Sunset/sunrise

Candlelight

Sunlight

White fluorescent lighting

Blue sky

K=Kelvin Color Temperature

Setting the White Balance manually

Take a picture of a white object under the target light source to adjust colors.

1Press [ ] button ( )

2Rotate the side dial to select [ ], [ ], [ ], or [ ], and press

3Point the camera at a white object such as a piece of paper, ensuring that it is

inside the frame at the center of the screen, and press the shutter button

• This will set the White Balance and return you to the recording screen.

• The same operation can be performed by pressing [MENU/SET].

●It may not be possible to set the correct White Balance if subjects are too bright or too dark. In this

case, adjust the brightness and try to set the White Balance again.

120 SQW0419

Picture Quality and coloring Settings

Adjusting the White Balance

Setting the White Balance using color temperature

You can set the White Balance using color temperature. Color temperature is a numeric

value that expresses the color of light (unit: K*). A picture becomes bluish when the color

temperature value is higher, and reddish when the temperature value is lower.

* Kelvin

1Press [ ] button ( )

2Rotate the side dial to select [ ] and press

3Use to select the color temperature value and

press [MENU/SET]

• You can set the color temperature from [2500K] to [10000K].

Performing White Balance fine adjustments

White Balance settings can be individually fine-tuned if colors still do not appear as

anticipated.

1Select the White Balance and press

2Use to perform White Balance fine

adjustments

: A (amber: orangish colors) : B (blue: bluish colors)

: G (green: greenish colors) : M (magenta: reddish colors)

• You can also make fine adjustments by touching the White

Balance graph.

• Pressing [DISP.] button resets the position back to the center.

3Press [MENU/SET]

●When you perform fine adjustments of the White Balance toward the A (amber) or B (blue) side,

the color of the White Balance icon displayed on the screen will change to the fine-tuned color.

●When you perform fine adjustments of the White Balance toward the G (green) or M (magenta)

side, [+] (green) or [-] (magenta) will be displayed in the White Balance icon on the screen.

●Settings remain applied when using flash.

●When you set a new White Balance value by selecting [ ], [ ], [ ] or [ ], or change the

color temperature by selecting [ ], the White Balance fine adjustment level will be returned to

the standard setting (center point).

121 SQW0419

Picture Quality and coloring Settings

Adjusting the White Balance

Bracket recording using White Balance

Bracket settings are performed based on the fine adjustment values for White Balance,

and three pictures with different coloring are automatically recorded when the shutter

button is pressed once.

1Perform fine adjustments of the White Balance in

step 2 of “Performing White Balance fine adjustments”

and rotate the rear dial to perform the Bracket setting

Rotating the rear dial to the right: Vertical ([G] to [M])

Rotating the rear dial to the left: Horizontal ([A] to [B])

• You can also set the bracket by touching [ ]/[ ]. BKTBKT

2Press [MENU/SET]

●When the White Balance Bracket is set, [BKT] appears on the White Balance icon.

●When the camera is turned off (Including [Sleep Mode]), the White Balance Bracket setting is

canceled.

●This function is not available in the following cases:

• Panorama Shot Mode

• [Glistening Water], [Glittering Illuminations], [Handheld Night Shot], [Soft Image of a Flower]

(Scene Guide Mode)

• When taking still pictures while a motion picture is being recorded

• When [Quality] is set to [ ], [ ] or [ ]

• When [HDR] is set to [ON]

• When [Multi Exp.] is set

• When using [Time Lapse Shot]

122 SQW0419

Picture Quality and coloring Settings

Setting the picture quality and size

Changing the aspect ratio of the still pictures

Recording mode:

This allows you to select the aspect ratio of the pictures to suit printing or the playback

method.

→ [Rec] → [Aspect Ratio]

[4:3] Aspect ratio of a 4:3 TV

[3:2] Aspect ratio of standard film cameras

[16:9] Aspect ratio of high-definition TV, etc.

[1:1] Aspect ratio of a square image

●If you use the HDMI output during recording, the setting is fixed to [16:9]. (→198)

Setting the picture size

Recording mode:

The higher the numbers of pixels, the finer the detail of the pictures will appear even

when they are printed onto large sheets.

→ [Rec] → [Picture Size]

[Aspect Ratio] 4:3 3:2 16:9 1:1

[Picture Size]

[L] 12M

4000×3000

[L] 10.5M

4000×2672

[L] 9M

4000×2248

[L] 9M

2992×2992

[ M] 8M

3264×2448

[ M] 7M

3264×2176

[ M] 8M

3840×2160

[ M] 6M

2448×2448

[ S] 3M

2048×1536

[ S] 2.5M

2048×1360

[ S] 2M

1920×1080

[ S] 3.5M

1920×1920

●When [Burst Rate] is set to [SH], [Picture Size] is fixed to [S].

●The picture size will be fixed to [4K] ([4:3]: 3328×2496; [3:2]: 3504×2336; [16:9]: 3840×2160; [1:1]:

2880×2880) when recording 4K photos.

123 SQW0419

Picture Quality and coloring Settings

Setting the picture quality and size

Setting the compression rate of pictures ([Quality])

Recording mode:

Set the compression rate used for storing pictures.

→ [Rec] → [Quality]

Settings File format Description

[ ]

JPEG

Gives priority to picture quality and saves pictures in JPEG file

format.

[ ]

Saves pictures in JPEG file format using standard picture quality.

This setting is useful when you want to increase the number of

recordable pictures without changing the number of pixels.

[ ] RAW + JPEG Saves pictures in JPEG file format ([ ] or [ ]) in addition to the

RAW file format.*1

[ ]

[ ] RAW

Saves pictures in the RAW file format.*2

[ ] images are recorded with a smaller data volume than [ ] or

[ ].

*1 If you delete a RAW file from the camera, the corresponding JPEG file is also deleted.

*2 Regardless of the aspect ratio of the picture during recording, a RAW image is always recorded with

the aspect ratio of the picture set to [4:3] (4000×3000).

About RAW file

In RAW file format the data is saved without any picture processing by the camera. To

play back and edit RAW file pictures, you must use this unit or dedicated software.

You can perform advanced editing of RAW file pictures, such as correcting the White

Balance of pictures recorded previously, and save the pictures in file formats that can be

displayed on a PC. This format delivers a higher picture quality than the JPEG format, but

the amount of data is greater.

• You can develop the RAW file pictures using [RAW Processing] in the [Playback] menu.

(→241)

• To develop and edit RAW file pictures on a PC, use the supplied DVD software

(Ichikawa Soft Laboratory’s “SILKYPIX Developer Studio”).

●When you play back a picture recorded with [ ], the gray area is displayed according to the

aspect ratio of the picture during recording.

●The setting is fixed to [ ] when recording 4K photos.

124 SQW0419

Picture Quality and coloring Settings

Setting the picture quality and size

●The following effects cannot be used on RAW file pictures.

• Intelligent Auto Plus Mode

• Creative Control Mode

• White Balance

• [Photo Style]*1, [Aspect Ratio], [Highlight Shadow]*1, [i.Dynamic]*1, [Red-Eye Removal]*2,

[i.Resolution]*1, [Diffraction Compensation]*2, [Color Space]*1 ([Rec] menu)

●You cannot set to [ ], [ ] or [ ] in the following cases:

• Panorama Shot Mode

• [Handheld Night Shot] (Scene Guide Mode)

*1 When you use [RAW Processing] in the [Playback] menu, adjustments are made from the settings

at the time of recording. Therefore, you can output a JPEG format picture with the settings at the

time of recording.

*2 If corrections are made at the time of recording, the corrected JPEG format picture is output when

[RAW Processing] in the [Playback] menu is used.

125 SQW0419

Picture Quality and coloring Settings

Using the picture correction functions effectively

Compensation effect may not be achieved depending on the conditions.

Correcting contrast and exposure ([i.Dynamic])

Recording mode:

Automatically adjusts contrast and exposure to give more lifelike colors when there is

significant contrast between background and subject.

→ [Rec] → [i.Dynamic]

Settings: [AUTO] / [HIGH] / [STANDARD] / [LOW] / [OFF]

●This function is not available in the following case:

• When [HDR] is set to [ON]

Enhancing the impression of high-resolution ([i.Resolution])

Recording mode:

You can use the camera’s Intelligent Resolution technology to record still pictures with

sharper outlines and clearer resolution.

→ [Rec] → [i.Resolution]

Settings: [HIGH] / [STANDARD] / [LOW] / [EXTENDED] / [OFF]

●When [EXTENDED] is set, you can take more natural pictures with the impression of high-

resolution.

●The [EXTENDED] setting will automatically change to the [LOW] setting while recording motion

pictures or 4K photos.

126 SQW0419

Picture Quality and coloring Settings

Using the picture correction functions effectively

Combining still pictures with different exposures ([HDR])

Recording mode:

The camera can combine 3 still pictures taken at different exposures into a single

properly exposed picture with rich gradation. The individual pictures used to create the

HDR picture are not saved. You can minimize the loss of gradations in bright areas and

dark areas when, for example, the contrast between the background and the subject is

large.

A combined HDR picture is saved in JPEG format.

→ [Rec] → [HDR]

[ON] Creates a combined HDR picture.

[OFF] Does not create a combined HDR picture.

[SET]

[Dynamic

Range]

[AUTO]: Takes pictures after automatically setting the adjustment range

of the exposure based on the contrast of a subject.

[±1EV] / [±2EV] / [±3EV]: Takes pictures using the adjustment range of

the exposure being set.

[Auto Align]

[ON]: Automatically adjusts the displacement of pictures caused by

jitter, etc. We recommend using this setting to take pictures with a

handheld camera.

[OFF]: Does not adjust the displacement of pictures. We recommend

using this setting when you use a tripod.

●After the shutter button has been pressed, do not move the camera during the burst operation.

●Since a burst of still pictures are combined after they have been recorded, it will be a few

moments before you will be able to record another picture.

●A subject that was in motion when it was recorded may be recorded as an afterimage.

●When [Auto Align] is set to [ON], the angle of view narrows slightly.

●When you take pictures using a flash, the flash mode is fixed to [ ] (Forced Flash Off).

●This function will not work for still pictures while motion pictures are being recorded.

●This function is not available in the following cases:

• When [Quality] is set to [ ], [ ] or [ ]

• When using [Time Lapse Shot]

• When [Auto Shooting] of [Stop Motion Animation] is set to [ON]

127 SQW0419

Picture Quality and coloring Settings

Using the picture correction functions effectively

Raising the resolution when the aperture is closed

([Diffraction Compensation])

Recording mode:

The camera raises the resolution by correcting the blurriness caused by diffraction when

the aperture is closed.

→ [Rec] → [Diffraction Compensation]

Settings: [AUTO] / [OFF]

●Noise in the periphery of the picture may stand out with higher ISO sensitivity.

Setting the color space

Recording mode:

You can set the method for reproducing the colors to correctly display the recorded

pictures on the screens of a PC or printer, etc.

→ [Rec] → [Color Space]

[sRGB] Sets the sRGB color space. This setting is widely used for devices such as PCs.

[AdobeRGB]

Sets the AdobeRGB color space.

AdobeRGB color space has a wider color reproduction range than sRGB color

space. Therefore, AdobeRGB color space is mainly used for business applications

such as commercial printing.

●Select [sRGB] if you do not have expert knowledge about AdobeRGB color space.

●During motion picture recording and 4K photo recording, the setting is fixed to [sRGB].

128 SQW0419

Adjusting the focus and brightness (exposure)

Taking pictures with Auto Focus

By setting the optimum Focus Mode or Auto Focus Mode for the subject or recording

condition, you can let the camera automatically adjust focus in various scenes.

1Set the focus mode lever to [AFS/AFF] or

[AFC]

• The Focus Mode will be set. (→129)

2Press [ ] button ( )

3Press to select Auto Focus mode and

press [MENU/SET] (→130)

4Press the shutter button halfway

• Two “beep” sounds are heard and Auto Focus is

activated.

Four “beep” sounds when focus is not aligned.

• When you take a picture in a dark location, [ ] is

displayed for the focus display and it may take longer

to adjust focus than usual.

• If the camera detects stars in the night sky after

displaying [ ], Starlight AF will be activated. When

focus is achieved, the focus indication [ ] and AF

areas in focus are displayed.

(Detection with Starlight AF works only for

approximately 1/3 of the center area of the screen.)

Focus display

( When focus is aligned:

illuminated

When focus is not aligned:

flashing)

AF area

( When focus is aligned:

green)

●When the Focus Mode is set to [AFF] or [AFC].

• A beep will be emitted when focus is first achieved during the pressing halfway.

• If AF Mode is set to [Custom Multi], such as [ ] or [ ], the AF area is displayed for a moment

only when focus is achieved for the first time by pressing the shutter button halfway.

129 SQW0419

Adjusting the focus and brightness (exposure)

Taking pictures with Auto Focus

●Subjects/environments which may make focusing difficult:

• Fast-moving or extremely bright objects, or objects with no color contrast.

• Taking pictures through glass or near objects emitting light.

• In the dark, or with significant jitter.

• When too close to object or when taking pictures of both distant and close

objects together in the same picture.

Select the focus mode (AFS, AFF, AFC)

Recording mode:

Set the focusing operation to be performed when the shutter button is pressed halfway.

1Set the focus mode lever to [AFS/AFF] or [AFC]

Settings

The movement of the

subject and the scene

(recommended)

Description

[AFS/AFF]

Subject is still

(Scenery, anniversary

photograph, etc.)

“AFS” is an abbreviation of “Auto Focus Single”. Focus

is set automatically when the shutter button is pressed

halfway.

Focus will be fixed while it is pressed halfway.

Movement cannot be

predicted (Children,

pets, etc.)

“AFF” is an abbreviation of “Auto Focus Flexible”. In this

mode, focusing is performed automatically when the shutter

button is pressed halfway.

If the subject moves while the shutter button is pressed

halfway, the focus is corrected to match the movement

automatically.

[AFC] Subject is moving

(Sport, trains, etc.)

“AFC” is an abbreviation of “Auto Focus Continuous”. In

this mode, while the shutter button is pressed halfway,

focusing is constantly performed to match the movement

of the subject. When the subject is moving, the focusing is

performed by predicting the subject position at the time of

recording. (Movement prediction)

[MF] — Focusing is performed manually. (→147)

■About [AFS/AFF] of the focus mode lever

In [AFS/AFF] in the [Rec] menu or the [Motion Picture] menu, you can assign [AFS] or

[AFF] to [AFS/AFF] of the focus mode lever.

130 SQW0419

Adjusting the focus and brightness (exposure)

Taking pictures with Auto Focus

When recording using [AFF], [AFC]

●Focusing may take time if the zoom is suddenly changed from max. Wide to max. Tele,

or if you suddenly move closer to a subject from a greater distance.

●Press the shutter button halfway again when it is difficult to focus on the subject.

●While the shutter button pressed halfway, shake may be seen on the screen.

●If the light on a subject is insufficient when using [AFF] or [AFC], the camera performs the same

focusing operation as [AFS]. In this case, the indication on the screen will change to yellow [AFS].

●The focus mode [AFF] or [AFC] operates as [AFS] in the following cases:

• Creative Video Mode

• Panorama Shot Mode

• When recording with [ ] ([4K Burst(S/S)]) of the 4K Photo function.

●[AFF] is not available when recording 4K photos. Continuous AF works during recording.

Switching [AF Mode]

Recording mode:

This allows the focusing method that suits the positions and number of the subjects to be

selected.

1Press [ ] button ( )

2Press to select Auto Focus mode and press

[MENU/SET]

• If you press when [ ], [ ], [ ], or [ ] is selected, or

touch the screen, the AF area setting screen appears.

(→138, 139)

●Auto Focus is fixed to [ ] (1-area-focusing) in the following cases:

• When using the Digital Zoom

• [Miniature Effect] (Creative Control Mode)

131 SQW0419

Adjusting the focus and brightness (exposure)

Taking pictures with Auto Focus

Taking front-on pictures of people (Face/Eye Detection)

The camera automatically detects the faces and eyes of subjects. The camera adjusts

the focus on the eye that is closer to the camera and the exposure using the face (when

[Metering Mode] is set to [ ] (Multi Metering)).

• The camera can detect up to 15 faces. The camera can detect only the eyes of faces to

be focused on.

When the camera recognized a face, the AF area and eye

used for focusing are displayed.

Yellow: When the shutter button is pressed halfway and the

subject is focused, the frame turns green.

White: Displayed when more than one face is detected.

Other faces that are the same distance away as faces

within the yellow AF area are also focused.

Eye used for focusing

■Changing the eye to be in focus

Touch the eye to be used for focusing

If you touch a location outside the yellow frame, the AF area setting

screen will be displayed. (→138)

• If you touch [ ] or press [MENU/SET], the eye focus setting will

be canceled.

• If the yellow frame moves to another face or the frame disappears

after you change the composition or do something similar, the eye

focus setting will be canceled.

●This function is not available in the following cases:

• [Clear Nightscape], [Cool Night Sky], [Warm Glowing Nightscape], [Artistic Nightscape],

[Glittering Illuminations], [Handheld Night Shot], [Appetizing Food], [Cute Dessert] (Scene Guide

Mode)

●If conditions prevent the face from being recognized, such as when the movement of the subject is

too rapid, the AF Mode setting switches to [ ] (49-area-focusing).

132 SQW0419

Adjusting the focus and brightness (exposure)

Taking pictures with Auto Focus

Automatically locking the focus on a moving subject (Tracking)

With cursor button operations

Align the AF Tracking frame with the subject and press

the shutter button halfway

When the subject is recognized, the AF Tracking frame changes from

white to yellow, and the subject is automatically kept in focus.

• To release AF Tracking → Press [MENU/SET].

• In the Intelligent Auto Plus Mode or the Intelligent Auto Mode,

every time you press or the side button*, AF Tracking and Face

Detection are switched.

* When the [Side Button Setting] in the [Custom] menu is set to

[AF /FOCUS].

AF Tracking frame

With touch screen operations

Touch the subject

Perform these operations with the touch shutter function released.

The AF area turns yellow while the subject is locked.

• To release AF Tracking → Touch [ ]

●If AF Lock fails, a red frame flashes for a while and then turns off. Retry the locking operation.

●When you set [Metering Mode] to [ ] (Multi Metering), the camera adjusts the exposure using a

locked subject. (→158)

●Under certain recording conditions, such as when the subject is small or dark, [ ] may not

operate correctly. When [ ] does not work, focus will be on [ ] (1-area-focusing).

●This function is not available in the following case:

• When using [Time Lapse Shot]

●In the following cases, [ ] performs the operation of [ ] (1-area-focusing).

• [Glistening Water], [Glittering Illuminations], [Soft Image of a Flower], [Monochrome]

(Scene Guide Mode)

• [Sepia], [Monochrome], [Dynamic Monochrome], [Rough Monochrome], [Silky Monochrome],

[Soft Focus], [Star Filter], [Sunshine] (Creative Control Mode)

• [Monochrome] ([Photo Style])

133 SQW0419

Adjusting the focus and brightness (exposure)

Taking pictures with Auto Focus

Subject not centered in picture (49-area-focusing)

Focuses on the subject in the wide range area (up to 49-area-

focusing) on the recording screen.

●You can select the focusing area. (→138)

134 SQW0419

Adjusting the focus and brightness (exposure)

Taking pictures with Auto Focus

Setting the shape of an AF area , etc. (Custom Multi)

You can set the preferred shape of an AF area by selecting 49 points in the AF area,

based on the subject.

1Press [ ] button ( )

2Select a Custom Multi icon ([ ], etc.), and press

• When you press , the AF area setting screen appears.

3Use to select the setting item

([Horizontal

Pattern])

Horizontal line shape

Ideal shape for panning,

etc.

([Vertical

Pattern])

Vertical line shape

Ideal shape for recording

structures, etc.

([Central

Pattern])

Shape distributed over

the center

Ideal shape for focusing

around the center.

([User

Defined])

Custom shape

(Custom) You can set a custom registration shape.

Current AF area shape

135 SQW0419

Adjusting the focus and brightness (exposure)

Taking pictures with Auto Focus

4Press

• The AF area setting screen appears.

5Select the AF area

When selecting [ ] / [ ] / [ ]

You can set the size and position of the area in the vertical direction

when [ ] is selected, in the horizontal direction when [ ] is

selected, and in all directions when [ ] is selected.

Button

operation

Touch

operation Description

Touch Moves position

Pinch in /

Pinch out Changes the size (3 stages)

[DISP.] [Reset] Restores to the initial

settings

Selected AF area

When selecting [ ] / [ ] / [ ]

With cursor button operations

Use to select AF area and press [MENU/SET] to set

(repeat)

• If you press [MENU/SET] again, the setting will be canceled.

• To cancel all the settings, press the [DISP.] button.

With touch screen operations

Drag your finger over the parts you want to set as AF areas

• If you touch one of the selected AF areas, the selection of the

area will be canceled.

6Press [Fn2] button

■Registering the set AF area in [ ] and [ ] (Custom)

Press on the screen of step 3 on (→134)

Use to select the registration target icon and press [MENU/SET]

●The settings registered in [ ] and [ ] will be retained even if the camera is turned off.

●The settings adjusted in [ ], [ ], [ ] or [ ] will be restored to the default settings when

the camera is turned off.

●If you press the cursor button when [Direct Focus Area] in the [Custom] menu is set to [ON], the

AF area setting screen will appear.

136 SQW0419

Adjusting the focus and brightness (exposure)

Taking pictures with Auto Focus

Determined position for focus (1-area-focusing) / (Pinpoint-focusing)

(1-area-focusing)

Focuses on AF area in center of picture. (Recommended when focus is difficult to align)

• You can change the position and size of the AF area. (→138)

Locking the focus

If a subject you want to record is not in the center,

follow the steps below. (Only when the focus mode

is set to [AFS].)

Focus display

( When focus is aligned: illuminated

When focus is not aligned: flashing)

AF area

(When focus is aligned: green)

1Adjust focus according to

subject

Align the AF

area with the

subject

Hold down

halfway

2Return to desired composition

Press fully

(Pinpoint-focusing)

Enables more precise focusing on a smaller point than [ ] (1-area-focusing).

●You can set the focus position using the enlarged screen. (→139)

●When you press the shutter button halfway, an enlarged display of the focus position appears.

●You can set the timeout for the enlarged display using [Pinpoint AF Time] in the [Custom] menu.

(→140)

●If [ ] (Pinpoint-focusing) is selected while recording motion pictures or 4K photos, the setting is

changed to [ ] (1-area-focusing).

●Cannot set to [ ] (Pinpoint-focusing) in the following case:

• When the focus mode is set to [AFF] or [AFC]

137 SQW0419

Adjusting the focus and brightness (exposure)

Taking pictures with Auto Focus

Changing the position and size of the AF area

Recording mode:

When [ ], [ ], [ ], or [ ] in Auto Focus Mode is selected, you can change the position

and size of the AF area.

●Perform these operations with the touch shutter function released.

●When setting with touch operation, set [Touch AF] in [Touch Settings] of the [Custom]

menu to [AF]. (→52)

Enabling/disabling use of cursor button to move the AF area

→ [Custom] → [Direct Focus Area] → [ON] / [OFF]

When [ ], [ ], or [ ] is selected, you can move the AF area and when [ ] is

selected, you can move the enlarged position.

• Use the Quick menu (→59) to set functions to be assigned to the cursor button, such as

Drive mode, [White Balance] and [Sensitivity].

●When you set [Metering Mode] (→158) to [ ] (spot-focusing), the metering target will move

along with the AF area. When the AF area is moved to the edges of the screen, the metering

operation may be affected by the surrounding brightness.

●[Direct Focus Area] is fixed to [OFF] in the following cases:

• [Glistening Water] (Scene Guide Mode)

• Creative Control Mode

●The position and size of the AF area cannot be changed in the Digital Zoom range.

138 SQW0419

Adjusting the focus and brightness (exposure)

Taking pictures with Auto Focus

■When selecting [ ] / [ ]

You can change the position and size of the AF area.

Press [ ] button ( )

Select [ ] or [ ] and press

• The AF area setting screen appears.

• You can also display the AF area setting screen by touching

the screen.

To change the AF area

Button operation Touch operation Description

Touch To move the position of the AF area.

Pinch in / Pinch out Enlarges/reduces the AF area in small steps.

—Enlarges/reduces the AF area in large steps.

[DISP.] [Reset]

Resets the AF area back to the center.

• If you press the button again, the frame size will

be reset to the initial setting.

• If you set the AF area to an eye in the yellow frame when [ ] is selected, the eye to be used

for focusing will be changed.

Press [MENU/SET]

• AF area with the same function as [ ] is displayed in the touched position, when the [ ] is

selected. Setting of the AF area is cleared when [MENU/SET] is pressed or [ ] is touched.

■When selecting [ ]

You can set the focus position by selecting an AF area group. The

AF area, which is configured with 49 points, is divided into groups

consisting of 9 points each (6 points or 4 points for the groups

located at the edges of the screen).

Examples of group

Press [ ] button ( )

Select [ ] and press

• The AF area setting screen appears.

Press to select an AF area group

• You can also select a group by touching the screen.

Press [MENU/SET]

• Only the [+] indications (center points of the selected group) remain on

the screen.

• Setting of the AF area is cleared when [MENU/SET] is pressed or [ ]

is touched.

139 SQW0419

Adjusting the focus and brightness (exposure)

Taking pictures with Auto Focus

■When selecting [ ]

You can enlarge the screen to perform more precise settings of the focus position.

• You cannot set the focus position at the edges of the screen.

Press [ ] button ( )

Select [ ] and press

Use to set the focus position and press

[MENU/SET]

• The enlarged assist screen will appear for setting the focus

position.

• The assist screen can also be displayed by touching the

subject.

Move [+] to the focus position with

Button

operation Touch operation Description

Touch Moves [+].

— Pinch in / Pinch out Enlarges/reduces the AF area in small steps.

—Enlarges/reduces the AF area in large steps.

—

Switches the enlarged display. (windowed/full

screen)

[DISP.] [Reset] Resets [+] back to the center.

• The image of a part of the screen can be enlarged or reduced approximately 3 to 6 times. The

image of the entire screen can be enlarged or reduced approximately 3 to 10 times.

• If you use the HDMI output during recording, the screen cannot be enlarged in windowed

mode.

• On the assist screen, it is also possible to record a picture by touching [ ].

140 SQW0419

Adjusting the focus and brightness (exposure)

Taking pictures with Auto Focus

Changing the display of the assist screen

→ [Custom] → [Pinpoint AF Display]

[FULL]: Enlarges the assist screen using the entire screen.

[PIP]: Enlarges the assist screen on part of the screen.

• The display of the assist screen can also be switched by touching [ ].

Setting the timeout for the enlarged display

→ [Custom] → [Pinpoint AF Time] →

[LONG] (approx. 1.5 seconds) / [MID] (approx. 1.0 second) /

[SHORT] (approx. 0.5 seconds)

141 SQW0419

Adjusting the focus and brightness (exposure)

Taking pictures with Auto Focus

Setting the AF area position with the touch pad

Recording mode:

You can move the AF area displayed on the viewfinder by

touching the monitor.

• If you touch the monitor when the Auto Focus Mode is set to

[Custom Multi] such as [ ], the AF area setting screen will

be displayed. (→134)

→ [Custom] → [Touch Settings] → [Touch Pad AF]

[EXACT] Moves the AF area of the viewfinder by

touching a desired position on the touch

pad.

[OFFSET] Moves the AF area of the viewfinder

according to the distance you drag the

touch pad (→52).

[OFF] —

• Press the shutter button halfway to determine the focus position. If you press the

[DISP.] button before determining the focus position, the focus position returns to the

center.

• To cancel the settings for the AF area when the Auto Focus Mode (→130) is set to [ ]

(Face/Eye Detection), [ ] (AF Tracking), or [ ] (49-area-focusing), press [MENU/

SET].

●The Touch Shutter function (→54) is disabled when using [Touch Pad AF].

●[Touch Pad AF] is not available when [Pull Focus] in [Snap Movie] is set to [ON].

142 SQW0419

Adjusting the focus and brightness (exposure)

Taking pictures with Auto Focus

Optimizing the focus and brightness for a touched position

Recording mode:

You can optimize the focus and brightness for the position you have touched.

1Set the menu

→ [Custom] → [Touch Settings] → [Touch AF] → [AF+AE]

2Touch the subject you want to optimize the brightness

for

• The AF area setting screen appears. (→138)

• The brightness optimization position is displayed on the center of

the AF area. The position follows the movement of the AF area.

• [Metering Mode] is set to [ ], which is used exclusively for the

[Touch AE].

• Touching [Reset] returns the brightness optimization position and

the AF area to the center.

SetSet

Reset

3Touch [Set]

• The AF area with the same function as [ ] is displayed on the touched position.

• If you touch [ ], the Metering Mode returns to the original setting, and the brightness

optimization position is canceled. The AF area setting is also canceled.

• If you touch [ ], the Metering Mode returns to the original setting, and the brightness

optimization position is canceled.

When the background has become too bright, etc.,

the brightness contrast with the background can be

adjusted by compensating the exposure.

●When recording with the Touch Shutter, the focus and brightness are optimized for the touched

position before recording takes place.

●At the edge of the screen, the metering may be affected by the brightness around the touched

location.

●The [AF+AE] does not function in the following cases:

• When using the Digital Zoom

• When the AF area has been set by using the cursor button

143 SQW0419

Adjusting the focus and brightness (exposure)

Taking pictures with Auto Focus

Setting your preferred focusing method

You can use the [Custom] menu to set the focusing method in detail.

Enabling/disabling focus adjustment when the shutter button is

pressed halfway

→ [Custom] → [Shutter AF] → [ON] / [OFF]

Enabling/disabling shutter release when the shutter button is

pressed halfway

→ [Custom] → [Half Press Release] → [ON] / [OFF]

Focusing using the [AF/AE LOCK] button

You can use the [AF/AE LOCK] button instead of the shutter button to focus on a subject.

1Set the menu

→ [Custom] → [Shutter AF] → [OFF]

→ [Custom] → [AF/AE Lock] → [AF-ON]

2Press the [AF/AE LOCK] button

• The camera focuses on a subject. 3

3Press the shutter button to take a picture

• The camera takes a picture by adjusting the exposure.

Enabling/disabling pre-adjustment of focus

→ [Custom] → [Quick AF] → [ON] / [OFF]

The focus is automatically adjusted when camera blurring is small even when the shutter

button is not pressed. (Increases battery consumption)

●Press shutter button halfway if focus is difficult to align.

●This function is not available in the following cases:

• Preview Mode

• When the lighting is low

144 SQW0419

Adjusting the focus and brightness (exposure)

Taking pictures with Auto Focus

Turning on/off the AF Assist Lamp

→ [Custom] → [AF Assist Lamp] → [ON] / [OFF]

Illuminates the AF Assist Lamp when the shutter button is pressed halfway when it is too

dark to facilitate focusing. (A large AF area is displayed based on recording conditions.)

●The AF Assist Lamp has an effective distance of 1.5 m (4.9 feet).

●AF Assist Lamp is effective for a subject at the center of the screen.

●Remove the lens hood.

●If you do not want to illuminate the AF Assist Lamp when you take a picture in a dark

location (e.g. taking a picture of an animal in the dark), set this function to [OFF]. When

the AF Assist Lamp is set to [OFF], sharper focusing will become difficult.

●The setting is fixed to [OFF] in the following cases:

• [Distinct Scenery], [Bright Blue Sky], [Romantic Sunset Glow], [Vivid Sunset Glow],

[Glistening Water], [Clear Nightscape], [Cool Night Sky], [Warm Glowing Nightscape],

[Artistic Nightscape], [Handheld Night Shot] (Scene Guide Mode)

• When [Silent Mode] is set to [ON]

• When [Conversion] is set to [ ] or [ ]

Enabling/disabling recording when a subject is out of focus

→ [Custom] → [Focus/Release Priority]

[FOCUS]: Recording is disabled unless the focusing is performed properly.

[RELEASE]: Recording is performed when you fully press the shutter button to

place priority on the shutter release timing that helps to avoid missed

opportunities.

Enabling/disabling manual focus adjustment after AF

→ [Custom] → [AF+MF] → [ON] / [OFF]

You can manually perform fine focusing by rotating the side dial during AF Lock (pressing

the shutter button halfway when the focus mode is set to [AFS] or setting AF Lock using

the [AF/AE LOCK] button).

145 SQW0419

Adjusting the focus and brightness (exposure)

Taking close-up pictures (Macro recording)

Recording mode:

This mode allows you to take close-up pictures of a subject, e.g. when taking pictures of

flowers.

1Set the focus mode lever to [AFS/AFF] or

[AFC]

2Press the side button

• If you cannot select the macro recording mode, set the

[Side Button Setting] under the [Custom] menu to

[AF /FOCUS], and then press the side button.

3Press to select the item and press [MENU/SET]

[ ]

([AF Macro])

You can take pictures of a subject as close as 1 cm (0.033 feet) from

the lens by rotating the zoom lever upmost to Wide (1x).

[ ]

([Macro Zoom])

Use this setting to get close to the subject and then further enlarge

when taking the picture. You can take a picture with the Digital Zoom

up to 3x while maintaining the distance to the subject for the extreme

Wide position (1 cm (0.033 feet)).

• Note that enlarging will decrease picture quality.

• Zoom range will be displayed in blue. (digital zoom range)

[ ]

([Off]) —

146 SQW0419

Adjusting the focus and brightness (exposure)

Taking close-up pictures (Macro recording)

●When recording a subject close to the camera, we recommend taking a picture without using the

flash.

●A picture may be out of focus when the subject is out of focus range, even if the focus display is lit.

●When a nearby subject is to be recorded

• Using a tripod and [Self Timer] (→180) is recommended.

• The effective focus range (depth of field) is significantly narrowed. Therefore, if the distance

between the camera and the subject is changed after focusing on the subject, it may become

difficult to focus on it again.

• Resolution may be slightly reduced around the edges of the picture. This is not a malfunction.

●Cannot set to [Macro Zoom] in the following cases:

• [Handheld Night Shot] (Scene Guide Mode)

• Panorama Shot Mode

• During [High Speed Video] recording

• [Impressive Art], [Toy Effect], [Toy Pop], [Miniature Effect] (Creative Control Mode)

• When [Burst Rate] is set to [SH]

• When [HDR] is set to [ON]

• When [Multi Exp.] is set

• When [Quality] is set to [ ], [ ] or [ ]

• When [Conversion] is set to [ ] or [ ]

147 SQW0419

Adjusting the focus and brightness (exposure)

Taking pictures with Manual Focus

Recording mode:

Manual Focus is convenient when you want to lock the focus to take pictures or when it is

difficult to adjust focus using Auto Focus.

1Set the focus mode lever to [MF]

2Press [ ] button ( )

3Set the focus position with , and

press [MENU/SET]

• The screen changes to the assist screen and an

enlarged display appears. (MF Assist)

• You can also enlarge the area by pinching out (→52)

the screen or touching the screen twice.

• You can also adjust the focus position by dragging

(→52) the screen.

• If you press [DISP.] button, the area to be enlarged will

be reset to the center.

4Rotate the side dial to adjust focus

Rotating the side dial to the side :

Focusing on a nearby subject

Rotating the side dial to the side :

Focusing on a distant subject

• Color is added to the portions of the image that are in

focus. (Peaking) (→151)

• About the MF Guide (→150)

MF Assist

(Enlarged screen)

Peaking

MF Guide

148 SQW0419

Adjusting the focus and brightness (exposure)

Taking pictures with Manual Focus

Button

operation

Touch

operation Description

Drag Moves the enlarged area.

—Pinch in /

Pinch out Enlarges/reduces the AF area in small steps.

—Enlarges/reduces the AF area in large steps.

—

Switches the enlarged display. (windowed/full screen)

[DISP.] [Reset] Resets the area to be enlarged back to the center.

• The image of a part of the screen can be enlarged or reduced approximately 3 to

6 times. The image of the entire screen can be enlarged or reduced approximately

3 to 10 times.

• If you use the HDMI output during recording, the screen cannot be enlarged in

windowed mode.

Changing the MF Assist display

→ [Custom] → [MF Assist Display]

[FULL]: Enlarges the assist screen using the entire screen.

[PIP]: Enlarges the assist screen on part of the screen.

• The display of the assist screen can also be switched by touching [ ].

5Press the shutter button halfway

• The assist screen will close. The recording screen will be displayed.

• You can also exit MF Assist by pressing [MENU/SET].

●If you press the cursor button when [Direct Focus Area] in the [Custom] menu is set to [ON], the

setting screen for the enlarged position appears.

●MF Assist is not displayed in the following cases:

• During motion picture recording

• When recording with [ ] ([4K Pre-Burst]) of the 4K Photo function

• When using the Digital Zoom

149 SQW0419

Adjusting the focus and brightness (exposure)

Taking pictures with Manual Focus

Quickly adjusting the focus using Auto Focus

In Manual Focus, the focus can be set on the subject through Auto Focus. (One shot AF)

1Press the side button

• If Auto Focus does not work, set the [Side Button Setting] under

the [Custom] menu to [AF /FOCUS], and then press the side

button.

●Auto Focus is activated at the center of the frame.

●When Auto Focus is activated on the MF Assist screen, the camera will adjust the focus at the

center of the MF Assist screen.

●Auto Focus also works with the following operations.

• Pressing the [AF/AE LOCK] button to which [AF-ON] is assigned (→152)

• Pressing the function button to which [AF-ON] is assigned

• Touch [ ]

• Dragging the monitor and releasing your finger at the position you want to focus on

150 SQW0419

Adjusting the focus and brightness (exposure)

Taking pictures with Manual Focus

Technique for Manual Focus

1Rotate the side dial to focus on the

subject 12

2Rotate it a little more

3Finely focus on the subject by rotating

the side dial slowly in reverse

●After canceling [Sleep Mode], be sure to readjust the focus.

●When a nearby subject is to be recorded (→146)

Setting the display method of MF Assist

→ [Custom] → [MF Assist]

[ ] Rotate the side dial or press the [ ] button ( ) to enlarge the image.

[ ] Rotate the side dial to enlarge the image.

[ ] Press the [ ] button ( ) to enlarge the position.

[OFF] The side dial or [ ] button ( ) cannot be used to enlarge the image.

Enabling/disabling MF Guide display

→ [Custom] → [MF Guide] → [ON] / [OFF]

When [MF Guide] on the [Custom] menu is set to [ON] and

you focus manually, the MF guide is displayed on the screen.

You can check whether the point of focus is to the near side

or the far side.

Indicator for (infinity)

151 SQW0419

Adjusting the focus and brightness (exposure)

Taking pictures with Manual Focus

Enabling/disabling [Peaking] to add color to the portions of the

image that are in focus

→ [Custom] → [Peaking]

●[Peaking] functions during Manual Focus or when you are adjusting focus manually

using [AF+MF].

[ON] Color is added to the portions of the image that are in focus.

[OFF] The portions of the image that are in focus are not displayed.

[SET]

[Detect

Level]

The detection level for in-focus portions is set.

Settings: [HIGH] / [LOW]

When [HIGH] is set, portions to be highlighted are reduced, allowing you to

achieve a more precise focus.

• The detection level setting does not affect the focus range.

[Display

Color]

Sets the highlighting color used for [Peaking].

Settings

Changing the [Detect Level] setting also changes the [Display Color]

setting as follows.

[Detect Level] [HIGH] [LOW]

[Display Color]

[ ] (Light blue) [ ] (Blue)

[ ] (Yellow) [ ] (Orange)

[ ] (Yellow Green) [ ] (Green)

[ ] (Pink) [ ] (Red)

[ ] (White) [ ] (Gray)

●When [Peaking] is set to [ON], [ ] ([Detect Level]: [HIGH]) or [ ] ([Detect Level]:

[LOW]) will be displayed.

●Each time [ ] in [ ] is touched, the setting is switched in order of [ON] ([Detect Level]: [LOW]) →

[ON] ([Detect Level]: [HIGH]) → [OFF].

●When [Fn Button Set] (→61) in the [Custom] menu is set to [Peaking], you can switch the setting

in the following order every time the assigned function button is pressed: [ON] ([Detect Level]:

[LOW]) → [ON] ([Detect Level]: [HIGH]) → [OFF].

●Since portions with clear outlines on the screen are highlighted as in-focus portions, portions to be

highlighted vary depending on the recording conditions.

●The color used for highlighting does not affect recorded pictures.

●This function is not available in the following case:

• [Rough Monochrome] (Creative Control Mode)

152 SQW0419

Adjusting the focus and brightness (exposure)

Taking pictures by locking the focus and/or exposure

[AF/AE Lock]

Recording mode:

The AF/AE Lock function is convenient, for example, when there is too much contrast with

the subject and you cannot get appropriate exposure (AE Lock) or when you want to take

a still picture composed with the subject outside the AF area (AF Lock).

1Point the camera at the subject

2Lock the focus and/or exposure while you

press and hold the [AF/AE LOCK] button

• When you release the [AF/AE LOCK] button, the focus

and/or exposure lock is canceled.

• Only the exposure is locked at the time of purchase.

3While you press and hold the

[AF/AE LOCK] button, move the camera to

compose the picture you want to take and

fully press the shutter button

• When [AE LOCK] is set, press the shutter button

halfway to focus, then press it fully.

Exposure is locked

(AE Lock)

60p

Setting the function of the [AF/AE LOCK] button

→ [Custom] → [AF/AE Lock]

[AE LOCK]

Locks exposure only.

• [AEL], aperture value, and shutter speed are displayed when the correct

exposure is achieved.

[AF LOCK]

Locks focus only.

• [AFL], focus, aperture value, and shutter speed are displayed when the subject

comes into focus.

[AF/AE LOCK]

Locks focus and exposure.

• [AFL], [AEL], focus, aperture value, and shutter speed are displayed when the

subject is in focus and the correct exposure is achieved.

[AF-ON] Auto Focus is activated.

Maintaining/not maintaining the lock when [AF/AE LOCK] button is

released

→ [Custom] → [AF/AE Lock Hold] → [ON] / [OFF]

153 SQW0419

Adjusting the focus and brightness (exposure)

Taking pictures by locking the focus and/or exposure [AF/AE Lock]

●AF Lock only is effective in the following case:

• Manual Exposure Mode

●During Manual Focus, only AE Lock can be used.

●The subject can be focused again by pressing the shutter button halfway, even when AE is locked.

●Program Shift can be set even when AE is locked.

154 SQW0419

Adjusting the focus and brightness (exposure)

Taking pictures with Exposure Compensation

Recording mode:

Corrects the exposure when there is a backlight or when the subject is too dark or too

bright.

You can operate the [ ] button/[Fn1] button in two ways, using it either as the [ ] (Exposure

Compensation) button or as a function button [Fn1]. It is set to [ ] at the time of purchase.

●For details on the function button, refer to (→61).

1Press [ ] button

2Rotate the rear dial to compensate the

exposure

Under-exposed Optimum

exposure Over-exposed

Adjust the exposure to the

[+] direction

Adjust the exposure to the

[-] direction

[Flash Adjust.]

Exposure Compensation

• You can switch the functions between the rear dial and the side dial by pressing

the [DISP.] button.

3Rotate the side dial to adjust the flash output

• This operation is possible only when [Firing Mode] (→208) in [Flash] is set to

[TTL].

• Flash output can also be adjusted using [Flash Adjust.] in [Flash] in the [Rec]

menu. (→212)

4Press [ ] button to set

• You can also press the shutter button halfway to set.

●Depending on the brightness, this may not be possible in some cases.

●When [Auto Exposure Comp.] of [Flash] in the [Rec] menu is set to [ON], the flash output is also

automatically adjusted based on the exposure compensation value. (→212)

●The set Exposure Compensation value is stored even if the camera is turned off. (When [Exposure

Comp. Reset] (→73) is set to [OFF])

155 SQW0419

Adjusting the focus and brightness (exposure)

Setting the ISO Sensitivity

Recording mode:

Set ISO sensitivity (sensitivity to lighting) manually.

We recommend higher settings to take clear pictures in darker locations.

1Press [ ] button ( )

2Select the ISO sensitivity by rotating the

rear dial

• You can switch the functions between the rear dial and

the side dial by pressing the [DISP.] button.

[ISO Limit Set]

OFF

ISO sensitivity

3Rotate the side dial to set the upper limit

of ISO sensitivity

• It will work when the ISO sensitivity is set to [AUTO]

or [ ].

4Press [MENU/SET].

• You can also press the shutter button halfway to set.

AUTO ISO sensitivity is automatically set in a range up to 3200 (with the flash on:

1600)* depending on the brightness of a subject.

(Intelligent ISO)

ISO sensitivity is automatically set in a range up to 3200 (with the flash on:

1600)* depending on the movement and brightness of a subject.

• The shutter speed is not fixed when the shutter button is pressed halfway.

It is continuously changing to match the movement of the subject until the

shutter button is pressed fully.

100/200/400/800/

1600/3200/6400

ISO sensitivity is xed at the selected setting.

• When [ISO Increments] is set to [1/3EV], more ISO sensitivity settings can

be selected. (→157)

* When [ISO Limit Set] (→157) in the [Rec] menu is set to other than [OFF], the ISO sensitivity is

automatically set in the range up to the [ISO Limit Set] setting value.

156 SQW0419

Adjusting the focus and brightness (exposure)

Setting the ISO Sensitivity

Setting guide

ISO sensitivity [100] [6400]

Location

(recommended)

Bright

(outdoors) Dark

Shutter speed Slow Fast

Interference Low High

Subject blur High Low

●For details on the available flash range used when the ISO sensitivity is set to [AUTO], refer to

(→207).

●Cannot select [ ] in the following cases:

• Shutter-Priority AE Mode

• Manual Exposure Mode

●[AUTO] and [ ] are not available when taking pictures with the shutter speed set to [B] (Bulb) in

Manual Exposure Mode.

●When [Multi Exp.] is set, the maximum setting is [3200].

●You can use the following settings in the Creative Video Mode or when recording 4K photos.

[AUTO], [100] - [6400]

●Depending on the setting of ISO sensitivity, the shutter speed is restricted as shown below.

ISO sensitivity

(When [ISO Increments] is set to [1/3EV]) (→157) Shutter speed (seconds)

AUTO / Automatically changes depending

on the ISO sensitivity setting.

100 / 125 / 160 / 200 / 250 / 320 / 400 / 500 / 640 / 800 /

1000 / 1250 / 1600

60-1/4000*1

1-1/16000*2

2000 / 2500 / 3200 15-1/4000*1

1-1/16000*2

4000 / 5000 / 6400 8-1/4000*1

1-1/16000*2

*1 When the mechanical shutter is used

*2 When the electronic shutter is used

157 SQW0419

Adjusting the focus and brightness (exposure)

Setting the ISO Sensitivity

Setting the upper limit of ISO Sensitivity

Recording mode:

You can set the upper limit of ISO sensitivity when ISO sensitivity is set to [AUTO] or

[ ].

→ [Rec] → [ISO Limit Set]

Settings: [200] / [400] / [800] / [1600] / [3200] / [6400] / [OFF]

●This function is not available in the following cases:

• [Clear Nightscape], [Cool Night Sky], [Warm Glowing Nightscape], [Handheld Night Shot]

(Scene Guide Mode)

• During motion picture recording

Setting the incremental value of ISO Sensitivity

Recording mode:

You can change the setting to increase ISO sensitivity by 1 EV or 1/3 EV.

→ [Rec] → [ISO Increments]

[1/3EV] [100] / [125] / [160] / [200] / [250] / [320] / [400] / [500] / [640] / [800] / [1000] / [1250] /

[1600] / [2000] / [2500] / [3200] / [4000] / [5000] / [6400]

[1 EV] [100] / [200] / [400] / [800] / [1600] / [3200] / [6400]

●When this setting is changed from [1/3EV] to [1 EV], the setting for ISO sensitivity may be

changed. (The closest ISO sensitivity that can be set for [1 EV] will be used.)

158 SQW0419

Adjusting the focus and brightness (exposure)

Setting the metering mode

Recording mode:

You can change the metering method used for measuring brightness.

→ [Rec] → [Metering Mode]

[Metering Mode] Brightness measurement position Conditions

(Multiple) Whole screen Normal usage

(produces balanced pictures)

(Center weighted) Center and surrounding area Subject in center

(Spot)

Center of [+] (spot metering target)

Great difference between

brightness of subject and

background

(e.g. person in spotlight on stage,

backlighting)

159 SQW0419

Shutter and Drive Settings

Setting the Shutter Type

Recording mode:

You can take pictures using two types of shutter modes: the mechanical shutter and

electronic shutter.

Mechanical shutter Electronic shutter

Description

Starts the exposure electronically

and ends the exposure using the

mechanical shutter.

Starts and ends the exposure

electronically.

Flash ○–

Shutter Speed

(seconds)

[B] (Bulb)*1,

60*2 - 1/4000*31 - 1/16000

Shutter sound

Mechanical shutter sound*4

Electronic shutter sound*5

*1 This setting is available only in Manual Exposure Mode. (→88)

*2 Varies depending on the setting of ISO sensitivity. (→155)

*3 You may not be able to select some value depending on the aperture value.

*4 You cannot turn off the mechanical shutter sound.

*5 You can use [Shutter Vol.] and [Shutter Tone] to adjust the volume of the electronic shutter sound.

(→66)

1Set the menu

→ [Rec] → [Shutter Type]

[AUTO]

The shutter mode automatically switches based on the recording conditions

and shutter speed.

• The mechanical shutter mode has higher priority over the electronic

shutter mode because the mechanical shutter has less function-related

restrictions when recording with a flash, etc.

[MSHTR] Uses only the mechanical shutter mode to take a picture.

[ESHTR] Uses only the electronic shutter mode to take a picture.

●In the following cases, recording is performed with an electronic shutter.

• [ ] is displayed on the screen

• [Burst Rate] is set to [SH]

• When recording 4K photos

• [Silent Mode] is set to [ON]

●If you take a picture of a moving subject using the electronic shutter, the subject in the

picture may be skewed in some cases.

●When you take a picture under a fluorescent or LED lighting fixture using the electronic

shutter, the recorded picture may have horizontal stripes. If you use a slower shutter

speed, the horizontal stripes may be reduced. (→87)

160 SQW0419

Shutter and Drive Settings

Selecting a Drive Mode

Recording mode:

You can switch the operation to be performed when you press the shutter button.

1Press [ ] button ( )

2Press to select the drive mode and

press [MENU/SET]

Drive Mode

[Single] When the shutter button is pressed, only one picture is recorded.

[Burst] (→161) The pictures are recorded in succession while the shutter button is

pressed.

[4K PHOTO]

(→164) When the shutter button is pressed, a 4K photo is recorded.

[Auto Bracket]*

(→178)

Each time the shutter button is pressed, the pictures are

recorded with different exposure settings based on the Exposure

Compensation range.

[Self Timer]

(→180)

When the shutter button is pressed, recording takes place after the

set time has elapsed.

* Cannot be set when using Intelligent Auto Mode.

• To cancel drive mode, select [ ] ([Single]) or [ ].

• When you press , you can change the settings of each drive mode. Note,

however, that you cannot change the settings of [Single].

161 SQW0419

Shutter and Drive Settings

Burst function

Recording mode:

The pictures are recorded in succession while the shutter button is pressed.

• Pictures that are taken while the burst speed is set to [SH] are recorded together as a

single burst group (→232).

1Press [ ] button ( )

2Press to select an item ([ ], etc.)

and press

3Press to select the burst speed and

press [MENU/SET]

[SH]

(Super high

speed)*1

[H]

(High speed)

[M]

(Middle

speed)

[L]

(Low speed)

Speed

(pictures/

sec.)

[AFS] 60 12 6 2

[AFF] / [AFC] ―662

Live View during burst

recording None None Available Available

Number of

recordable

pictures*2

With RAW files ―19*3

Without RAW

files 60 Depends on the capacity of the card*3

*1 The electronic shutter starts working, and the [Picture Size] is set to [S].

*2 The number of burst pictures is limited by the picture-taking conditions and the type and/or

status of the card used.

*3 Pictures can be taken until the card becomes full. However, the burst speed will become

slower halfway through the recording. The exact time when the slower burst speed will start

depends on the settings of the aspect ratio, picture size, and quality as well as the type of

card used.

• The burst speed may become slower depending on the following settings:

– [Picture Size] (→122), [Quality] (→123), ISO sensitivity (→155), Focus mode

(→129), [Focus/Release Priority] (→144)

• Burst speed can also be set with [Burst Rate] in the [Rec] menu.

• For information about RAW files, refer to (→123).

162 SQW0419

Shutter and Drive Settings

Burst function

4Focus on the subject and take a picture 60p

■To cancel burst

In step 2, select [ ] ([Single]) or [ ].

Focusing in burst mode

Focusing varies depending on the focus mode (→129) and the setting of [Focus/Release

Priority] (→144) in the [Custom] menu.

Focus mode [Focus/Release Priority] Focus

[AFS] [FOCUS] At the first picture

[RELEASE]

[AFF] / [AFC]*1[FOCUS] Normal focusing*2

[RELEASE] Predicted focusing*3

[MF] — Focus set with Manual Focus

*1 Focus is fixed in the first picture when dark subjects are recorded or the burst speed is set to [SH].

*2 Since the camera records a burst of pictures while it adjusts the focus, the burst speed may be

slower.

*3 The camera predicts the focus within a possible range by giving higher priority to the burst speed.

163 SQW0419

Shutter and Drive Settings

Burst function

●We recommend using the shutter remote control (DMW-RSL1: optional) when you want to keep

the shutter button pressed while taking pictures in Burst Mode. (→323)

●When the burst speed is set to [H] and if many burst pictures are taken, the burst speed may be

reduced while burst pictures are being taken.

●When the burst speed is set to [SH] or [H] (the focus mode is set to [AFS] or [MF]), and the

exposure and White Balance are fixed to those of the first picture.

When the burst speed is set to [H] (the focus mode is set to [AFF] or [AFC]), [M], or [L], and the

exposure and White Balance are adjusted individually for each still picture.

●Burst speed may be reduced if shutter speed (pictures/sec.) is reduced in darker locations.

●With repeated recordings, it may take a while between recordings, depending on the usage

conditions.

●It may take a while to store still pictures that were taken using the burst function. If you

continue to record while storing, the number of burst pictures that can be taken will be

reduced. A high-speed card is recommended when recording using the burst function.

●This function is not available in the following cases:

• [Glistening Water], [Glittering Illuminations], [Handheld Night Shot], [Soft Image of a Flower]

(Scene Guide Mode)

• [Rough Monochrome], [Silky Monochrome], [Miniature Effect], [Soft Focus], [Star Filter],

[Sunshine] (Creative Control Mode)

• When White Balance Bracket is set

• When using [Time Lapse Shot]

• When [Auto Shooting] of [Stop Motion Animation] is set to [ON]

• During motion picture recording

• When recording using the flash

• During B (Bulb) recording

• When recording with [iHandheld Night Shot]

• When [HDR] is set to [ON]

• When [Multi Exp.] is set

• When [Simultaneous record w/o filter] of [Filter Settings] is set to [ON]

●[SH] in Burst Mode cannot be used In the following cases:

• When [Quality] is set to [ ], [ ] or [ ]

• When using [Stop Motion Animation]

164 SQW0419

Shutter and Drive Settings

Recording 4K Photos

Recording mode:

You can select the desired moment from a burst of 4K photos taken at 30 frames/second

and save that moment as a picture of approx. 8 million pixels.

Record a 4K photo Select and save pictures The picture is complete

• To record pictures, use a UHS Speed Class 3 card. (→29)

• When recording 4K photos, the angle of view becomes narrower.

1Press [ ] button ( )

2Press to select an item ([ ], etc.)

and press

3Press to select the recording method

and press [MENU/SET]

• The recording method is set to [ ] ([4K Burst]) by

default.

• The recording method can also be set from [4K

PHOTO] in the [Rec] menu.

165 SQW0419

Shutter and Drive Settings

Recording 4K Photos

[4K Burst]

(→167)

For capturing the best shot of a fast-moving

subject (e.g., sports, aeroplanes, trains)

Burst recording is performed while the shutter button

is pressed and held. The shutter sound will be heard

repeatedly.

Press and hold

Recording is performed

Continuous recording length:

Up to 29 minutes and 59 seconds*1Audio recording: None

[4K Burst(S/S)]

(→167)

“S/S” is an

abbreviation of

“Start/Stop”.

For capturing unpredictable photo opportunities

(e.g., plants, animals, children)

Burst recording starts when the shutter button is

pressed and stops when pressed again. Start and

stop tones will be heard.

Start (First)

Stop (Second)

Recording is performed

Continuous recording length:

Up to 29 minutes and 59 seconds*1Audio recording: Available*2

[4K Pre-Burst]

(→168)

For recording as needed whenever a photo

opportunity arises (e.g. the moment when a ball is

thrown)

Burst recording is performed for approximately

1 second before and after the moment that the

shutter button is pressed. The shutter sound will be

heard only once.

Approximately 1 second

Recording is performed

Recording length:

Approximately 2 seconds Audio recording: None

*1 You can continue recording without interruption even if the file exceeds 4 GB, but the 4K burst file

will be saved and played back in separate files.

*2 Audio is not played back when you perform playback with the camera.

166 SQW0419

Shutter and Drive Settings

Recording 4K Photos

4Record a 4K photo

•Recording with [ ] ([4K Burst]) (→167)

•Recording with [ ] ([4K Burst(S/S)]) (→167)

•Recording with [ ] ([4K Pre-Burst]) (→168)

• When you perform 4K burst photo recording, a 4K burst file will be saved in the

MP4 format.

• When [Auto Review] is enabled, the picture selection screen will be displayed

automatically. To continue recording, press the shutter button halfway to display

the recording screen.

■To cancel the 4K Photo functions

In step 2, select [ ] ([Single]) or [ ].

Battery drainage and camera temperature

●If the surrounding temperature is high, or 4K photos are recorded continuously, or the

temperature of the camera rises, [ ] may be displayed and recording may be stopped

halfway through to protect the camera. Wait until the camera cools down.

●When the drive mode is set to [4K PHOTO] and [4K PHOTO] is set to [ ] ([4K

Pre-Burst]), the battery drains faster and the camera temperature rises. Select

[ ] ([4K Pre-Burst]) only when recording.

167 SQW0419

Shutter and Drive Settings

Recording 4K Photos

Recording with [4K Burst]

1Select [ ] ([4K Burst]) (→164) 60p

Available recording time

2Press the shutter button halfway

3Press and hold the shutter button fully for as long as you want to perform

recording

• Recording will start approximately 0.5 seconds after you press the shutter button fully. Therefore,

press the button fully as soon as possible.

• A 4K burst file will be recorded while the shutter button is pressed and held.

• If you are using Auto Focus, continuous AF will work while recording. Focus will be adjusted

continuously.

• For information on how to select and save pictures from recorded 4K burst files, refer to (→169).

●If you remove your finger from the shutter button immediately after the start of recording, up to a

period of approximately 1.5 seconds after the moment that the finger has been removed may be

recorded.

Recording with [4K Burst(S/S)]

1Select [ ] ([4K Burst(S/S)]) (→164) 60p

Available recording time

2Press the shutter button fully

• Recording will start.

• If you are using Auto Focus, continuous AF will work while

recording. Focus will be adjusted continuously.

3Press the shutter button fully again

• Recording will stop.

Recording tips

Adding markers to select and save pictures

When you press the [Fn2] button while recording, you can add a marker. (Up to

40 markers for each 4K burst file.) When selecting and saving pictures from a 4K burst

file, you can skip to the positions where you added markers.

• For information on how to select and save pictures from recorded 4K burst files, refer to (→169).

168 SQW0419

Shutter and Drive Settings

Recording 4K Photos

Recording with [4K Pre-Burst]

1Select [ ] ([4K Pre-Burst]) (→164)

• When you press the shutter button halfway, the aperture value

and shutter speed are displayed.

60p

Number of recordings that

can be made

2Press the shutter button fully

• Recording of a 4K burst file will be performed for approximately

1 second before and after the moment that the shutter button is

pressed.

Recording tips

Focus and exposure

Auto Focus adjusts focus continuously, and except in Manual Exposure Mode, it also

adjusts exposure continuously.

• Focus cannot be adjusted at the desired timing by pressing the shutter button

halfway or operating other controls.

• In situations where you want to lock focus and exposure, such as when the subject

is not at the center, use [AF/AE LOCK]. (→152)

• For information on how to select and save pictures from recorded 4K burst files, refer to (→173).

●When recording with [ ] ([4K Pre-Burst]), images may not be displayed as smoothly as when

recording with the normal recording screen.

169 SQW0419

Shutter and Drive Settings

Recording 4K Photos

Selecting pictures from 4K burst file and saving

•The picture will be saved in JPEG format.

• The picture will be saved with recording information (Exif information), including its

shutter speed, aperture and ISO sensitivity information.

Setting [Playback Mode] in the [Playback] menu to [4K PHOTO] enables you to

play back only 4K burst files and pictures created from them.

4K burst files recorded with [ ] ([4K Burst]) or [ ] ([4K Burst(S/S)])

1Select a 4K burst file on the playback screen, and

press

• [ ] is displayed on a 4K burst file.

• The same operation can be performed by touching [ ].

• The slide view screen for selecting pictures will be displayed. It

takes a few seconds until the screen is displayed.

2Touch and drag the frames to select the frame you

want to save as a picture

• You can also perform the same operation by pressing .

When you select pictures from a 4K burst file with a long burst time, we

recommend that you make a rough selection of scenes using the 4K burst

playback screen (→172) first, and then select the frame to be saved as a picture

using the slide view screen.

170 SQW0419

Shutter and Drive Settings

Recording 4K Photos

Position of the

displayed frame

Button operation Touch operation Description

Touch → Drag

Selects a frame

• You can select a frame from 60 frames (continuous

burst time of approximately 2 seconds).

Select

with

→ [MENU/SET]

Displays the previous or next frames in slide view

• The previous or next 45 frames (burst time of

approximately 1.5 seconds) will replace 45 of the

frames that are currently displayed in slide view.

• Pressing the same button again will display the

frames following the next ones or the ones preceding

the previous ones.

—Touch / Drag

Selects the frames to be displayed

• Frames preceding and following the selected frame

will be displayed in slide view.

Pinch out /

Pinch in Enlarges/reduces the display

Drag Moves the enlarged area (during enlarged display)

[Fn1] Displays the 4K burst playback screen

[Fn2] Switches to marker operation ([ ] ([4K Burst(S/S)])

only)

[MENU/SET] Saves the picture

•

If the burst time was short, a smaller number of frames are displayed in slide view. [ ] and [ ]

cannot be selected.

171 SQW0419

Shutter and Drive Settings

Recording 4K Photos

•

During marker operation, you can skip to the markers that you added or the beginning or end of

the 4K burst file. Press [Fn2] button again to return to the original operation.

Button

operation

Touch

operation Description

Moves to the next marker.

Moves to the previous marker.

•

When you have selected frames that are not currently displayed in slide view, such as when you

have selected [ ] or [ ], it may take a few seconds until the slide view frames are displayed.

172 SQW0419

Shutter and Drive Settings

Recording 4K Photos

<4K burst playback screen>

During pause During continuous playback

Button operation Touch operation Description

Continuous playback

Continuous rewind

• Frames are rewound in approximately 0.5 second

intervals at a faster speed than that of continuous

playback.

Pause (during continuous playback/rewind)

Fast forward playback

Single-frame forward (while paused)

Fast rewind playback

Single-frame rewind (while paused)

—Touch / Drag Selects the frames to be displayed (while paused)

Pinch out /

Pinch in Enlarges/reduces the display (while paused)

Drag Moves the enlarged area (during enlarged display)

[Fn1] Displays the slide view screen (while paused)

[Fn2] Switches to marker operation ([ ] ([4K Burst(S/S)])

only)

[MENU/SET] Saves the picture (while paused)

• The on-screen indications disappear if no operation is performed for approximately 2 seconds

during continuous playback or continuous rewind playback. Touch the screen to display the

indications again.

3Press [MENU/SET] to save the picture

• Pause the playback to perform this operation when using the 4K burst playback screen.

173 SQW0419

Shutter and Drive Settings

Recording 4K Photos

4K burst files recorded with [ ] ([4K Pre-Burst])

1Select a 4K burst file on the playback screen, and

press

• [ ] is displayed on a 4K burst file.

• The same operation can be performed by touching [ ].

• The slide view screen for selecting pictures will be displayed. It

takes a few seconds until the screen is displayed.

2Touch and drag the frames to select the frame you

want to save as a picture

• You can also perform the same operation by pressing .

Button operation Touch operation Description

Touch / Drag Selects a frame

Pinch out /

Pinch in Enlarges/reduces the display

Drag Moves the enlarged area (during enlarged display)

[MENU/SET] Saves the picture

3Press [MENU/SET] to save the picture

174 SQW0419

Shutter and Drive Settings

Recording 4K Photos

■Selecting and saving pictures on the TV screen

Preparation

Set [HDMI Mode (Play)] (→71) to [AUTO] or [4K].

• When connecting to a TV that does not support 4K motion picture, select [AUTO].

Connect this unit to a TV using an HDMI micro cable and display the playback

screen (→303)

• If you want to select and save pictures while the camera is connected to a TV with the HDMI

micro cable, set [VIERA Link] of [TV Connection] in the [Setup] menu to [OFF].

• If you connect the camera to a TV with an HDMI micro cable or AV cable (optional) and display

4K burst files on the TV, they will be displayed only on the 4K burst playback screen.

The 4K burst playback screen for playing back 4K burst files recorded with [ ] ([4K Burst]) or

[ ] ([4K Burst(S/S)]) is displayed, and the slide view screen is not displayed.

• Even if you insert the SD card to a 4K-compatible TV with an SD card slot, you cannot play

back 4K burst files recorded with [Aspect Ratio] set to an option other than [16:9].

To play them back, connect the camera and a 4K-compatible TV with an HDMI micro cable.

(As of July 2015)

●If you display the playback screen when the camera contains many picture files, the acquiring

information icon [ ] or [ ] may be displayed for a long time. In this case, you

cannot play back 4K burst files recorded with the 4K Photo function. Wait until the icon disappears.

●If you touch the slide view screen or 4K burst playback screen twice, the screen will be enlarged.

To return to the original display, touch the enlarged screen twice.

●To select and save pictures from 4K burst files on a PC, use the software “PHOTOfunSTUDIO” on

the supplied DVD. Please note that it is not possible to edit a 4K burst file as a motion picture.

●4K burst files recorded on other devices may not be played back correctly on this unit.

175 SQW0419

Shutter and Drive Settings

Recording 4K Photos

Notes on the 4K Photo function

■To change the aspect ratio

Selecting [Aspect Ratio] in the [Rec] menu allows you to change the aspect ratio for 4K

photos.

■To record the subject with reduced blur

You can reduce the blur of the subject by setting a faster shutter speed.

Set mode dial to [ ]

Set the shutter speed by rotating the rear dial

• Approximate shutter speed for outdoor recording in fine weather conditions: 1/1000 seconds

or faster.

• If you increase the shutter speed, the ISO sensitivity becomes higher, which may increase the

noise on the screen.

■Shutter sound for 4K photo recording

When using [ ] ([4K Burst]) or [ ] ([4K Pre-Burst]), recording is performed with the

electronic shutter. You can change the electronic shutter sound settings in [Shutter Vol.]

and [Shutter Tone]. (→66)

When recording with [ ] ([4K Burst(S/S)]), you can set the start/stop tone volume in

[Beep Volume].

• You can perform high speed burst recording quietly using the 4K Photo function in

combination with [Silent Mode].

■Scenes not suitable for the 4K Photo function

Recording in extremely bright locations or indoors

When recording subjects in extremely bright locations or recording under fluorescent

lighting or LED lighting fixtures, etc., the colors and brightness may change or

horizontal striping may appear on the screen. The striping may be reduced by setting a

slower shutter speed.

Fast-moving subjects in the horizontal direction

Subjects moving fast in the horizontal direction may appear distorted when recorded.

176 SQW0419

Shutter and Drive Settings

Recording 4K Photos

■Limitations on the 4K Photo function

To optimize settings for 4K photo recording, certain limitations apply to some recording

functions, menu items and other settings.

• The following settings are fixed.

[Picture Size]

[4K] (8M)

• Following picture sizes will be applied:

[4:3]: 3238×2496 [3:2]: 3504×2336

[16:9]: 3840×2160 [1:1]: 2880×2880

[Quality] [ ]

[Shutter Type] [ESHTR]

[Rec Format]*[MP4]

[Rec Quality]*[4K/100M/30p]

[Continuous AF]*[ON]

* Settings in the [Motion Picture] menu are not applied to 4K burst files recorded with the 4K

Photo function.

• The following limitations apply to the recording functions indicated below.

[ ] ([4K Burst])/

[ ] ([4K Burst(S/S)]) [ ] ([4K Pre-Burst])

Program Shift –

Shutter speed 1/30 to 1/16000

Focus mode (AFF) –

[AF Mode] ([ ]) –

[MF Assist]○–

White Balance ([ ]),

White Balance Bracket –

ISO sensitivity [AUTO], 100 to 6400

Flash –

177 SQW0419

Shutter and Drive Settings

Recording 4K Photos

• The following menu items are disabled:

Applicable to [ ] ([4K Burst])/[ ] ([4K Burst(S/S)])/[ ] ([4K Pre-Burst])

[Rec]

[Picture Size], [Quality], [AFS/AFF], [iHandheld Night Shot], [iHDR],

[Panorama Settings], [Shutter Type], [Flash], [Color Space], [Face Recog.],

[Profile Setup]

[Custom] [Rec Area]

Only [ ] ([4K Pre-Burst])

[Setup] [Economy]

●The following changes occur when recording 4K photos:

• The [i.Resolution] setting changes from [EXTENDED] to [LOW].

• [Destination] in [Travel Date] cannot be recorded.

• It is not possible to use the HDMI output.

●When recording using the [ ] ([4K Pre-Burst]) function, Step Zoom does not operate.

●Scene Detection in Intelligent Auto Mode works the same way as when recording motion pictures.

●When the drive mode is set to [4K PHOTO], it is not possible to take pictures while recording

motion picture. (Only when [ ] (Photo Priority) is set.)

●The 4K Photo function is disabled when using the following settings:

• [Clear in Backlight], [Glistening Water], [Artistic Nightscape], [Glittering Illuminations], [Handheld

Night Shot], [Clear Night Portrait], [Soft Image of a Flower] (Scene Guide Mode)

• [Rough Monochrome], [Silky Monochrome], [Miniature Effect], [Soft Focus], [Star Filter],

[Sunshine] (Creative Control Mode)

• When White Balance Bracket is set

• During motion picture recording

• During B (Bulb) recording

• When [HDR] is set to [ON]

• When [Multi Exp.] is set

• When using [Time Lapse Shot]

• When using [Stop Motion Animation]

• When [Simultaneous record w/o filter] of [Filter Settings] is set to [ON]

178 SQW0419

Shutter and Drive Settings

Recording while exposure is changed automatically

[Auto Bracket]

Recording mode:

Each time the shutter button is pressed, recordings are made of up to 7 pictures with

different exposure settings based on the Exposure Compensation range.

Example of Auto Bracket recording when [Step] is set to [ ] and [Sequence]

is set to [0/–/+]

1st picture 2nd picture 3rd picture

±0 EV –1/3 EV +1/3 EV

1Press [ ] button ( )

2Press to select an item ([ ], etc.)

and press

3Press to select the compensation

range and press [MENU/SET]

4Focus on the subject and take a picture

• If you press and hold the shutter button, a burst of

pictures can be recorded.

• The display of Auto Bracket flashes until all of the burst

pictures you have set are recorded.

• The camera restarts recording from the first still picture

if you change the Auto Bracket settings or turn off the

camera before all of the burst pictures you have set

are recorded.

60p

■To cancel [Auto Bracket]

In step 2, select [ ] ([Single]) or [ ].

179 SQW0419

Shutter and Drive Settings

Recording while exposure is changed automatically [Auto Bracket]

■Changing the Single/Burst setting, compensation range, and recording sequence

of Auto Bracket

Set the menu

→ [Rec] → [Auto Bracket]

Press to select [Single/Burst Settings], [Step] or [Sequence] and press

[MENU/SET]

Press to select the setting and press [MENU/SET]

[Single/Burst

Settings]

(single)

(burst)

[Step]

3·1/3 (3 pictures)

3·2/3 (3 pictures)

3·1 (3 pictures)

5·1/3 (5 pictures)

5·2/3 (5 pictures)

5·1 (5 pictures)

7·1/3 (7 pictures)

7·2/3 (7 pictures)

7·1 (7 pictures)

[Sequence] 0/–/+

–/0/+

●When you take pictures using Auto Bracket after performing Exposure Compensation, the camera

will take pictures using the corrected exposure value as a reference.

●This function is not available in the following cases:

• [Glistening Water], [Glittering Illuminations], [Handheld Night Shot], [Soft Image of a Flower]

(Scene Guide Mode)

• [Rough Monochrome], [Silky Monochrome], [Miniature Effect], [Soft Focus], [Star Filter],

[Sunshine] (Creative Control Mode)

• When White Balance Bracket is set

• During motion picture recording

• When recording using the flash

• During B (Bulb) recording

• When recording with [iHandheld Night Shot]

• When [HDR] is set to [ON]

• When [Multi Exp.] is set

• When using [Time Lapse Shot]

• When [Auto Shooting] of [Stop Motion Animation] is set to [ON]

• When [Simultaneous record w/o filter] of [Filter Settings] is set to [ON]

180 SQW0419

Shutter and Drive Settings

Taking pictures with self-timer

Recording mode:

We recommend using a tripod. This is also effective for preventing jitter when pressing

the shutter button, by setting the self-timer to 2 seconds.

1Press [ ] button ( )

2Press to select an item ([ ], etc.)

and press

3Press to select the self-timer

operation setting and press [MENU/SET]

The shutter is activated after 10 seconds.

The shutter is activated after 10 seconds and three

pictures are taken at intervals of approximately

2 seconds.

The shutter is activated after 2 seconds.

• You can also set the time for the self-timer using [Self

Timer] in the [Rec] menu.

4Press the shutter button halfway to focus,

and press it fully to start recording

• The focus and exposure are fixed when the shutter

button is pressed halfway.

• After the self-timer indicator flashes, recording will

start.

■To cancel self-timer

In step 2, select [ ] ([Single]) or [ ].

• You can cancel the self-timer by turning off the camera. (When [Self Timer Auto Off]

(→73) is set to [ON].)

181 SQW0419

Shutter and Drive Settings

Taking pictures with self-timer

●If you take a picture with a flash when [ ] is set, the flash output may not be stable in some

cases.

●It cannot be set to [ ] in the following cases:

• When White Balance Bracket is set

• During B (Bulb) recording

• When [Simultaneous record w/o filter] of [Filter Settings] is set to [ON]

• When [Multi Exp.] is set

●This function is not available in the following cases:

• During motion picture recording

• When using [Time Lapse Shot]

• When [Auto Shooting] of [Stop Motion Animation] is set to [ON]

182 SQW0419

Functions for specific subjects and purposes

Taking pictures automatically at set intervals

[Time Lapse Shot]

Recording mode:

You can preset data such as recording start time and time lapse to take still pictures

automatically. This setting is convenient for taking pictures at constant intervals for

landscape scenes, observation of the gradual changes in animals/plants, and other

applications. The pictures are recorded as a set of group pictures (→232). When [Time

Lapse Video] in the [Playback] menu is used, you can create a motion picture. (→248)

•Complete the date and time settings in advance. (→34)

1Set the menu

→ [Rec] → [Time Lapse Shot]

2Press to select the item and press [MENU/SET]

[Start Time] [Now] Starts the recording by fully-pressing the shutter button.

[Start Time

Set]

Set the time to start recording. Any time up to 23 hours

59 minutes ahead can be set.

Press to select the item (hour and/or minute),

and to set the start time, and press [MENU/SET]

[Shooting

Interval] /

[Image

Count]

The recording interval and the number of pictures can be set.

: Select the item (minute/second/number of pictures)

: Setting

[MENU/SET]: Set

• You can set the interval from 1 second to 99 minutes 59 seconds in

1-second intervals.

• You can set the number of pictures to be recorded from 1 picture to 9,999

pictures.

• Be sure to use an interval setting that is longer than the exposure time

(shutter speed) . (Illustration below)

If the interval setting is shorter than the exposure time (shutter speed)

(e.g. recording at night), it may cause the recording to skip.

First Second Third

• The camera may not be able to record using the preset interval and number

of pictures to be recorded under some recording conditions.

3Press to select [Start] and press [MENU/SET]

183 SQW0419

Functions for specific subjects and purposes

Taking pictures automatically at set intervals [Time Lapse Shot]

4Press the shutter button fully

• The recording starts automatically.

• During recording standby, the camera turns off automatically when no operation

is performed for a preset interval. The [Time Lapse Shot] recording will continue

even if the camera is turned off, and the camera is automatically turned on at the

recording start time. If you want to turn on the camera manually, press the shutter

button halfway.

• Operations during recording standby (The camera is turned on)

Button

operation

Touch

operation Description

[Fn2]

Displays a selection screen that lets you pause or stop the

recording

Displays a selection screen that lets you resume or stop the

recording (during pause)

5Select the motion picture creation method

• [Rec Format]: [MP4]

[Rec Quality] Sets the picture quality of the motion picture.

[4K/30p] / [4K/24p] / [FHD/60p] / [FHD/30p] / [HD/30p] / [VGA/30p]

[Frame Rate]

Set the number of frames per second. When you set a higher number, you

can create a more seamless animation.

[60fps]* / [30fps] / [15fps] / [10fps] / [7.5fps] / [6fps] / [3fps] / [1fps]

* Only available with [FHD/60p] setting

• You can set the number of frames to [24fps], [12fps], [8fps], [6fps], [4.8fps],

[2.4fps], or [1fps] when [Rec Quality] is set to [4K/24p].

[Sequence] [NORMAL]: Stitches the still pictures in the recording sequence.

[REVERSE]: Stitches the still pictures in the reverse order of recording.

6Use to select [OK] and press [MENU/SET]

• You can also create a motion picture using [Time Lapse Video] in the [Playback]

menu. (→248)

184 SQW0419

Functions for specific subjects and purposes

Taking pictures automatically at set intervals [Time Lapse Shot]

●This function is not intended for application-specific systems (monitoring cameras).

●If you leave the camera unattended during [Time Lapse Shot] recording, make sure that the

camera is not stolen.

●Exercise caution when you perform [Time Lapse Shot] recording for a long period of time

in cold regions or in a low-temperature or high-temperature/high-humidity environment,

since such use could cause malfunctions.

●Use a sufficiently charged battery or an AC adaptor (optional) and DC coupler (optional).

●[Time Lapse Shot] is paused in the following cases:

• When the remaining battery power runs out

• Turning the camera off

If this occurs during [Time Lapse Shot] recording, you can restart the operation by replacing the

battery or card in the pause state and turning the camera on. (Note, however, that the pictures

recorded after restarting the operation are saved as a separate set of group pictures.) When you

replace the battery or card, turn the camera off.

●Do not connect the AV cable (optional), HDMI micro cable or USB connection cable (supplied)

during [Time Lapse Shot] recording.

●When you select the picture quality for an aspect ratio that is different from the original picture, the

picture will be displayed with a black band on the upper/lower side or the left/right side of a stop

motion animation.

●If the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or AC adaptor disconnection while a motion

picture is being recorded using the AC adaptor (optional), that motion picture will not be recorded.

●You cannot create a motion picture that is longer than 29 minutes 59 seconds, or whose file

exceeds 4 GB.

●If only one still picture is recorded, it will not be recorded as a group picture.

●This function is not available in the following cases:

• [Handheld Night Shot] (Scene Guide Mode)

• When [Simultaneous record w/o filter] of [Filter Settings] is set to [ON]

• When [Multi Exp.] is set

• When using [Stop Motion Animation]

185 SQW0419

Functions for specific subjects and purposes

Creating stop motion animation [Stop Motion Animation]

Recording mode:

You can stitch still pictures to create stop motion animation.

•Complete the date and time settings in advance. (→34)

• Still pictures that were captured using frame-by-frame recording are grouped into a

single picture group. (→232)

Before creating stop motion animation

When you use [Stop Motion Animation] to record still pictures by moving a subject such

as a doll little by little and then stitching those pictures, you can create a stop motion

animation as if the subject is moving.

●To create stop motion animation using this camera, it is necessary to record 1 to

60 frames of still pictures for every 1 second of motion picture.

●To produce smooth movement of the subject, record the motion using as many frames

as possible and set a higher number of frames per second (frame rate) when you

create a stop motion animation.

1Set the menu

→ [Rec] → [Stop Motion Animation]

2Press to select the recording method, and press

[MENU/SET]

[Auto

Shooting]

[ON] Takes pictures automatically at a set recording interval.

[OFF] Takes pictures manually, one frame at a time.

[Shooting

Interval]

(Only when [Auto Shooting] is set to [ON])

Set the interval used for [Auto Shooting]. You can set the interval from 1 second

to 60 seconds in 1-second intervals.

3Press to select [Start] and press [MENU/SET]

186 SQW0419

Functions for specific subjects and purposes

Creating stop motion animation [Stop Motion Animation]

4Press to select [New] and press

[MENU/SET]

5Press the shutter button fully

• Up to 9,999 frames can be recorded.

6Move the subject to decide on the

composition

• Repeat the recording of still pictures in the same way.

• When you turn off the camera during recording, a message to restart recording

will appear when you turn on the camera. To start recording from the next still

picture, select [Yes].

How to create stop motion animation effectively

●Up to two previously recorded pictures are displayed on the recording screen.

Check this screen as a guideline for determining the amount of required motion.

●You can press the Playback button to check the recorded pictures. Press the

[

Q.MENU

] button to delete unnecessary pictures. To return to the recording

screen, press the Playback button again.

7Touch [ ] to end the recording

• You can also end the recording by selecting [Stop

Motion Animation] in the [Rec] menu, and then

pressing the [MENU/SET].

• When [Auto Shooting] is set to [ON], select [End] on

the confirmation screen. (If you select [Pause], press

the shutter button fully to resume recording.)

187 SQW0419

Functions for specific subjects and purposes

Creating stop motion animation [Stop Motion Animation]

8Select a method to create a stop motion animation

• [Rec Format]: [MP4]

[Rec Quality] Sets the picture quality of the motion picture.

[4K/30p] / [4K/24p] / [FHD/60p] / [FHD/30p] / [HD/30p] / [VGA/30p]

[Frame Rate]

Set the number of frames per second. When you set a higher number, you

can create a more seamless animation.

[60fps]* / [30fps] / [15fps] / [10fps] / [7.5fps] / [6fps] / [3fps] / [1fps]

* Only available with [FHD/60p] setting

• You can set the number of frames to [24fps], [12fps], [8fps], [6fps], [4.8fps],

[2.4fps], or [1fps] when [Rec Quality] is set to [4K/24p].

[Sequence] [NORMAL]: Stitches the still pictures in the recording sequence.

[REVERSE]: Stitches the still pictures in the reverse order of recording.

9Press to select [OK] and press [MENU/SET]

• You can also create a stop motion animation using [Stop Motion Video] in the

[Playback] menu. (→248)

■Adding pictures to an already recorded stop motion animation group

When you select [Additional] in step 4, group pictures recorded using [Stop Motion

Animation] are displayed. Select a set of group pictures and press [MENU/SET]. Then,

select [Yes] on the confirmation screen.

188 SQW0419

Functions for specific subjects and purposes

Creating stop motion animation [Stop Motion Animation]

●[Auto Shooting] may not be performed according to the preset interval because recording could

take time under some recording conditions, such as when pictures are taken using a flash.

●When you select the picture quality for an aspect ratio that is different from the original picture, the

picture will be displayed with a black band on the upper/lower side or the left/right side of a stop

motion animation.

●Use a sufficiently charged battery or an AC adaptor (optional) and DC coupler (optional).

●If the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or AC adaptor disconnection while a motion

picture is being recorded using the AC adaptor (optional), that motion picture will not be recorded.

●You cannot create a motion picture that is longer than 29 minutes 59 seconds, or whose file

exceeds 4 GB.

●If only one still picture is recorded, it will not be recorded as a group picture. You cannot select

only one recorded still picture using [Additional].

●This function is not available in the following cases:

• When [Simultaneous record w/o filter] of [Filter Settings] is set to [ON]

• When [Multi Exp.] is set

• When using [Time Lapse Shot]

●[Auto Shooting] in [Stop Motion Animation] cannot be used in the following case:

• [Handheld Night Shot] (Scene Guide Mode)

189 SQW0419

Functions for specific subjects and purposes

Performing multiple exposures for a single picture

[Multi Exp.]

Recording mode:

You can create an effect similar to the operation of up to four times of exposure on a

single picture.

1Set the menu

→ [Rec] → [Multi Exp.]

2Press to select [Start] and press [MENU/SET]

3Decide on your composition and take the

first picture

• After recording the first picture, press the shutter

button halfway to proceed to the next recording.

• Press to select the item and press [MENU/SET].

You can perform the following operations.

– [Next]: Proceed to the next recording.

– [Retake]: Delete the result of the last shot and take

another picture.

– [Exit]: Exit Multi Exposure and save the picture that

was taken.

Retake

Exit

4Record the second, third, and fourth

pictures

• When you press [Fn2] button while taking pictures, the

pictures that you took are saved and Multi Exposure

is closed. Retake

Exit

5Press to select [Exit] and press

[MENU/SET]

• You can also end the operation by pressing the shutter

button halfway.

190 SQW0419

Functions for specific subjects and purposes

Performing multiple exposures for a single picture [Multi Exp.]

■About the automatic gain compensation setting

Select [Auto Gain] on the screen in step 2 (→189).

• [ON]: Combines several pictures into one by automatically adjusting the brightness in

accordance with the number of pictures taken.

• [OFF]: Combines several pictures into one by simply overlapping the exposure

results of all pictures, as is. Perform the Exposure Compensation based on

the requirements of a subject.

■To overlay the pictures on the RAW file picture in a card

Set [Overlay] to [ON] on the screen in step 2 (→189). After selecting [Start], the

pictures on a card will be displayed. Select the RAW file pictures and press [MENU/

SET] to continue recording.

• You can perform [Overlay] on RAW file pictures recorded using this camera only.

●Pictures are not saved in memory until Multi Exposure is ended.

●Information for the picture taken last will be used as recording information of pictures taken using

Multi Exposure.

●While [Multi Exp.] recording is being performed, you cannot set items displayed in gray on the

menu screen.

●This function is not available in the following cases:

• When using [Time Lapse Shot]

• When using [Stop Motion Animation]

191 SQW0419

Functions for specific subjects and purposes

Disabling the beeps and flash at the same time

[Silent Mode]

Recording mode:

This mode is useful when you are taking pictures in a quiet environment or public facilities

or when you take pictures of a subject such as a baby or animal.

1Set the menu

→ [Custom] → [Silent Mode]

Settings: [ON] / [OFF]

• This mode will mute beeps, set the flash to [ ] (Forced Flash Off), and disable

AF Assist Lamp. The settings for the following functions are fixed:

– [Shutter Type]: [ESHTR]

– [Flash Mode]: [ ] (Forced Flash Off)

– [AF Assist Lamp]: [OFF]

– [Beep Volume]: [ ] (Off)

– [Shutter Vol.]: [ ] (Off)

●Even when this mode is set to [ON], the following lamps/indicators will light or flash.

• Status indicator

• Self-timer indicator

• Wi-Fi connection lamp

●The operation sounds of this camera such as the lens aperture sound are not muted.

●If you take a picture of a moving subject using the electronic shutter, the subject in the

picture may be skewed in some cases.

●When you take a picture under a fluorescent or LED lighting fixture using the electronic

shutter, the recorded picture may have horizontal stripes. If you use a slower shutter

speed, the horizontal stripes may be reduced. (→87)

192 SQW0419

Functions for specific subjects and purposes

Recording with the Face Recognition function

[Face Recog.]

Recording mode:

The Face Recognition function recognizes a face similar to a registered face and

automatically adjusts focus and exposure for the face with higher priority. Even if a person

you want to focus on is standing at the back or corner in a group photo, the camera will

automatically recognize the person and record this person’s face clearly.

1Set the menu

→ [Rec] → [Face Recog.]

Settings: [ON] / [OFF] / [MEMORY]

Default [Face Recog.] setting is [OFF].

When the face pictures are registered, the setting will be [ON] automatically.

■How the Face Recognition function works

During recording

• The camera recognizes a registered face and adjusts

focus and exposure.

• When registered faces that have set names are

recognized, the names are displayed (max. 3 people).

During playback

• The name and age are displayed (if information is

registered).

• The names that have been set for the recognized faces

are displayed (max. 3 people).

• Only pictures of the selected registered people are played

back ([Category Play]).

●[Face Recog.] functions only when Auto Focus mode is set to [ ].

●Only the first picture of the burst recording will contain Face Recognition information.

●The name of the person recognized in the first picture is displayed in the case of group pictures.

●Face Recognition may take more time to select and recognize distinctive facial features than

regular Face/Eye Detection.

●Face Recognition searches for faces similar to those registered, but there is no guarantee it

will always recognize these faces. In some cases, the camera cannot recognize or incorrectly

recognizes even registered people depending on their expression or the environment.

●Even if Face Recognition information is registered, pictures recorded when the name is [OFF] are

not categorized for Face Recognition in [Category Play].

●Even if Face Recognition information is changed, Face Recognition information for

previously recorded pictures is not changed. (→194)

For example, if a name is changed, pictures recorded before the change are not categorized for

Face Recognition in [Category Play].

●To change name information for pictures already recorded, perform a [REPLACE] (→254) in [Face

Rec Edit].

193 SQW0419

Functions for specific subjects and purposes

Recording with the Face Recognition function [Face Recog.]

●This function is not available in the following cases:

• [Miniature Effect] (Creative Control Mode)

• During motion picture recording

• When recording 4K photos

• When using [Time Lapse Shot]

Registering face pictures

Up to 6 people’s face pictures can be registered along with such information as name and

birthdate.

■Recording tips when registering face pictures

• Make sure the subject’s eyes are open and mouth closed;

have the subject face the camera directly, and make sure

the outline of the face, the eyes and eyebrows are not

hidden by hair.

• Make sure there are no heavy shadows on the face.

(During registration, the flash is not used.)

Good example for registering

a face

■If the camera seems to have difficulty recognizing faces when recording

• Register additional pictures of the same person’s face, indoors and outdoors or with

different expressions or angles.

• Register additional pictures at the place you are recording.

• If a registered person is no longer recognized, re-register that person.

1Use to select [MEMORY] and press [MENU/SET]

654

New

KEN

New

2Use to select [New] and press [MENU/SET]

• If 6 people are already registered, first delete a registered

person. (→194)

3Align the face with the guide and record

• Faces of subjects other than people (e.g. pets) cannot be

registered.

• When is pressed or [ ] is touched, an explanation is

displayed.

194 SQW0419

Functions for specific subjects and purposes

Recording with the Face Recognition function [Face Recog.]

4Use to select the item for editing and press [MENU/SET]

[Name] Use to select [SET] and press [MENU/SET]

Enter the name (See “Entering Text”: (→75))

[Age] Set the birthdate.

Use to select [SET] and press [MENU/SET]

Use to select year, month and day, set with , and press

[MENU/SET]

[Add Images] Up to 3 face pictures of the person can be registered.

Use to select [Add] and press [MENU/SET]

• If only one picture is registered, you can skip the cursor button operation.

Just press [MENU/SET] to register an additional face picture.

• When a registered face picture is selected with cursor button, a screen to

confirm deletion is displayed. Select [Yes] to delete the face picture.

Record the picture (step 3 (→193))

Editing or deleting information about registered persons

1Use to select [MEMORY] and press [MENU/SET]

2Use to select the picture of the person to be edited or deleted and

press [MENU/SET]

3Use to select the item and press [MENU/SET]

[Info Edit] Edit name or other registered information. (Step 4 above)

[Priority] Set priority order for focus and exposure.

Use to select the registration order and press [MENU/SET]

[Delete] Delete information and face pictures of registered persons.

195 SQW0419

Functions for specific subjects and purposes

Setting the profile for a baby or pet to record in a

picture

Recording mode:

You can set a name or birthday of a baby or pet before taking a picture to record the

name or age in months/years in the picture.

■Setting the name and age in months/years

Set the menu

→ [Rec] → [Profile Setup]

Settings: [ ] ([Baby1]) / [ ] ([Baby2]) / [ ] ([Pet]) / [OFF] / [SET]

Use to select [SET] and press [MENU/SET]

Use to select [Baby1], [Baby2] or [Pet] and press [MENU/SET]

Use to select [Age] or [Name] and press [MENU/SET]

Use to select [SET] and press [MENU/SET]

Age: Use to select year, month and day, set with , and press [MENU/SET]

Name: (See “Entering Text”: (→75))

Use to select [Exit] and press [MENU/SET] to finish

■Canceling the display of the name and age in months/years

Select [OFF] in step .

●[Age] and [Name] print setting can be made on your computer using “PHOTOfunSTUDIO” on the

supplied DVD. Text may also be stamped onto the still picture using [Text Stamp].

●[Profile Setup] is not available for 4K photo recording.

●You cannot record the name or age in months/years in the following cases:

• During motion picture recording

• Still pictures that are taken while recording motion pictures ([ ] (Video Priority)) (→220)

196 SQW0419

Functions for specific subjects and purposes

Displaying the appropriate screen for specific

recording conditions

Displaying the center of the screen ([Center Marker])

Recording mode:

The center of the recording screen will be displayed as [+].

This is convenient for operating the zoom while keeping the

subject at the center of the screen.

→ [Custom] → [Center Marker]

Settings: [ON] / [OFF]

Checking the area where overexposure may occur ([Zebra Pattern])

Recording mode:

You can check the area in a picture that is brighter than a certain brightness, which could

result in overexposure, by displaying such an area using a zebra pattern. You can also

set the brightness to be represented by the zebra pattern.

→ [Custom] → [Zebra Pattern]

[ZEBRA1] Displays an area brighter than a certain brightness using a

right-leaning zebra pattern.

[ZEBRA2] Displays an area brighter than a certain brightness using a

left-leaning zebra pattern.

[OFF] —

[SET]

Sets the brightness to be displayed for each zebra pattern.

[Zebra 1] / [Zebra 2]

1Use to select the brightness and press [MENU/SET]

• The range of brightness you can select from is [50%] to [105%]. The [OFF]

setting is available for [Zebra 2]. When [100%] or [105%] is selected, only the

overexposed areas are displayed with the zebra pattern. When a smaller numeric

value is set, the range of brightness to be displayed by each zebra pattern will

increase.

197 SQW0419

Functions for specific subjects and purposes

Displaying the appropriate screen for specific recording conditions

●If there is overexposure, we recommend taking pictures using a lower exposure value (→154),

using the histogram (→47) as a guideline.

●The displayed zebra pattern is not recorded.

●If you set [Zebra Pattern] to [Fn Button Set] (→61) in the [Custom] menu, every time you press

the assigned function button the setting will switch in the following order: [Zebra 1] → [Zebra 2]

→ [Zebra OFF]. When [Zebra 2] is set to [OFF], you can switch the setting quickly in the following

order: [Zebra 1] → [Zebra OFF].

Setting a monochrome display for the recording screen

([Monochrome Live View])

Recording mode:

You can display the recording screen in black and white. This function is useful when a

black and white screen will make it easier to adjust focus in Manual Focus mode.

→ [Custom] → [Monochrome Live View]

Settings: [ON] / [OFF]

• Even if you use the HDMI output during recording, this function will not work for the

connected device.

• This does not affect recorded pictures.

198 SQW0419

Functions for specific subjects and purposes

Recording while monitoring camera images

Recording mode:

When using the HDMI output, you can take pictures while

monitoring the camera image on a TV, etc.

Refer to (→303) on how to connect with TV by using HDMI

micro cable.

■Switching the information displayed

You can change the display shown during HDMI output using [HDMI Info Display (Rec)]

(→71) in [TV Connection] on the [Setup] menu.

[ON]: The camera display is output as is.

[OFF]: Only images are output.

●When using the Auto Focus Mode [ ] or MF assist, the screen cannot be enlarged in windowed

mode.

●[Aspect Ratio] in the [Rec] menu is fixed to [16:9].

●An electronic sound or shutter sound will not sound.

●If you set up a Wi-Fi connection while using the HDMI output, no image will be displayed on the

camera monitor.

●The scene selection screen in Scene Guide Mode is not output through the HDMI connection.

●This function is not available in the following cases:

• During motion picture recording

• During panorama picture recording

• When recording 4K photos

199 SQW0419

Stabilizer, Zoom and Flash

Correcting jitter

Recording mode:

Automatically detects and prevents jitter. For motion picture recording, the 5-Axis Hybrid

Image Stabilizer function is available. It uses both the optical stabilizer of the lens and the

electronic stabilizer of the camera’s sensor. It corrects different types of jitters including

those that occur during zoom recording and also recording while walking.

1Set the menu

→ [Rec] → [Stabilizer]

2Use to select the item and press [MENU/SET]

[Operation Mode]

(Normal) Corrects vertical and horizontal jitter.

(Panning)

Corrects vertical jitter. This setting is ideal for panning

(technique of recording a subject by matching the

camera movement with the movement of a subject

going in a specific direction). We recommend using the

Viewfinder.

[OFF] [Stabilizer] does not work.

[E-Stabilization

(Video)]

Corrects jitters that occur in 5 directions during motion picture recording,

namely the vertical direction, horizontal direction, rotation axis, vertical

rotation, and horizontal rotation (5-axis Hybrid Image Stabilizer function).

[ON] / [OFF]

• If you set this item to [ON], [ ] is displayed on the screen while

recording motion pictures.

However, in the Creative Video Mode, [ ] is displayed on the screen

at all times.

• The angle of view may become narrower as compared to that during

recording.

200 SQW0419

Stabilizer, Zoom and Flash

Correcting jitter

To prevent jitter

If a warning is displayed about jitter, use [Stabilizer], a tripod,

[Self Timer], or shutter remote control (DMW-RSL1: optional)

(→323).

●Shutter speed will be slower particularly in the following

cases. Keep the camera still from the moment the shutter

button is pressed until the picture appears on the screen.

We recommend using a tripod.

60p

• [Slow Sync.]

• [Slow Sync./Red-Eye]

• [Clear Nightscape], [Cool Night Sky], [Warm Glowing Nightscape], [Artistic

Nightscape], [Glittering Illuminations], [Clear Night Portrait] (Scene Guide Mode)

• When the shutter speed is slowed

●When you use a tripod, we recommend setting [Operation Mode] of [Stabilizer] to [OFF]. [ ] is

displayed on the screen at that time.

●[Stabilizer] cannot be used by selecting [ ] (Normal) in Panorama Shot Mode.

●In the following cases, the [Stabilizer] will switch to [ ] (Normal), even if it is set to [ ]

(Panning):

• During motion picture recording

• When 4K Photo function has been set

●[Stabilizer] cannot be used when recording high-speed motion pictures.

●The 5-axis Hybrid Image Stabilizer cannot be used in the following cases:

• When recording motion pictures for which [Rec Quality] is set to either [4K/100M/30p],

[4K/100M/24p] or [VGA/4M/30p]

●Cases where the stabilizer function may be ineffective:

• When there is a lot of jitter

• When the zoom magnification is high (also in the Digital Zoom range)

• When taking pictures while following a moving subject

• When the shutter speed becomes slower to take pictures indoors or in dark places

●The panning effect by selecting [ ] is not fully achieved in the following cases:

• Bright summer days or other bright locations

• When the shutter speed is higher than 1/100 seconds

• When the motion of a subject is slow and the speed with which the camera is moved is too slow

(a nice background blur is not achieved)

• When the camera is not adequately tracking the motion of a subject

201 SQW0419

Stabilizer, Zoom and Flash

Using Zoom

Zoom types and use

The zoom ratio changes when the picture size is changed.

Optical Zoom

Recording mode:

You can zoom in without degrading the picture quality.

Maximum magnification: 24x

●This function is not available in the following case:

• When recording with [Macro Zoom]

Extended optical zoom

Recording mode:

This function works when picture sizes with [ ] have been selected in [Picture Size]

(→122). Extended optical zoom allows you to zoom in using a higher zoom ratio than

Optical Zoom, without degrading the picture quality.

Maximum magnification: 46.9x

(This maximum zoom ratio varies depending on the picture size.)

●This function is not available in the following cases:

• [Toy Effect], [Toy Pop] (Creative Control Mode)

• [Handheld Night Shot] (Scene Guide Mode)

• When recording 4K photos

• When [Burst Rate] is set to [SH]

• When [HDR] is set to [ON]

• When [Multi Exp.] is set

• When [iHandheld Night Shot] is set to [ON]

• When [iHDR] is set to [ON]

• When [Quality] is set to [ ], [ ] or [ ]

• When recording with [Macro Zoom]

• During motion picture recording

202 SQW0419

Stabilizer, Zoom and Flash

Using Zoom

To increase the zoom ratio further, the following zoom can be used in combination.

[i.Zoom]

Recording mode:

You can use the camera’s Intelligent Resolution technology to increase the zoom ratio

up to 2x higher than the original zoom ratio with limited deterioration of picture quality.

→ [Rec] / [Motion Picture] → [i.Zoom] → [ON] / [OFF]

●This function is not available in the following cases:

• [Impressive Art], [Toy Effect], [Toy Pop] (Creative Control Mode)

• [Handheld Night Shot] (Scene Guide Mode)

• During [Macro Zoom] recording

• When [Burst Rate] is set to [SH]

• When [HDR] is set to [ON]

• When [Multi Exp.] is set

• When [iHandheld Night Shot] is set to [ON]

• When [iHDR] is set to [ON]

• When [Quality] is set to [ ], [ ] or [ ]

203 SQW0419

Stabilizer, Zoom and Flash

Using Zoom

[Digital Zoom]

Recording mode:

Zoom 4x further than Optical/Extended optical zoom. Note that, with Digital Zoom,

enlarging will decrease picture quality.

→ [Rec] / [Motion Picture] → [Digital Zoom] → [ON] / [OFF]

●When [Digital Zoom] is used simultaneously with [i.Zoom], you can only increase the zoom ratio

up to 2x.

●When using [Digital Zoom], we recommend using a tripod and the self-timer (→180) for taking

pictures.

●The AF area is largely displayed at the center in the Digital Zoom range.

●This function is not available in the following cases:

• [Impressive Art], [Toy Effect], [Toy Pop], [Miniature Effect] (Creative Control Mode)

• [Handheld Night Shot] (Scene Guide Mode)

• When recording with [High Speed Video]

• When [Burst Rate] is set to [SH]

• When [HDR] is set to [ON]

• When [Multi Exp.] is set

• When [Quality] is set to [ ], [ ] or [ ]

The illustration is an example of when using Optical Zoom, [i.Zoom], and [Digital Zoom] in Program AE

Mode.

Focus range

i.Zoom range

Optical Zoom range

Digital Zoom range

Current zoom position (Focal lengths the same as those of a 35 mm film camera)

204 SQW0419

Stabilizer, Zoom and Flash

Using Zoom

Changing the zoom operation settings

→ [Custom] → [Zoom lever] / [Side Lever]

(Zoom) The zoom operates in the normal way.

(Step Zoom)

Each time zoom is operated, the zoom stops at the position for

one of the preset focal lengths.

• This setting does not work when

recording motion pictures or 4K

photos with [ ] ([4K Pre-Burst]).

Focus range

Current zoom position

Retaining / not retaining the zoom position when the camera is

turned off

→ [Custom] → [Zoom Resume] → [ON] / [OFF]

205 SQW0419

Stabilizer, Zoom and Flash

Using Zoom

Using the zoom by performing touch operations (Touch zoom)

1Touch [ ]

2Touch [ ]

• The slide bar is displayed.

3Perform zoom operations by dragging the slide

bar

• The zoom speed varies depending on the touched position.

[ ] / [ ] Slow zooming

[ ] / [ ] Fast zooming

• Touch [ ] again to end touch zoom operations.

●When the zoom operation of the [Zoom lever] is set to Step Zoom (→204), a slide bar for step

zoom appears.

●Cannot be used during [High Speed Video] recording.

206 SQW0419

Stabilizer, Zoom and Flash

Taking pictures with flash

Recording mode:

With the flash you can take pictures in dark places or adjust the entire contrast of a

picture by illuminating a subject with a bright background.

■Open/Close the built-in flash

To open the flash

Slide the flash open lever.

To close the flash

Press the flash until it clicks.

• Forcibly closing the flash can damage the camera.

• Be sure to close the built-in flash when not in use.

• The flash setting is fixed to [ ] while the flash is

closed.

●Be careful when opening the flash as the flash will jump out.

●Be careful not to catch a finger or any other part of your body or any object when you close

the flash.

●The flash is fixed to [ ] (Forced Flash Off) in the following cases:

• During motion picture recording

• When recording 4K photos

• When using the electronic shutter

• When [HDR] is set to [ON]

• When [Silent Mode] is set to [ON]

• When a picture effect in [Filter Select] of [Filter Settings] is set

• When [Conversion] is set to [ ] or [ ]

About [ ] (Forced Flash Off)

When pictures cannot be taken using the flash because the flash is closed or during

motion picture recording, etc., [ ] (Forced Flash Off) is displayed on the recording

screen and the flash will not fire.

●Close the flash in places where its use is prohibited so that it will not fire.

207 SQW0419

Stabilizer, Zoom and Flash

Taking pictures with flash

How to use the flash effectively

●Taking a picture using the flash with the subject too close may cause overexposure.

When you set [Highlight] in the [Custom] menu to [ON], the overexposed areas will

flash black and white during [Auto Review] or playback. If that happens, we recommend

taking the picture again, for example, after setting a lower flash output using [Flash

Adjust.] (→212).

●When taking pictures with flash with the lens hood attached, the lower portion of the

photo may turn dark and the control of the flash may be disabled because the photo

flash may be obscured by the lens hood. We recommend detaching the lens hood.

■The available flash range

Edges of picture may become slightly dark if using flash at short distances without

using zoom (close to max. Wide). This may be remedied by using a little zoom.

Max. Wide Max. Tele

Approx. 0.3 m - 8.8 m (0.98 feet - 29 feet) Approx. 1.0 m - 8.8 m (3.3 feet - 29 feet)

• These ranges are obtained, the ISO sensitivity is set to [AUTO], and [ISO Limit Set] is

set to [OFF].

●Do not bring the flash too close to objects or close the flash while it is activated. (The objects may

be discolored by its heat or lighting.)

●Do not close the flash immediately after the preliminary flash is operated prior to taking pictures for

Forced ON/Red-Eye Reduction and other flash settings. If you close the flash immediately, it will

cause a malfunction.

●Flash charging may take time if battery is low or if using flash repeatedly. When the flash is being

charged, the flash icon flashes red, and you cannot take a picture even when you fully press the

shutter button.

●When an External Flash is attached, it will have priority over the built-in flash. For information

about external flash, refer to (→321).

208 SQW0419

Stabilizer, Zoom and Flash

Changing the firing mode (Manual flash)

Recording mode:

You can select whether the flash output is set automatically or manually.

1Set the menu

→ [Rec] → [Flash] → [Firing Mode]

2Use to select the item and press [MENU/SET]

[TTL] The camera automatically sets the flash output.

[MANUAL]

You can set the flash ratio manually. Even in the case of dark scenes where

the flash output tends to be higher in [TTL], this mode allows you to take a

picture as intended. The flash ratio (such as [1/1]) is displayed on the flash

icon.

●This item is available only when the built-in flash is being used.

■Setting the flash ratio (When [MANUAL] is selected)

Set the menu

→ [Rec] → [Flash] → [Manual Flash Adjust.]

Press to select an item and press [MENU/SET]

• You can set the flash ratio from [1/1] (flash firing full power) to [1/128] in 1/3 steps.

Changing Flash Mode

Recording mode:

Set the flash to match the recording.

1Set the menu

→ [Rec] → [Flash] → [Flash Mode]

Setting the Flash Functions

209 SQW0419

Stabilizer, Zoom and Flash

Setting the Flash Functions

2Press to select the item and press [MENU/SET]

: [Forced Flash On]

: [Forced On/Red-Eye]*

Always takes pictures using the flash.

•Ideal for taking pictures with a backlight or when a

subject is located under bright lighting such as a

fluorescent light.

: [Slow Sync.]

: [Slow Sync./Red-Eye]*

Takes brighter pictures such as pictures of subjects

against a nightscape by decreasing the shutter speed

when firing a flash.

•Ideal for taking pictures of people against a

nightscape.

•Using a slower speed can cause motion blur. We

recommend using a tripod.

: Forced Flash Off

Always takes pictures without flash under all recording

conditions.

•Ideal for taking pictures where the use of flash is

prohibited.

• This item is available only when using an external flash.

*This is available only when [Wireless] in the [Flash] is set to [OFF] (→213) and [Firing Mode] is

set to [TTL] (→208).

Two flashes will be emitted. Do not move until after the second flash. Interval between

flashes varies according to brightness of subject.

• The red-eye reduction effect varies depending on the subject and is affected by factors such

as distance from the subject and whether the subject is looking at the camera during the

preliminary flash. In some cases, red-eye reduction may be negligible.

■Reducing red-eye

Recording mode:

Automatically detects red-eye and corrects still picture data when recording with flash

red-eye reduction ([ ], [ ]).

→ [Rec] → [Red-Eye Removal]

Settings: [ON] / [OFF]

●When this function is set to [ON], the flash icon changes to [ ]/[ ].

●Depending on the circumstance, it may not be possible to correct red-eye.

210 SQW0419

Stabilizer, Zoom and Flash

Setting the Flash Functions

■Flash settings for each Recording mode (○: Available, –: Not available)

Recording mode

Intelligent Auto Mode (→77)

Intelligent Auto Plus Mode

Program AE Mode ○○○○○

Aperture-Priority AE Mode ○○○○○

Shutter-Priority AE Mode ○ ○ – – ○

Manual Exposure Mode ○ ○ – – ○

Creative Video Mode ––––○

Panorama Shot Mode ––––○

Creative Control Mode ––––○

Scene Guide

Mode

(●: Default

settings)

[Clear Portrait] ○ ● – – ○

[Silky Skin] ○ ● – – ○

[Backlit Softness] – – – – ●

[Clear in Backlight] ●–––○

[Relaxing Tone] ––––●

[Sweet Child’s Face] ○ ● – – ○

[Distinct Scenery] – – – – ●

[Bright Blue Sky] – – – – ●

[Romantic Sunset Glow] – – – – ●

[Vivid Sunset Glow] – – – – ●

[Glistening Water] – – – – ●

[Clear Nightscape] – – – – ●

[Cool Night Sky] – – – – ●

[Warm Glowing Nightscape] – – – – ●

[Artistic Nightscape] – – – – ●

[Glittering Illuminations] – – – – ●

[Handheld Night Shot] – – – – ●

[Clear Night Portrait] – – – ● ○

[Soft Image of a Flower] ●–––○

[Appetizing Food] ●–––○

[Cute Dessert] ●–––○

[Freeze Animal Motion]●–––○

[Clear Sports Shot] ●–––○

[Monochrome] ●○○○○

●The Scene Guide Mode flash setting is returned to the initial value with each change of scene.

211 SQW0419

Stabilizer, Zoom and Flash

Setting the Flash Functions

■Shutter speeds for each flash mode

Flash Mode Shutter speed (seconds)

1/60*1 - 1/4000

Flash Mode Shutter speed (seconds)

1 - 1/16000

60*2 - 1/16000

*1 The shutter speed is set to 60 seconds in Shutter-Priority AE Mode and to B (Bulb) in Manual

Exposure Mode.

*2 The shutter speed is set to B (Bulb) in Manual Exposure Mode.

• In Intelligent Auto Mode ([ ] or [ ]), the shutter speed changes depending on the

detected scene.

Setting the 2nd curtain sync

Recording mode:

2nd curtain sync is a recording method in which the flash fires just before the shutter

closes when you take a picture of a moving subject (such as a car) using the flash with a

slow shutter speed.

1Set the menu

→ [Rec] → [Flash] → [Flash Synchro]

2Press to select the setting item and press [MENU/SET]

[1ST] 1st curtain sync is the normal recording method

when using the flash.

[2ND] The light source is captured in back of the subject

and this produces a picture that is vibrant and

lively.

●If you set to [2ND], [2nd] will be displayed in the flash icon on the screen.

●[2ND] is available only when [Wireless] in the [Flash] is set to [OFF]. (→213)

●The [Flash Synchro] setting functions even when an external flash other than the wireless flash is

used. (→321)

●When a fast shutter speed is set, the [Flash Synchro] effect may not be sufficiently achieved.

●When [2ND] is set, you cannot set the flash setting to [ ] or [ ].

212 SQW0419

Stabilizer, Zoom and Flash

Setting the Flash Functions

Adjusting the flash output

Recording mode:

Adjust the flash output if a picture taken using the flash is too bright or too dark.

1Set the menu

→ [Rec] → [Flash] → [Flash Adjust.]

2Press to set the flash output and press [MENU/SET]

Settings: -3 EV to +3 EV (unit: 1/3 EV)

When you do not want to adjust the intensity of the flash, select [±0 EV].

●When the intensity of the flash is adjusted, [+] or [-] is displayed on the flash icon.

●[Flash Adjust.] is available only when [Wireless] in the [Flash] is set to [OFF] (→213) and [Firing

Mode] is set to [TTL] (→208).

●The [Flash Adjust.] setting functions even when an external flash other than the wireless flash is

used. (→321)

Synchronizing the flash output with the camera during

Exposure Compensation

Recording mode:

The flash output is automatically adjusted in accordance with the exposure compensation

value.

→ [Rec] → [Flash] → [Auto Exposure Comp.]

Settings: [ON] / [OFF]

●About Exposure Compensation (→154)

●The [Auto Exposure Comp.] setting functions even when an external flash is used. (→321)

213 SQW0419

Stabilizer, Zoom and Flash

Recording mode:

When you use the flashes (DMW-FL360L, DMW-FL580L: optional) with the wireless flash

recording function, you can separately control the firing of the flashes in three groups and

of the built-in flash (or the flash attached to the hot shoe of the camera).

■Positioning the wireless flash

Position the wireless flash with its wireless sensor facing the camera. The following

illustration is an example of the range within which the flash can be positioned. The

flash controllable range varies depending on the surrounding environment.

Flash controllable range Example of positioning flashes

2 m

(6.6 feet)

2 m

(6.6 feet)

3 m (9.8 feet)

3 m

(9.8 feet)

• This flash positioning example shows a case where flash unit C is positioned in order to

eliminate the shadows from the subject’s background, which is produced by flash unit A

and flash unit B of the flash group.

• For the number of wireless flashes to be controlled, we recommend setting up to three

flash units in each group.

• When a subject is too close, the communication light emission may affect the exposure

of the picture. This problem can be mitigated if you decrease the flash output by setting

[Communication Light] to [LOW] or using a flash diffuser or similar device.

1Set the wireless flash to RC mode and position the flash

• Select the channel and group of the wireless flash.

2Either open the flash by sliding the flash open lever, or attach a flash (DMW-

FL360L, DMW-FL580L: optional) to this unit

3Set the menu

→ [Rec] → [Flash] → [Wireless]

4Press to select [ON] and press [MENU/SET]

• When [Wireless] is set to [ON], [WL] will appear with the flash icon on the recording screen.

Taking Pictures with Wireless Flashes

214 SQW0419

Stabilizer, Zoom and Flash

Taking Pictures with Wireless Flashes

5Press to select [Wireless Channel] and press

[MENU/SET]

Firing Mode Flash output

Flash ratio

6Press to select the channel and press [MENU/SET]

• Select the same channel as the channel set for the wireless flash

in step 1.

7Press to select [Wireless Setup] and press

[MENU/SET]

8Use to select the item and press [MENU/SET]

[Built-in

Flash] /

[External

Flash]*1

[Firing

Mode]

[TTL]: The flash output is automatically adjusted.

[AUTO]*2: Sets the flash output using an external flash.

[MANUAL]*2: Manually sets the flash ratio of an external flash.

[OFF]: The flash of this unit fires only for a communication light

emission.

[Flash

Adjust.]

Adjusts the flash output of the flash of this unit manually when [Firing

Mode] is set to [TTL].

[Manual

Flash

Adjust.]

Sets the flash ratio of an external flash when [Firing Mode] is set to

[MANUAL].

• You can set the flash ratio from [1/1] (flash firing full power) to [1/128]

in 1/3 steps.

[A Group]/

[B Group]/

[C Group]

[Firing

Mode]

[TTL]: The flash output is automatically adjusted.

[AUTO]: The wireless flash automatically sets the flash output.

[MANUAL]: Manually sets the flash ratio of the wireless flash.

[OFF]: The wireless flashes of the set group do not fire.

[Flash

Adjust.]

Adjusts the flash output of the wireless flash manually when [Firing

Mode] is set to [TTL].

[Manual

Flash

Adjust.]

Sets the flash ratio of the wireless flash when [Firing Mode] is set to

[MANUAL].

• You can set the flash ratio from [1/1] (flash firing full power) to [1/128]

in 1/3 steps.

*1 If an external flash is attached to this unit, [External Flash] is displayed instead of [Built-in Flash].

*2 You can select these options only when the external flash is attached to the camera.

■Setting the communication light emission to be used when wireless flash

recording is performed

→ [Rec] → [Flash] → [Communication Light]

Settings: [HIGH] / [STANDARD] / [LOW]

215 SQW0419

Recording motion pictures

Recording mode:

You can record full high-definition quality images that comply with the AVCHD standard,

as well as motion pictures recorded in MP4. You can also record a 4K motion picture in

MP4. (→217)

Audio is recorded in stereo.

1Press the motion picture button to start

recording

• Recording of motion picture appropriate for each

motion picture mode is possible.

• Immediately release the motion picture button after

pressing it.

• While you are recording motion pictures, the recording

status indicator (red) will flash.

•With recording in a quiet environment, the

sound of aperture, focus and other actions may

be recorded in motion pictures. This is not a

malfunction.

The focus operation during recording of motion

pictures can be set to [OFF] in [Continuous AF].

(→219)

• If some information is no longer displayed on the

screen, press the [DISP.] button or touch the monitor.

• Still pictures can be taken during motion picture

recording. (→220)

Recording state

indicator

Elapsed recording time

Remaining recording time

2Press the motion picture button again to end recording

Enabling/disabling the motion picture button

→ [Custom] → [Video Button] → [ON] / [OFF]

Switching the angle of view setting used for recording still pictures

and motion pictures

→ [Custom] → [Rec Area] → [ ] (Picture) / [ ] (Motion picture)

●If the aspect ratio is different for still pictures and motion pictures, the angle of view will

change when starting to record a motion picture.

When you set [Rec Area] to [ ], the angle of view setting used for recording motion

pictures is displayed.

●[Rec Area] is not available for 4K photo recording.

216 SQW0419

Recording motion pictures

About operation sound when recording ends

If the operation sound of the motion picture button pressed to end recording bothers you,

try the following:

●Record the motion picture about three seconds longer, and then divide the last part of

the motion picture using [Video Divide] (→247) in the [Playback] menu.

●Set the camera to Creative Video Mode, and use a shutter remote control (DMW-RSL1:

optional) to record motion pictures. (→323)

●If the surrounding temperature is high, or a motion picture is recorded continuously, [ ] is

displayed and recording may be stopped halfway through to protect the camera. Wait until the

camera cools down.

●If Extended optical zoom is used before pressing the motion picture button, these settings will be

cleared, and the recordable area will be changed significantly.

●Note that if you perform operations such as zoom, using buttons or dials, while recording a motion

picture, operation noise may be recorded.

●The zoom speed will be slower than normal during motion picture recording.

●Depending on the type of the card, the card access indication may appear for a while after

recording motion pictures. This is not a malfunction.

●ISO sensitivity is set to [AUTO] (for motion pictures) while a motion picture is being recorded.

●It is recommended to use a fully charged battery or an AC adaptor (optional) and DC coupler

(optional) when recording motion pictures. (→322)

●If while recording motion pictures using the AC adaptor and the power supply is cut off due to a

power outage or if the AC adaptor is disconnected etc., the motion picture being recorded will not

be recorded.

●The below-mentioned motion picture recording modes are set in the following cases:

Selected Scene Guide Mode Recording mode at the time of

recording motion pictures

[Clear in Backlight] Portrait Mode

[Clear Nightscape], [Artistic Nightscape],

[Handheld Night Shot], [Clear Night Portrait] Low Light Mode

●This function is not available in the following cases:

• [Glistening Water], [Glittering Illuminations], [Soft Image of a Flower] (Scene Guide Mode)

• [Rough Monochrome], [Silky Monochrome], [Miniature Effect]*, [Soft Focus], [Star Filter],

[Sunshine] (Creative Control Mode)

* Only when recording motion pictures with [Rec Quality] of [4K]

• When using [Time Lapse Shot]

• When using [Stop Motion Animation]

217 SQW0419

Recording motion pictures

Recording 4K motion pictures

Recording mode:

You can record high-resolution 4K motion pictures by setting [Rec Quality] to [4K].

• To record 4K motion pictures, use a UHS Speed Class 3 card. (→29)

• When you record 4K motion pictures, the angle of view will be narrower than motion

pictures of other sizes.

■To record motion pictures in 4K

Select the recording mode (→40)

Set the [Rec Format] in the [Motion Picture] menu to [MP4] (→218)

Set [Rec Quality] in the [Motion Picture] menu to [4K/100M/30p] or [4K/100M/24p]

(→218)

Start recording by pressing the motion picture button

Stop the recording by pressing the motion picture button again

●Recording is performed by reducing the Auto Focus speed in order to adjust the focus at high

precision. Sometimes focus adjustment with Auto Focus mode is difficult, but this is not a

malfunction.

218 SQW0419

Recording motion pictures

Setting the format, picture size and recording frame rate

Recording mode:

1Set the menu

→ [Motion Picture] → [Rec Format]

2Use to select the item and press [MENU/SET]

[AVCHD] This is a data format suitable for playback on high-definition TVs.

[MP4] This data format is suited for playing back motion pictures on a computer and other

such devices.

3Use to select [Rec Quality] and press [MENU/SET]

4Use to select the item and press [MENU/SET]

When [AVCHD] is selected

Item Picture size

Recording frame rate

Sensor output Bit rate

[FHD/28M/60p]*1920×1080 60p 60 fps Approx. 28 Mbps

[FHD/17M/60i] 1920×1080 60i 60 fps Approx. 17 Mbps

[FHD/24M/30p] 1920×1080 60i 30 fps Approx. 24 Mbps

[FHD/24M/24p] 1920×1080 24p 24 fps Approx. 24 Mbps

* AVCHD Progressive

When [MP4] is selected

Item Picture size

Recording frame rate

Sensor output Bit rate

[4K/100M/30p] 3840×2160 30p 30 fps Approx. 100 Mbps

[4K/100M/24p] 3840×2160 24p 24 fps Approx. 100 Mbps

[FHD/28M/60p] 1920×1080 60p 60 fps Approx. 28 Mbps

[FHD/20M/30p] 1920×1080 30p 30 fps Approx. 20 Mbps

[HD/10M/30p] 1280×720 30p 30 fps Approx. 10 Mbps

[VGA/4M/30p] 640×480 30p 30 fps Approx. 4 Mbps

219 SQW0419

Recording motion pictures

• The quality becomes higher when the number of bit rate gets bigger. This unit uses the

“VBR” recording method, and the bit rate is changed automatically depending on the

subject to record. Therefore, the recording time is shortened when a subject with fast

movement is recorded.

■About the compatibility of the recorded motion pictures

Motion pictures recorded in [AVCHD] or [MP4] may be played back with poor picture or

sound quality or playback may not be possible even when played back with equipment

compatible with these formats. Also, the recording information may not be displayed

properly.

• When you import and play back motion pictures recorded with [FHD/28M/60p],

[FHD/24M/30p], or [FHD/24M/24p] in [AVCHD] using a device other than this unit,

a compatible Blu-ray disc recorder or PC installed with “PHOTOfunSTUDIO” is

required.

• For details on motion pictures recorded with [4K/100M/30p] or [4K/100M/24p] in the

[MP4] format, refer to “Enjoying 4K motion pictures” (→301).

Adjusting the focus while recording motion pictures

([Continuous AF])

Recording mode:

Focusing varies depending on the focus mode (→129) and the setting of [Continuous AF]

in the [Motion Picture] menu.

Focus mode [Continuous AF] Setting

[AFS]/[AFF]/

[AFC]

[ON]

Allow the focus to be constantly adjusted

automatically while recording motion pictures.

(→129)

[OFF] Fix focus position at the start of motion picture

recording.

[MF] [ON] / [OFF] Allow the focus to be adjusted manually. (→147)

• When the focus mode is set to [AFS], [AFF], or [AFC], the camera will refocus if the

shutter button is pressed halfway while recording motion pictures.

• When Auto Focus is activated while you are recording motion pictures, the focusing

operation sound may be recorded under some conditions. If you want to suppress this

sound, we recommend taking pictures after setting [Continuous AF] to [OFF] in the

[Motion Picture] menu.

• When using zoom while recording motion pictures, it may take some time to focus.

• [Continuous AF] does not work while [Pull Focus] in [Snap Movie] is in operation.

220 SQW0419

Recording motion pictures

Taking still pictures while a motion picture is being

recorded

Recording mode:

1Press the shutter button fully during the

motion picture recording

• When you take a still picture, the simultaneous

still/motion picture recording icon is displayed.

• Recording with the Touch Shutter function (→54) is

also available.

Setting the motion picture priority or still picture priority mode

Recording mode:

You can use [Picture Mode] in the [Motion Picture] menu to set the recording method of a

still picture to be taken while you record a motion picture.

(Video Priority)

(Up to a maximum

of 30 still pictures)

• Takes a still picture using [Picture Size] [S] (2M). The picture quality may be

different to [S] (2M) of standard pictures.

• Only pictures in JPEG file format are recorded when [Quality] is set to [ ],

[ ], or [ ]. ([Quality] is used with the [ ] setting when [ ] is set.)

• When the Creative Control Mode is set to [Miniature Effect], a still picture

may be taken with a slight delay from the time you fully press the shutter

button.

(Photo Priority)

(Up to a maximum

of 4 still pictures)

• A still picture is taken with [Picture Size] and [Quality] that you have set.

• While a still picture is being taken, the screen turns black. During this period,

the still picture is taken in the motion picture and the audio is muted.

●The aspect ratio of a still picture is fixed to [16:9].

●This function is not available in the following cases:

• When [Rec Format] is set to [MP4], [Rec Quality] is set to [4K/100M/30p], [4K/100M/24p], or

[VGA/4M/30p]

• When [Rec Format] is set to [AVCHD], [Rec Quality] is set to [FHD/24M/24p] (Only when [ ]

(Photo Priority) is set.)

• When the drive mode is set to [4K PHOTO] (Only when [ ] (Photo Priority) is set.)

• When [Snap Movie] is set to [ON]

221 SQW0419

Recording motion pictures

Recording Snap Movies

Recording mode:

You can specify the recording time in advance and record motion pictures casually like

you take snapshots. The function also allows you to shift a focus at the start of recording

and add fade in/out effects in advance.

• Motion pictures will be recorded with [FHD/20M/30p] in [MP4].

• Using the smartphone/tablet app “Panasonic Image App”, you can combine motion

pictures recorded with the camera. Music can be added and various editing operations

can be performed when you combine them. In addition, you can send the combined

motion picture to a web service. (→271)

1Set the menu

→ [Motion Picture] → [Snap Movie]

2Use to select [SET] and press [MENU/SET]

3Use to select the item and press [MENU/SET]

[Record time] Sets the recording time of motion pictures.

[8SEC] / [6SEC] / [4SEC] / [2SEC]

[Pull Focus] Allows dramatic imaging expression by shifting focus gradually at the start

of recording.

[ON] / [OFF]

• For details (→222).

[Fade] Adds a fade-in (gradual appearance) effect to an image and audio as

recording starts or adds a fade-out (gradual disappearance) effect to them

as recording ends.

[WHITE-IN] / [WHITE-OUT]:

Adds a fade-in or fade-out effect that uses a white screen.

[BLACK-IN] / [BLACK-OUT]:

Adds a fade-in or fade-out effect that uses a black screen.

[COLOR-IN] / [COLOR-OUT]:

Adds an effect that fades in from black-and-white to color or an effect that

fades out from color to black-and-white. Audio will be recorded normally.

[OFF]

4Press [Q.MENU ] button

5Press [MENU/SET]

6Press to select [ON] and press [MENU/SET]

• If [Pull Focus] is set to [ON], set its focus. (→222)

222 SQW0419

Recording motion pictures

Recording Snap Movies

7Press the motion picture button to start

recording

• Immediately release the motion picture button after

pressing it.

• You cannot stop motion picture recording in the

middle. The recording will stop automatically when the

set recording time has elapsed.

Elapsed recording time

Set recording time

■Deactivating Snap Movie

Select [OFF] in step 2.

●Motion pictures recorded with [WHITE-IN] or [BLACK-IN] are displayed as all-white or all-black

thumbnails in Playback Mode.

●If you assign [Snap Movie] to [Fn Button Set] (→61), you can display a screen that lets you switch

[Snap Movie] between [ON]/[OFF] by pressing the assigned function button. If you press [DISP.]

button while the screen is displayed, you can change the settings for Snap Movie.

●[Snap Movie] will be set to [OFF] when you connect to Wi-Fi with [Remote Shooting & View].

●This function is not available in the following cases:

• [Miniature Effect] (Creative Control Mode)

• When the drive mode is set to [4K PHOTO]

• During [High Speed Video] recording

Setting up [Pull Focus]

Set the frames that determine a focus start (first) position

and focus end (second) position. The camera then measures

its distance to the subjects and sets focus. When you start

motion picture recording, focus shifts from the first frame to

the second frame.

■Button operation

Press

Press to move the frame, and press [MENU/SET] (First position)

• If you press [DISP.] button before pressing [MENU/SET], the frame will return to the center.

Repeat step (Second position)

• Auto Focus will work to set the start and end focus of [Pull Focus]. When the setup has failed,

the frame returns to the first position. Perform the setup again.

• To cancel the frame settings, press [MENU/SET].

223 SQW0419

Recording motion pictures

Recording Snap Movies

■Touch operation

Touch a subject (first position), drag your finger to the desired location (second

position), and release the finger.

• Auto Focus will work to set the start and end focus of [Pull Focus]. When the setup has failed, the

frame returns to the first position. Perform the setup again.

• To cancel the frame settings, touch [ ].

●A greater effect can be achieved by creating a striking contrast of focus

between the start and end positions, for example by shifting focus from the

background to foreground, or vice versa.

●After setting focus, try to keep the distance between the subject and the

camera constant.

●When [Pull Focus] is set to [ON]

• Auto Focus Mode will be switched to [ ], a setting specially designed for [Pull Focus].

• If you take a picture, the Auto Focus operation [ ] will take place at the first frame position.

●To re-adjust the focus while recording a motion picture, press the shutter button halfway after the

[Pull Focus] operation finishes.

●Even when [Metering Mode] (→158) is set to [ ], the spot metering target does not move with

focus. The target is fixed at the start position (first position) of [Pull Focus].

●This function is not available in the following cases:

• In Manual Focus

• When using the Digital Zoom

224 SQW0419

Recording motion pictures

Using the [Motion Picture] menu

For the setting procedures for the [Motion Picture] menu, refer to (→56)

• The [Motion Picture] menu is not displayed in the recording mode in which motion

pictures cannot be recorded.

[Snap Movie]

• For details (→221).

[Rec Format]

• For details (→218).

[Rec Quality]

• For details (→218).

[Exposure Mode]

• For details (→108).

[High Speed Video]

• For details (→109).

[Picture Mode]

• For details (→220).

225 SQW0419

Recording motion pictures

Using the [Motion Picture] menu

For the setting procedures for the [Motion Picture] menu, refer to (→56)

[Continuous AF]

• For details (→219).

[Level Shot]

Recording mode:

Level Shot function automatically detects the camera’s tilt while recording motion pictures,

and horizontally corrects the recording motion picture so it will not be tilted.

Settings: [ON] / [OFF]

●If you record while walking, or if the camera’s tilt is large, it may not be possible to horizontally

correct the motion pictures.

●When [Level Shot] is set to [ON]

• The [E-Stabilization (Video)] is automatically set to [ON], and the 5-axis Hybrid Image Stabilizer

function (→199) starts operating.

• The angle of view becomes slightly narrow when motion picture recording starts.

●Still pictures taken while recording motion pictures will not be horizontally corrected.

●This function is not available in the following cases:

• When recording with [High Speed Video]

• When [Operation Mode] of [Stabilizer] is set to [OFF]

• When [Rec Format] is set to [MP4], and [Rec Quality] is set to [4K/100M/30p], [4K/100M/24p], or

[VGA/4M/30p]

[Conversion]

• For details (→319).

[Flkr Decrease]

Recording mode:

The shutter speed can be fixed to reduce the flicker or striping in the motion picture.

Settings: [1/50] / [1/60] / [1/100] / [1/120] / [OFF]

[Silent Operation]

• For details (→110).

226 SQW0419

Recording motion pictures

Using the [Motion Picture] menu

For the setting procedures for the [Motion Picture] menu, refer to (→56)

[Mic Level Disp.]

Recording mode:

You can set whether or not to display the microphone level on the recording screen.

Settings: [ON] / [OFF]

●When [Mic Level Limiter] is set to [OFF], [Mic Level Disp.] is fixed to [ON].

[Mic Level Adj.]

Recording mode:

You can adjust the audio input level in 19 steps (- 12 dB to + 6 dB).

[Special Mic.]

• For details (→323).

[Mic Level Limiter]

Recording mode:

The camera adjusts the sound input level automatically, minimizing the sound distortion

(crackling noise) when the volume is too high.

Settings: [ON] / [OFF]

227 SQW0419

Recording motion pictures

Using the [Motion Picture] menu

For the setting procedures for the [Motion Picture] menu, refer to (→56)

[Wind Noise Canceller]

Recording mode:

This will reduce the wind noise coming into the built-in microphone while maintaining

sound quality.

Settings: [HIGH] / [STANDARD] / [OFF]

• [HIGH] effectively reduces the wind noise by minimizing the low-pitched sound when a

strong wind is detected.

• [STANDARD] extracts and reduces only the wind noise without deteriorating the sound

quality.

●You may not see the full effect depending on the recording conditions.

[Wind Cut]

• [Wind Cut] is displayed only when an external microphone (optional) is in use. In other

cases, [Wind Noise Canceller] is displayed.

• For details (→324).

[Zoom Mic]

Recording mode:

Coupled to the zoom operation, it will more clearly record far sounds during enlarging

image, and surrounding sounds with wide-angle.

Settings: [ON] / [OFF]

●When set to [ON] and performing zoom, the operation sound may be recorded enhanced in

accordance with the surrounding sounds. Also, audio recording level will be lower compared to

when [OFF].

●The stereo effect of the audio is reduced during enlarging image.

228 SQW0419

Playing Back and Editing Pictures

Viewing your pictures

1Press the Playback button

2Press to select a picture to be

displayed

• When you press and hold , the pictures are

displayed one after another.

• Pictures can also be forwarded or rewound by rotating

the rear dial or dragging the screen horizontally (→52).

• If you keep your finger touching the left or right edge of

the screen after scrolling the pictures, the pictures will

continue to be scrolled. (The pictures are displayed in

a reduced size.)

• The playback speed of pictures varies depending on

the playback conditions.

Switching the speed for forwarding or rewinding pictures

continuously

→ [Custom] → [Touch Scroll] → [H] (High speed) / [L] (Low speed)

Sending pictures to the WEB services

If you press while a single picture is being displayed, you can send the picture to the

WEB service quickly. (→285)

■Ending Playback

Press the Playback button again or press the Motion picture button.

The Playback can also be ended by pressing the shutter button halfway.

●The playback screen appears if the camera is turned on while pressing the Playback button.

●When the camera is switched to the playback screen from the recording screen, the lens barrel is

retracted after approx. 15 seconds.

●This camera is compliant with the unified DCF (Design rule for Camera File system) standard

formulated by the Japan Electronics and Information Technology Industries Association (JEITA),

and with Exif (Exchangeable image file format).

Files that are not DCF-compliant cannot be played back.

●It may not be possible to properly play back pictures taken using other cameras on this unit or it

may not be possible to use the functions of this unit for those pictures.

229 SQW0419

Playing Back and Editing Pictures

Viewing motion pictures

This unit was designed to play motion pictures using the AVCHD and MP4 formats.

• Motion pictures are displayed with the motion picture icon ([ ]).

• 4K burst files recorded with the 4K Photo function are displayed with [ ].

For details on playing back a 4K Burst file, refer to (→169).

1Press to start playback

• Touching [ ] in the middle of the screen allows you

to play back motion pictures.

• Motion pictures recorded with [Snap Movie] are played

back automatically.

• Some information will not be displayed for motion

pictures recorded in [AVCHD]. Motion picture recording time

■Operations during motion picture playback

Button operation Touch operation Description

Play/pause

Fast rewind*1

Single-frame rewind*2 (while paused)

Volume down

Stop

Fast forward*1

Single-frame forward (while paused)

Volume up

*1 The fast forward or rewind speed increases if you press again.

*2 Motion pictures recorded in [AVCHD] are rewound frame by frame approximately every

0.5 seconds.

• Control panel disappears when no operation is performed for some time. Touch the

screen to redisplay the control panel.

•

If you press [MENU/SET] during a pause, you can create a picture from a motion picture.

(→230)

■Operations during automatic Snap Movie playback

Playback from the beginning

Returning to the previous picture

Scrolling to the next picture

• If you touch the screen, automatic playback will stop.

●Motion pictures can be viewed on your computer using “PHOTOfunSTUDIO” on the supplied DVD.

230 SQW0419

Playing Back and Editing Pictures

Viewing motion pictures

Capturing still pictures from motion pictures

Save a scene from a motion picture as a still picture.

1Display the picture that you want to capture as a still

picture by pressing to pause a motion picture being

played back on the camera

• If you press while paused, you can make finer adjustments

to the positions in a motion picture.

2Press [MENU/SET]

• The same operation can be performed by touching [ ].

• The still picture is saved with aspect ratio of [16:9] and [Quality]

of [ ]. The picture size varies depending on the motion picture

being played back.

– For motion pictures recorded in [Rec Quality] with [4K]:

[M] (8M)

– For motion pictures recorded in [Rec Quality] with [FHD], [HD]:

[S] (2M)

●The picture quality becomes slightly lower depending on the [Rec Quality] setting of the original

motion picture.

●When a still picture captured from a motion picture is played back, [ ] is displayed.

●If you want to capture a still picture from a motion picture while the camera is connected to a TV

with the HDMI micro cable, set [VIERA Link] of [TV Connection] in the [Setup] menu to [OFF].

●You cannot capture a still picture from the following motion pictures.

• Motion pictures recorded in [MP4] using the [VGA/4M/30p] setting

231 SQW0419

Playing Back and Editing Pictures

Switching the Playback Method

Zooming in and viewing “Playback Zoom”

1Move the zoom lever toward T side

• Each time you move the zoom lever toward the T side, the

magnification increases through four levels: 2x, 4x, 8x, and 16x.

(The picture quality displayed becomes successively lower.)

• To reduce zoom → Move the zoom lever toward W side.

• You can also enlarge/reduce the image by pinching out/pinching

in (→52) on the part you want to enlarge/reduce.

• When you change the magnification, the zoom position indication

appears for about 1 second.

• You can move the enlarged part by pressing of the

cursor button or dragging the screen. (→52)

• You can also zoom in by quickly touching the touch screen twice.

(If the display was enlarged, it returns to the same magnification

ratio.)

• You can forward or rewind a picture while maintaining the same

zoom magnification and zoom position by rotating the rear dial

during Playback Zoom.

Current zoom position

Viewing a list of pictures “Multi Playback”

1Move the zoom lever toward W side

• Move the zoom lever toward the W side and you can switch the

display methods in the following order: 1-picture screen (full-

screen) → 12-picture screen → 30-picture screen → Calendar

screen. (Move the lever to the T side to return.)

• It is possible to switch the playback screen by touching the

following icons.

– [ ]: 1-picture screen – [ ]: 12-picture screen

– [ ]: 30-picture screen – [ ]: Calendar screen

• The screen can be switched gradually by dragging the screen up

or down.

• When you select a picture using the cursor button and press

[MENU/SET] on the 12-picture or 30-picture screen, the selected

picture is displayed on the 1-picture screen (full-screen).

●Pictures displayed with [!] cannot be played back.

232 SQW0419

Playing Back and Editing Pictures

Switching the Playback Method

Viewing pictures by their recording date “Calendar Playback”

Move the zoom lever toward the W side to display the

calendar screen

2Use to select recording date and press

[MENU/SET]

• Pictures are displayed in a 12-picture screen.

• Turn the zoom lever toward the W side to return to the Calendar

screen display.

Selected date

MONSUN TUEWEDTHU FRI S AT

●The recording date of the picture selected in the playback screen becomes the date selected

when the Calendar screen is first displayed.

●You can display the calendar between January 2000 to December 2099.

●Pictures taken without clock settings are displayed with the date January 1st, 2015.

●Pictures taken with destination settings made in [World Time] are displayed in the calendar screen

using the appropriate date for the destination’s time zone.

Viewing group pictures

You can consecutively play back multiple pictures in a group or play back group pictures

one by one.

[ ]: Group pictures recorded consecutively by setting the

burst speed to [SH] (→161)

[ ]: Group pictures recorded using [Time Lapse Shot]

(→182)

[ ]: Group pictures recorded using [Stop Motion

Animation] (→185)

• You can delete or edit pictures in group units. (For example,

if you delete one of pictures in a group, all pictures in that

group will be deleted.)

pic.

●Pictures will not be grouped if they are recorded without setting [Clock Set].

233 SQW0419

Playing Back and Editing Pictures

Switching the Playback Method

Playing back group pictures consecutively

1Press

• The same operation can be performed by touching the group picture icon ([ ], [ ],

[ ]).

• When you play back group pictures one by one, the option settings are displayed.

[From the first picture]: Play back the group pictures consecutively from the first picture in a

group.

[From the current picture]: Play back the group pictures consecutively from the picture currently

played back.

■Operations during continuous playback

Continuous playback / Pause Stop

Fast rewind playback Fast forward playback

Returning to the previous picture

(while paused)

Scrolling to the next picture

(while paused)

Playing back group pictures one by one

1Press

• The same operation can be performed by touching [ ].

2Use to select [Display In Group] and press

[MENU/SET]

3Use to scroll through the pictures

• Pressing again or touching [ ] and selecting [Exit Display In

Group] will return you to the normal playback screen.

• You can use the same operations for pictures stored in a group

as in normal still picture playback. (Multi Playback, Playback

Zoom, deletion of pictures, etc.)

234 SQW0419

Playing Back and Editing Pictures

Deleting pictures

Deleted pictures cannot be recovered.

Pictures will not be deleted in the following cases:

• Protected pictures.

• Card switch is in “LOCK” position.

• Pictures that are not based on the DCF standard. (→228)

●Do not turn off the camera while deleting.

●Use a sufficiently charged battery or an AC adaptor (optional) and DC coupler (optional).

[Delete Single]

1Press [Q.MENU ] button to delete displayed

picture

• The same operation can be performed by touching [ ].

2Use to select [Delete Single] and press [MENU/SET]

●You can set either [Yes] or [No] as the initial setting on the deletion confirmation

screen when you perform [Delete Confirmation] in the [Playback] menu. [No] is

selected at the time of purchase. (→255)

235 SQW0419

Playing Back and Editing Pictures

Deleting pictures

To delete multiple (up to 100)/To delete all pictures

A picture group (→232) is handled as 1 picture. (All the pictures in the selected picture

group are deleted.)

1Press [Q.MENU ] button while viewing a picture

2Use to select [Delete Multi]/[Delete All] and press [MENU/SET]

• You can select [All Delete Except Favorite] in [Delete All] if there are pictures that have been set

as [Favorite] (→252).

3(When [Delete Multi] is selected)

Use to select picture and press [MENU/SET]

(repeat)

• To cancel → Press [MENU/SET] again.

Picture selected

4(When [Delete Multi] is selected) Use to select [OK] and press [MENU/SET]

• May take time depending on number of pictures deleted.

236 SQW0419

Playing Back and Editing Pictures

Using the [Playback] menu

You can specify picture protection, resizing, print settings, and other settings for pictures

you have taken.

• For the setting procedures of the menu. (→56)

●In the following cases, new pictures are created after they have been edited. Before starting to

edit, make sure that there is enough free space in the memory card.

• [RAW Processing]

• [Clear Retouch]

• [Text Stamp]

• [Time Lapse Video]

• [Stop Motion Video]

• [Resize]

• [Cropping]

●It may not be possible to set or edit pictures taken with other cameras.

■How to select an image(s) after selecting [Single] or [Multi]

Some menu items allow you to specify how to select an image(s).

[Single]

Use to select a still picture and press [MENU/SET]

• If [Set/Cancel] is displayed at the right bottom of the screen, the

setting is canceled when [MENU/SET] is pressed again.

SetSet

[Multi]

When a screen similar to the one on the right is

displayed:

Use to select a still picture and press

[MENU/SET] (repeat)

• To cancel → Press [MENU/SET] again.

Use to select [OK] and press [MENU/SET]

When a screen similar to the one on the right is

displayed:

2 3

4 5 6

Set/Cancel

Use to select a still picture and press

[MENU/SET] (repeat)

• To cancel → Press [MENU/SET] again.

237 SQW0419

Playing Back and Editing Pictures

Using the [Playback] menu

[Slide Show]

Automatically play pictures in order. You can also put together a slide show composed

of only still pictures, only motion pictures, or only 4K Photos, etc. Recommended when

viewing on TV screen.

1Set the menu

→ [Playback] → [Slide Show]

2Use to select the item and press [MENU/SET]

• If you select [Video Only], 4K burst files recorded with the 4K

Photo function will also be played back.

• When you select [Category Selection], use to select

category and press [MENU/SET]. For details about category,

refer to (→239).

3Use to select [Start] and press [MENU/SET]

■Operations during Slide Show

Button

operation

Touch

operation Description

Play/Pause

Volume down

Button

operation

Touch

operation Description

Stop

Volume up

■To change settings such as music or display time

Select [Effect] or [Setup] and press [MENU/SET].

[Effect] [AUTO] / [NATURAL] / [SLOW] / [SWING] / [URBAN] / [OFF]

[Setup] [Duration] [5SEC] / [3SEC] / [2SEC] / [1SEC]

[Repeat] [ON] / [OFF]

[Sound] [AUTO]: With still pictures, music will play back, and with motion

pictures, audio will play back.

[Music]: Music effect will play back.

[Audio]: Audio is played back from motion pictures.

[OFF]: Music and audio will not play back.

238 SQW0419

Playing Back and Editing Pictures

Using the [Playback] menu

●When [URBAN] has been selected, the picture may appear in black and white as a screen effect.

●[AUTO] can be used only when [Category Selection] is selected. The pictures are played back with

the recommended effects for each category.

●When you perform a Slide Show playback by setting [Video Only] or [Category Selection] to [ ],

[ ], or [ ], [Effect] is fixed to [OFF].

●When you perform a Slide Show playback for group pictures, and even if [Effect] is set, the effects

are disabled.

●When you play back the following pictures in a slide show, the [Duration] setting is disabled.

• Motion pictures

• 4K burst files

• Panorama pictures

• Group pictures

●[Duration] can be set only when [Effect] is set to [OFF].

●Part of [Effect] cannot be used when displaying pictures on television using an HDMI micro cable

or when displaying pictures recorded in portrait position.

[Playback Mode]

Recorded pictures can be played back in a variety of ways.

1Set the menu

→ [Playback] → [Playback Mode]

2Use to select the item and press [MENU/SET]

• If you select [Video Only], 4K burst files recorded with the 4K

Photo function will also be played back.

239 SQW0419

Playing Back and Editing Pictures

Using the [Playback] menu

When selecting [Category Play] in step 2 (→238)

3Use to select the category and press [MENU/SET]

• The available categories are as follows.

[Face Recog.]*

[i-Portrait], [i-Night Portrait], [i-Baby] in Automatic Scene Detection

[Clear Portrait], [Silky Skin], [Backlit Softness], [Clear in Backlight], [Relaxing Tone],

[Sweet Child’s Face], [Clear Night Portrait] (Scene Guide Mode)

[i-Scenery], [i-Sunset] in Automatic Scene Detection

[Distinct Scenery], [Bright Blue Sky], [Romantic Sunset Glow], [Vivid Sunset Glow],

[Glistening Water] (Scene Guide Mode)

[i-Night Portrait], [i-Night Scenery], [i-Handheld Night Shot] in Automatic Scene

Detection

[Clear Nightscape], [Cool Night Sky], [Warm Glowing Nightscape], [Artistic Nightscape],

[Glittering Illuminations], [Handheld Night Shot], [Clear Night Portrait] (Scene Guide

Mode)

[Clear Sports Shot] (Scene Guide Mode)

[i-Food] in Automatic Scene Detection

[Appetizing Food], [Cute Dessert] (Scene Guide Mode)

[Travel Date]

A burst of pictures recorded by setting the burst speed to [SH]

[Time Lapse Shot], [Time Lapse Video]

[Stop Motion Animation], [Stop Motion Video]

* Use to select a person to be played back and press [MENU/SET]. Face Recognition is

applied for all the pictures in the group.

●The category for recording motion pictures is different from the category of still pictures used in

some Recording modes. For that reason, the pictures may not be played back.

240 SQW0419

Playing Back and Editing Pictures

Using the [Playback] menu

[Location Logging]

After you send location information (latitude and longitude) obtained by your smartphone/

tablet to this unit, you can write this information on pictures using the unit.

Preparation

Send location information to this unit from your smartphone/tablet. (→269)

• You must install “Panasonic Image App” on your smartphone/tablet. (→260)

1Set the menu

→ [Playback] → [Location Logging] → [Add Location Data]

2Use to select a period for writing location information, and press

[MENU/SET]

• [ ] is displayed for pictures that have location information written to it.

■Abort writing location information

Press [MENU/SET] while location information is being written

• [ ] is displayed for the period of the abort operation.

If selected again while [ ] is displayed, writing location information will resume where it left off.

■Delete received location information

Use to select [Delete Location Data] and press [MENU/SET]

Use to select a period for deleting location information, and press [MENU/SET]

●The location information cannot be written in the following cases:

• Pictures that were recorded after you sent the location information (→269)

• Pictures that already have location information

• Motion pictures recorded in [AVCHD] format

• Protected pictures

• If there is not enough free space on your card

• Card switch is in “LOCK” position.

• Pictures recorded using cameras other than this unit

Writing the location information using a smartphone/tablet

When you use your smartphone/tablet as a remote controller for this unit, you can write

the location information on pictures using the smartphone/tablet. (→270)

241 SQW0419

Playing Back and Editing Pictures

Using the [Playback] menu

[RAW Processing]

You can use the camera to develop still pictures that were recorded in RAW format. The

created still pictures are saved in JPEG format.

1Set the menu

→ [Playback] → [RAW Processing]

2Press to select RAW file and press [MENU/SET]

3Press to select the item

• The following items can be set. The settings used during recording are applied at the time of

setting.

[White Balance]

You can select White Balance to make adjustments. When you select an

item with [ ], you can develop the pictures using the same settings that

were applied for recording.

[Exposure Comp.] You can perform Exposure Compensation in the range from –1 EV to

+1 EV.

[Photo Style] You can select the [Photo Style] effects ([Standard], [Vivid], [Natural],

[Monochrome], [Scenery], or [Portrait]).

[i.Dynamic] You can select the [i.Dynamic] settings ([HIGH], [STANDARD], [LOW], or

[OFF]).

[Contrast] You can adjust the contrast.

[Highlight] You can adjust the brightness of a highlighted area.

[Shadow] You can adjust the brightness of a shadowed area.

[Saturation] /

[Color Tone]

You can adjust the saturation. (You can adjust the coloring when

[Monochrome] is selected for [Photo Style].)

[Filter Effect] You can select a Filter effect. (Only when [Monochrome] is selected for

[Photo Style].)

[Noise Reduction] You can set noise reduction.

[i.Resolution] You can select the [i.Resolution] settings ([HIGH], [STANDARD], [LOW],

[EXTENDED], or [OFF]).

[Sharpness] You can adjust the impression of resolution.

[Setup]

You can perform the following settings.

[Reinstate Adjustments]: You can restore the settings to the ones used

during recording.

[Color Space]: You can select [Color Space] from either [sRGB] or

[AdobeRGB].

[Picture Size]: You can select the picture size ([L], [M], or [S]) of a JPEG

file when saving pictures.

4Press [MENU/SET] to set

• The setting methods vary depending on the item. For details, refer to “Setting each item”

(→242).

242 SQW0419

Playing Back and Editing Pictures

Using the [Playback] menu

5Press [MENU/SET]

• The screen in step 3 reappears. To set another item, repeat steps 3 to 5.

6Press to select [Begin Processing] and press [MENU/SET]

■Setting each item

When you select an item, the setting screen appears.

Button

operation

Touch

operation Description

Drag Used to make adjustments

[WB K Set]

Used to display the color

temperature setting screen (→120)

(Only when [White Balance] is set

to [ ])

[Adjust.]

Used to display the White Balance

fine adjustment screen (→120)

(Only when [White Balance] is set)

[DISP.] [DISP.] Used to display the comparison

screen

[MENU/SET] [Set]

Used to finalize an adjustment you

just made and to return to the item

selection screen

SetSet

• If you have selected [Noise Reduction], [i.Resolution], or [Sharpness], the

comparison screen is not displayed.

• Pictures can be enlarged by operating the zoom lever.

• You can also zoom in by quickly touching the touch screen twice. (If the display was

enlarged, it returns to the same magnification ratio.)

The following operating methods are available to make adjustments on the comparison

screen.

Button

operation

Touch

operation Description

Drag Used to make adjustments

[DISP.] [DISP.] Used to return to the setting screen

[MENU/SET] [Set]

Used to finalize an adjustment you

just made and to return to the item

selection screen

SetSet

Current setting

• If you touch the picture at the center, it will be enlarged. If you touch [ ], the picture

will be reduced to the original size.

243 SQW0419

Playing Back and Editing Pictures

Using the [Playback] menu

When [Setup] is selected

When you select an item, the screen for selecting [Reinstate Adjustments], [Color

Space], or [Picture Size] is displayed.

Use to select the item and press [MENU/SET]

• When [Reinstate Adjustments] is selected, confirmation screen is displayed. When you select

[Yes], the item selection screen reappears.

Use to select the setting and press [MENU/SET]

●The result of a RAW file developed by this camera and a RAW file developed by the supplied DVD

software “SILKYPIX Developer Studio” will not be exactly the same.

●Regardless of the aspect ratio of the picture during recording, a RAW image recorded on this

camera is always recorded with the aspect ratio set to [4:3] (4000×3000), but if you perform [RAW

Processing] from the [Playback] menu, the picture will be processed with the aspect ratio fixed as

that at the time of recording.

●The range that can be set using Exposure Compensation varies from the range used during

recording.

●The [White Balance] setting of still pictures recorded using [Multi Exp.] is fixed to the setting used

during recording.

●When an AV cable (optional) or an HDMI micro cable is connected, [RAW Processing] is disabled.

●You can perform RAW processing on pictures recorded using this unit only. [RAW Processing]

cannot be used for pictures recorded on other devices or for pictures recorded in formats other

than the RAW format.

244 SQW0419

Playing Back and Editing Pictures

Using the [Playback] menu

[Clear Retouch]

You can erase unnecessary parts recorded

on the pictures taken.

• The erasure operation can only be

performed by touching. [Clear Retouch]

automatically enables the touch

operation.

1Set the menu

→ [Playback] → [Clear Retouch]

2Use to select a still picture and press [MENU/SET]

SetSet

UndoUndo

SCALINGSCALING

REMOVEREMOVE

3Drag your finger over the part you want to delete

• The parts to be erased are colored.

• Touching [Undo] will return the colored part back to its previous

state.

Erasing details (enlarging the display)

SetSet

Undo

SCALINGSCALING

REMOVE

Touch [SCALING]

• On the touch screen, pinch out your two fingers to zoom in,

and pinch in your two fingers to zoom out (→52).

• You can also zoom in/out with the zoom lever.

• Dragging the screen allows you to move the enlarged part.

Touch [REMOVE]

• This will bring you back to the operation of dragging your

finger over the part you want to delete. The part you want to

delete can be dragged even while the picture is enlarged.

4Touch [Set]

5Touch [Save] or press [MENU/SET]

●Pictures may appear unnatural because the background of deleted parts is artificially created.

●For group pictures, perform [Clear Retouch] on each picture. (They cannot be edited at once.)

●When [Clear Retouch] is performed on group pictures, they are saved as new pictures separate

from the original ones.

●Not available when the viewfinder is in use.

●This function is not available in the following cases:

• Panorama pictures

• Motion pictures

• 4K burst files

• Still pictures recorded with the [Quality] setting [ ]

245 SQW0419

Playing Back and Editing Pictures

Using the [Playback] menu

[Title Edit]

You can enter characters (comments) on a recorded picture. After text has been

registered, it can be stamped in prints using [Text Stamp] (→246).

1Set the menu

→ [Playback] → [Title Edit] → [Single] or [Multi]

2Select a still picture (→236)

• [ ] is displayed for pictures with titles already stamped.

3Enter characters (Entering text (→75))

• To delete a title, delete all the characters in the character input screen.

●You can print out texts (comments) using the “PHOTOfunSTUDIO” software on the DVD

(supplied).

●You can set up to 100 pictures at one time with [Multi].

●This function is not available in the following cases:

• Motion pictures

• 4K burst files

• Still pictures recorded with the [Quality] setting [ ], [ ] or [ ]

246 SQW0419

Playing Back and Editing Pictures

Using the [Playback] menu

[Text Stamp]

You can stamp the recording date and time, names, travel destination, travel dates, etc. on

the recorded still pictures.

1Set the menu

→ [Playback] → [Text Stamp] → [Single] or [Multi]

2Select a still picture (→236)

• [ ] appears on screen if the picture is stamped with text.

3Use to select [Set] and press [MENU/SET]

4Use to select the item and press [MENU/SET]

5Use to select the setting and press [MENU/SET]

[Shooting Date] [W/O TIME]: Stamp recording date

[WITH TIME]: Stamp recording date and time

[Name] : Stamp name registered in Face Recognition

: Stamp name registered in [Profile Setup]

[Location] Stamp location registered in [Setup] menu’s [Travel Date]

[Travel Date] Stamp number of days that have elapsed since the travel date set in [Setup]

menu’s [Travel Date]

[Title] Stamp text registered in [Title Edit]

6Press [Q.MENU ] button

7Use to select [OK] and press [MENU/SET]

●Do not request date printing in store or make date printing on printer for still pictures with

date stamps. (Date printing may be overlapped.)

●You can set up to 100 pictures at one time with [Multi].

●The picture quality may be coarser.

●If you stamp text on the pictures in a group, those pictures are saved as new pictures.

●This function is not available in the following cases:

• Motion pictures

• 4K burst files

• Still pictures recorded with the [Quality] setting [ ]

• Panorama pictures

• Still pictures that other texts had already been stamped

• Pictures recorded without setting the clock and title

247 SQW0419

Playing Back and Editing Pictures

Using the [Playback] menu

[Video Divide]

A single motion picture can be split into 2 parts. This is convenient when you want to keep

just the necessary scenes, or if you wish to delete unnecessary scenes to increase free

space on your card, such as when traveling.

1Set the menu

→ [Playback] → [Video Divide]

2Use to select a motion picture to split and press [MENU/SET]

3Press at where you want to split a motion picture to pause it

• If you press while paused, you can make finer adjustments to the splitting positions in a

motion picture.

4Press

• The original motion picture that was split does not remain.

(There will only be the 2 motion pictures that were created after

the split.)

●During dividing, do not turn off the camera or remove the card or battery. If you do so, the motion

picture may be deleted.

●Motion pictures cannot be divided at a location close to the start or end of the motion picture.

●Motion pictures with a short recording time cannot be divided.

248 SQW0419

Playing Back and Editing Pictures

Using the [Playback] menu

[Time Lapse Video]

You can create a motion picture from the pictures in a group that was recorded using

[Time Lapse Shot]. The motion picture you created is saved in the MP4 recording format.

1Set the menu

→ [Playback] → [Time Lapse Video]

2Use to select the [Time Lapse Shot] picture group and press

[MENU/SET]

3Create a motion picture after selecting a production method

• For details, refer to step 5 and the subsequent steps (→183).

For details on the motion picture you created, refer to (→184).

[Stop Motion Video]

You can create a motion picture from the pictures in a group that was recorded using

[Stop Motion Animation]. The motion picture you created is saved in the MP4 recording

format.

1Set the menu

→ [Playback] → [Stop Motion Video]

2Use to select a stop motion animation group and press [MENU/SET]

3Create a motion picture after selecting a production method

• For details, refer to step 8 and the subsequent steps (→187).

For details on the motion picture you created, refer to (→188).

249 SQW0419

Playing Back and Editing Pictures

Using the [Playback] menu

[Resize]

Picture size can be reduced to facilitate e-mail attachment and use in web pages, etc.

1Set the menu

→ [Playback] → [Resize] → [Single] or [Multi]

2Select a still picture and size

[Single]

Use to select a still picture and press [MENU/SET]

Use to select size and press [MENU/SET]

SetSet

[Multi] (up to 100 pictures)

Use to select size and press [MENU/SET]

Use to select a still picture and press [MENU/SET]

(repeat)

• To cancel → Press [MENU/SET] again.

Use to select [OK] and press [MENU/SET]

●Picture quality is reduced after resizing.

●This function is not available in the following cases:

• Motion pictures

• 4K burst files

• Still pictures recorded with the [Quality] setting [ ]

• Panorama pictures

• Group pictures

• Still pictures that other texts had already been stamped

250 SQW0419

Playing Back and Editing Pictures

Using the [Playback] menu

[Cropping]

Enlarge your still pictures and crop unwanted areas.

1Set the menu

→ [Playback] → [Cropping]

2Use to select a still picture and press [MENU/SET]

3Select area to crop and press [MENU/SET]

• You can also touch [ ] / [ ] to enlarge/reduce.

• You can also move by dragging on the screen.

Enlarge Change

position

●Perform cropping for each picture in the group. (You cannot edit pictures in group units.)

●If you crop a picture in the group, it is saved as a new picture.

●Original Face Recognition information will not be copied when still pictures are cropped.

●Picture quality is reduced after cropping.

●This function is not available in the following cases:

• Motion pictures

• 4K burst files

• Still pictures recorded with the [Quality] setting [ ]

• Panorama pictures

• Still pictures that other texts had already been stamped

251 SQW0419

Playing Back and Editing Pictures

Using the [Playback] menu

[Rotate] / [Rotate Disp.]

You can automatically display a still picture recorded in portrait orientation by taking the

picture with the camera held vertically, or manually rotate the picture in 90-degree units.

[Rotate] Rotating a picture manually

• You cannot select [Rotate] when [Rotate Disp.] is set to [OFF].

1Set the menu

→ [Playback] → [Rotate]

2Use to select picture and press [MENU/SET]

• You cannot rotate group pictures.

3Use to select the rotation direction and press

[MENU/SET]

[ ]: Rotate a picture 90 degrees clockwise.

[ ]: Rotate a picture 90 degrees counterclockwise.

[Rotate Disp.] Rotating a picture automatically to display

1Set the menu

→ [Playback] → [Rotate Disp.] → [ON]

●When you play back pictures on a PC, they cannot be displayed in the rotated direction unless the

OS or software is compatible with Exif. Exif is a file format for still pictures which allows recording

information, etc. to be added. It was established by “JEITA (Japan Electronics and Information

Technology Industries Association)”.

●A picture may not be automatically rotated to display it with portrait orientation on the Multi

Playback screen, which is displayed for settings such as [Delete Multi].

252 SQW0419

Playing Back and Editing Pictures

Using the [Playback] menu

[Favorite]

By labeling your favorite pictures with a star [ ], you can play back your favorite pictures

only, or you can delete all pictures except your favorites.

1Set the menu

→ [Playback] → [Favorite] → [Single] or [Multi]

2Select picture (→236)

■To clear all

In step 1, select [Favorite] → [Cancel] → [Yes], and then press [MENU/SET]

●Up to 999 pictures can be set.

●When you set [Favorite] for a picture in a group, the number of pictures set is displayed with the

[Favorite] icon of the first picture.

●Only when [Playback Mode] is set to [Normal Play], you can select [Cancel].

●This function is not available in the following case:

• Still pictures recorded with the [Quality] setting [ ]

253 SQW0419

Playing Back and Editing Pictures

Using the [Playback] menu

[Print Set]

Picture/picture no./date printing settings can be made for when printing with DPOF

print-compatible shops or printers. (Contact the local photo printing store or read

operating instructions of the printer to check if DPOF is supported.)

For more information visit:

http://panasonic.jp/dc/dpof_110/white_e.htm

1Set the menu

→ [Playback] → [Print Set] → [Single] or [Multi]

2Select a still picture (→236)

3Use to set number of still pictures and press [MENU/SET] (up to 999

pictures)

(Repeat steps 2 and 3 when using [Multi])

• Date print setting/release → Press .

■To clear all

In step 1, select [Print Set] → [Cancel] → [Yes], and then press [MENU/SET]

●When you have performed [Print Set] for pictures in a group, printing settings are made for the

total of number of pictures set in that group. If the total number of pictures is 1,000 or higher,

[999+] is displayed.

●When you perform [Print Set] for a picture in a group, the number of pictures set and the total

number of pictures are displayed with the Print Set icon of the first picture.

●Date print setting cannot be made for pictures with a [Text Stamp] applied.

●Depending on the type of printer, the printer settings may take priority over camera settings.

●Some DPOF information (print settings) set by other equipment cannot be used. In such cases,

delete all of the DPOF information and then set it again with this camera.

●This function is not available in the following cases:

• Motion pictures

• 4K burst files

• Still pictures recorded with the [Quality] setting [ ]

• Cannot be set for files that are not compliant with the DCF standard

254 SQW0419

Playing Back and Editing Pictures

Using the [Playback] menu

[Protect]

Set protection to disable picture deletion. Prevents deletion of important pictures.

1Set the menu

→ [Playback] → [Protect] → [Single] or [Multi]

2Select picture (→236)

■To clear all

In step 1, select [Protect] → [Cancel] → [Yes], and then press [MENU/SET]

When you set the write-protect switch on the card to the “LOCK” position, the

picture is not erased.

●The picture is erased when formatting, even if it is protected.

●May not be effective when using other devices.

●When you set [Protect] for a picture in a group, the number of pictures set is displayed with the

[Protect] icon of the first picture.

[Face Rec Edit]

Edit or delete the recognition information for pictures with mistaken Face Recognition.

1Set the menu

→ [Playback] → [Face Rec Edit] → [REPLACE] or [DELETE]

2Use to select picture and press [MENU/SET]

3Use to select a person and press [MENU/SET]

• If [DELETE], go to step 5.

4Use to select the person to replace for another and press [MENU/SET]

5Use to select [Yes] and press [MENU/SET]

●When Face Recognition information is deleted, it cannot be restored.

●Pictures for which all Face Recognition information has been deleted are not categorized in Face

Recognition during [Category Play] or [Category Selection].

●Edit the Face Recognition information in group units for a picture group. (You cannot edit the

information for each picture in a group.)

●You can edit only the first picture in a group.

255 SQW0419

Playing Back and Editing Pictures

Using the [Playback] menu

[Picture Sort]

You can set the display sequence used for playing back pictures on this unit.

1Set the menu

→ [Playback] → [Picture Sort]

2Use to select the item and press [MENU/SET]

[FILE NAME]

Displays pictures in the folder name or file name sequence. This display

format allows you to find the storage location of a picture on a card more

easily.

[DATE/TIME]

Displays pictures according to the date and time that the pictures were

taken in chronological order. When the pictures are taken using several

cameras and stored on the same card, this display format allows you find

a specific picture more easily.

●Pictures may not be displayed according to the [DATE/TIME] sequence immediately after a card

is inserted into this unit. In that case, wait a while, and the pictures will be displayed in the [DATE/

TIME] sequence.

[Delete Confirmation]

You can set the Yes/No options that you want to select first on the confirmation screen

when you delete a picture from either [Yes] or [No].

1Set the menu

→ [Playback] → [Delete Confirmation]

2Use to select the item and press [MENU/SET]

["Yes" first] [Yes] is selected by default to quickly perform a deletion.

["No" first] [No] is selected by default. This setting will prevent you from

accidentally deleting pictures.

256 SQW0419

Wi-Fi

What you can do with the Wi-Fi® function

Operating the camera by connecting it to a smartphone/tablet

(→260)

Taking pictures via a smartphone (remote recording)

Playing back pictures in the camera on a smartphone

Saving pictures in the camera to a smartphone

Sending pictures in the camera to social networking services

Writing the location information on pictures in the camera

Combining motion pictures recorded with Snap Movie according to your

preference on a smartphone

Connect easily

You can easily set up a direct connection to your smartphone

without entering a password.

Displaying still pictures on a TV (→273)

Wireless printing (→278)

Sending pictures to AV device (→279)

Still pictures and motion pictures can be sent to AV device in the home (home AV

device).

Sending pictures to a PC (→280)

Using WEB services (→282)

Through “LUMIX CLUB”, you can send still pictures and motion pictures to social

networking services, etc. You can receive still pictures and motion pictures on a PC or a

smartphone/tablet using the Cloud Sync. Service.

• Hereafter, this manual uses the term “smartphone” for both smartphones and tablets

unless it is necessary to distinguish between them.

257 SQW0419

Wi-Fi

Wi-Fi Function

■Before Use

• Complete the date and time settings in advance. (→34)

• To use the Wi-Fi function on this unit, a wireless access point or a destination device

equipped with the wireless LAN function is required.

■About the Wi-Fi connection lamp

Lit blue: When the Wi-Fi function is ON

Blinking blue: When sending data

■About the [Wi-Fi] button

In this Owner’s Manual, a function button to which [Wi-Fi] is assigned is referred to as

the [Wi-Fi] button. (At the time of purchase, [Wi-Fi] is assigned to [Fn5] button.)

• For details on the function button, refer to (→61).

To start up the Wi-Fi function:

Touch [ ]

258 SQW0419

Wi-Fi

Wi-Fi Function

• Before a Wi-Fi connection is established, press the [Wi-Fi] button to perform the

following operations:

– The information required for directly connecting your

smartphone to this unit is displayed.

– You can select the following items by pressing [DISP.]

button.

(You can also display the same menu by selecting

→ [Setup] → [Wi-Fi] → [Wi-Fi Function].)

[New Connection]

[Select a destination from History] (→297)

[Select a destination from Favorite] (→297)

SSID

• This manual provides information on the process when [New Connection] is

selected.

• Pressing the [Wi-Fi] button during a Wi-Fi connection enables the following operation.

[Terminate the Connection] Terminates the Wi-Fi connection.

[Change the Destination]*1Terminates the Wi-Fi connection, and allows you to

select a different Wi-Fi connection.

[Change Settings for Sending

Images]*2For details (→276).

[Register the Current Destination to

Favorite]*1

Registering the current connection destination or the

connection method, you can easily connect with the

same connection method next time.

[Network Address]Displays the MAC address and IP address of this unit

(→300).

*1 This item will not be displayed if you press to send pictures to WEB services while the

pictures are displayed (→285).

*2 This item will not be displayed if the destination for [Remote Shooting & View], [Playback on

TV] or [Send Images Stored in the Camera] is set to [Printer].

259 SQW0419

Wi-Fi

Wi-Fi Function

■Describing method

When “select [Select a destination from History]”, etc. is

described in a step, perform any of the following operations.

With cursor button operations:

Use cursor button to select [Select a destination from

History] and press [MENU/SET].

With touch screen operations:

Touch [Select a destination from History].

●Do not remove the memory card or battery or move to an area without any reception while

sending images.

●The camera cannot be used to connect to a public wireless LAN connection.

●Use a IEEE802.11b, IEEE802.11g or IEEE802.11n compatible device when using a wireless

access point.

●We recommend that you use a fully charged battery when you send pictures.

●When sending images on a mobile network, high packet communication fees may be incurred

depending on the details of your contract.

●Pictures may not be completely sent depending on radio wave conditions. If the connection is

terminated while sending pictures, pictures with missing sections may be sent.

●The monitor display may become distorted for an instant while connected to the service, however

this will not affect the image being sent.

260 SQW0419

Wi-Fi

Operating the camera by connecting it to a

smartphone

You can remotely operate the camera using a smartphone.

The “Panasonic Image App” (hereafter “Image App”) must be installed on your

smartphone.

Installing the smartphone/tablet app “Panasonic Image App”

The “Image App” is an application provided by Panasonic that allows your smartphone to

perform the following operations of a Wi-Fi-compatible LUMIX.

For Android™ apps For iOS apps

Supported OS Android 4.0 or later iOS 6.0 or later

(iPhone 3GS is not supported.)

Installation

procedure

Connect your Android device to a

network

Select “Google PlayTM Store”

Enter “Panasonic Image App” or

“LUMIX” to search for the app

Select “Panasonic Image App” and

install it

• The icon will be added to

the menu.

Connect the iOS device to the

network

Select “App StoreSM”

Enter “Panasonic Image App” or

“LUMIX” to search for the app

Select “Panasonic Image App” and

install it

• The icon will be added to

the menu.

• Use the latest version.

• Supported OS versions as of July 2015. Supported OS versions may be changed

without prior notice.

• For details about the operating procedure, etc., refer to [Help] in the “Image App” menu.

• If you connect the camera and smartphone over a Wi-Fi connection and run “Image

App”, [Help] may not be displayed in the “Image App” menu for some smartphones. In

such a case, disconnect the Wi-Fi connection with the camera, connect the camera to

a cellular data line such as 3G and LTE, or the Internet to display [Help] in the “Image

App” menu.

• Some of the screens and information provided in this document may be different

depending on the supported operating system and “Image App” version.

• The service may not be able to be used properly depending on the type of smartphone

being used.

For the latest information on the “Image App”, refer to the support site below.

http://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/dsc/ (This site is available in English only.)

• When downloading the app on a mobile network, high packet communication fees may

be incurred depending on the details of your contract.

261 SQW0419

Wi-Fi

Operating the camera by connecting it to a smartphone

Connecting to a smartphone

You can easily establish a Wi-Fi connection on this unit without entering a password on

your smartphone.

• It may take some time for the operation to end after operating a smartphone.

[Wi-Fi Password] is set to [OFF] at the time of purchase. In [OFF] state, a third

party can tap into the Wi-Fi transmission and steal transmitted data.

To set [Wi-Fi Password] to [ON], refer to (→263).

Preparation

(On the camera) Set [Wi-Fi Password] to [OFF]. (→299)

(On your smartphone) Install “Image App” in advance. (→260)

1Select the menu on the camera

→ [Setup] → [Wi-Fi] → [Wi-Fi Function] → [New Connection]

→ [Remote Shooting & View]

• The information required for directly connecting your smartphone

to this unit (SSID) is displayed.

• You can also display the information by pressing [Wi-Fi] button

on the camera.

• To change the connection method, refer to (→265).

SSID

2Operate the smartphone

• The connection method differs depending on the smartphone used.

• When the connection is complete, a message indicating the successful connection will be

displayed on the smartphone screen.

262 SQW0419

Wi-Fi

Operating the camera by connecting it to a smartphone

■Using an iOS device

Turn on the Wi-Fi function in the setting

menu of the smartphone

Select the SSID displayed on the screen of this unit

Return to the home screen and start “Image App” (→260)

• When the connection confirmation screen appears on this unit, select [Yes] and press

[MENU/SET]. (Only when making a connection for the first time.)

* The display may differ depending on the system language setting.

■Using an Android device

Start “Image App” (→260)

• If a message appears stating that a camera search is in progress, close the message.

Select [ ]

Select the SSID displayed on this unit

• When the connection confirmation screen appears on this unit, select [Yes] and press

[MENU/SET]. (Only when making a connection for the first time.)

263 SQW0419

Wi-Fi

Operating the camera by connecting it to a smartphone

Using a password to set up a connection

When [Wi-Fi Password] is set to [ON], you can strengthen security by using manual input

or a QR code for password authentication.

• To scan a QR code with “Image App” on an iOS device, iOS 7.0 or later is required.

Preparation

(On the camera) Set [Wi-Fi Password] to [ON]. (→299)

(On your smartphone) Install “Image App” in advance. (→260)

1Select the menu on the camera

→ [Setup] → [Wi-Fi] → [Wi-Fi Function] → [New Connection]

→ [Remote Shooting & View]

• The information (QR Code, SSID and Password) required for

directly connecting your smartphone to this unit is displayed.

• You can also display the information by pressing [Wi-Fi] button

on the camera.

SSID and Password

QR Code

2Operate the smartphone

• The connection method differs depending on the smartphone used.

264 SQW0419

Wi-Fi

Operating the camera by connecting it to a smartphone

■Using an iOS device

• When reading a QR Code to connect

(Steps to are not necessary when reconnecting.)

Start “Image App” (→260)

Select [ ] → [OK]

Read the QR Code displayed on this unit with “Image App”

(When you press [MENU/SET] on the camera, the QR code is displayed in an

enlarged size.)

• When the smartphone is connected to a wireless access point, it may take time to display QR

code.

Install the profile

• The message is displayed in the Web browser.

• If a passcode is required to unlock the smartphone, you will have to input the passcode.

Press the home button to close the Web browser

Turn on the Wi-Fi function in the setting

menu of the smartphone

Select the SSID displayed on the screen of this unit

Return to the home screen and start “Image App” (→260)

* The display may differ depending on the system language setting.

• When connecting with SSID and password

Turn on the Wi-Fi function in the setting menu of the smartphone

Select the SSID displayed on the screen of this unit

Enter the password displayed on this unit (First time connecting only)

Return to the home screen and start “Image App” (→260)

* The display may differ depending on the system language setting.

265 SQW0419

Wi-Fi

Operating the camera by connecting it to a smartphone

■Using an Android device

• When reading a QR Code to connect

Start “Image App” (→260)

Select [ ] → [OK]

Read the QR Code displayed on this unit with “Image App”

(When you press [MENU/SET] on the camera, the QR code is displayed in an

enlarged size.)

• When the smartphone is connected to a wireless access point, it may take time to display QR

code.

• When connecting with SSID and password

Start “Image App” (→260)

• If a message appears stating that a camera search is in progress, close the message.

Select [ ]

Select the SSID displayed on this unit

Enter the password displayed on this unit (First time connecting only)

• If you check the item to display the password, you can confirm the password as you enter it.

Changing the connection method

To change the connection method, follow the steps below:

(When the connection is made using [Wi-Fi] in the [Setup] menu)

Press [DISP.] button

(When the connection is made by pressing [Wi-Fi] button)

→ [DISP.] button → [New Connection]

→ [Remote Shooting & View] → [DISP.] button

■When connecting with [Via Network]

(On the camera)

Select [Via Network] and press [MENU/SET]

• Connect the camera to a wireless access point by following the connection method (→293).

(On your smartphone)

Set Wi-Fi function to “ON”

Select the wireless access point you connected to the camera, and set

Start “Image App” (→260)

266 SQW0419

Wi-Fi

Operating the camera by connecting it to a smartphone

■When connecting with [Direct]

(On the camera)

Select [Direct] and press [MENU/SET]

• Select [Wi-Fi Direct] or [WPS Connection]*, and connect the camera to the smartphone by

following the connection method (→296).

* WPS refers to a function that allows you to easily configure the settings related to the

connection and security of wireless LAN devices. To check if the smartphone you are using is

compatible with WPS, refer to the instruction manual of the smartphone.

(On your smartphone)

Start “Image App” (→260)

Closing the connection

After use, close the connection with the smartphone.

(On the camera)

1On the recording standby screen, terminate the connection from the menu of

the camera

→ [Setup] → [Wi-Fi] → [Wi-Fi Function] → [Yes]

• You can also terminate the connection by pressing [Wi-Fi] button on the camera (→258).

(On your smartphone)

2Close “Image App”

From the “Image App” screen, press the home button on the smartphone to close the app

From the “Image App” screen, press the back button on the smartphone twice to close the app

267 SQW0419

Wi-Fi

Operating the camera by connecting it to a smartphone

Taking pictures via a smartphone (remote recording)

1Connect to a smartphone (→261)

2Operate the smartphone

Select [ ]

Take pictures

• The recorded images are saved in the camera.

• Some settings are not available.

• When recording with [4K Pre-Burst] with the smartphone, terminate the connection only

after switching to 4K Burst recording by pressing [Q.MENU ] button on the camera.

●This function is not available in the following cases:

• Panorama Shot Mode

• When using [Time Lapse Shot]

• When [Snap Movie] is set to [ON]

Taking a picture while jumping

When you hold your smartphone and jump, the camera’s shutter can be released

automatically as the smartphone detects the peak of the jump. This operation is useful for

taking a still picture while a subject jumps (Jump Snap).

1[ ] → [ ] → Select the sensitivity

• [ ] will be displayed on the remote recording screen of the smartphone.

• We recommend that you take test pictures to determine the camera’s angle and how

hard you jump and to make any desired adjustments.

• For details about the operating procedure, refer to [Help] in the “Image App”.

268 SQW0419

Wi-Fi

Operating the camera by connecting it to a smartphone

Playing back pictures in the camera on a smartphone

1Connect to a smartphone (→261)

Switch the

location of the

pictures to be

displayed

2Operate the smartphone

Select [ ]

• You can switch a picture to be displayed using the icon at the top

left on the screen. Select [LUMIX] to display a picture saved in the

camera.

• When the picture is touched, it is played back at a larger size.

• When playing back motion pictures, the data size is reduced during transmission of

motion pictures to “Image App”. Therefore, the picture quality may be different from the

actual motion picture that you have recorded. Depending on your smartphone and its

usage environment, you may notice degradation in the picture quality or skipping of

sound when playing back motion pictures and still pictures.

Saving pictures in the camera to a smartphone

1Connect to a smartphone (→261)

2Operate the smartphone

Select [ ]

• You can switch a picture to be displayed using the icon at the top

left on the screen. Select [LUMIX] to display a picture saved in the

camera.

Press and hold the picture and drag it to save it on the

smartphone

• Functions can be assigned to the top, bottom, left and right as you wish.

●Pictures in RAW format, AVCHD motion pictures, MP4 motion pictures with a [Rec Quality] size of

[4K], and 4K burst files cannot be saved.

269 SQW0419

Wi-Fi

Operating the camera by connecting it to a smartphone

Sending pictures in the camera to social networking services

1Connect to a smartphone (→261)

Switch the

location of the

pictures to be

displayed

2Operate the smartphone

Select [ ]

• You can switch a picture to be

displayed using the icon at the top

left on the screen. Select [LUMIX] to

display a picture saved in the camera.

Press and hold the picture and drag

it to send it to the social networking

service, etc.

• The picture will be sent to the social

networking service or other WEB

services.

• Functions can be assigned to the top, bottom, left and right as you wish.

Adding location information to pictures in the camera from a

smartphone

You can send the location information acquired from a smartphone to the camera. After

the information is sent, you can write it on the pictures in the camera.

• You can also use [Location Logging] in the [Playback] menu to write the sent location

information to the pictures.

GPS

Starts location information recording

Start the recording

Ends location information recording

Sends and writes the location

information

• Location information that is different from the information acquired during recording may

be written. Take care regarding the following matters.

– Set [Home] of [World Time] of the camera to your home area.

– Once a smartphone starts recording the location information, do not change the

[Home] setting of [World Time] of the camera.

• The location information cannot be written to pictures recorded without setting [Clock

Set].

270 SQW0419

Wi-Fi

Operating the camera by connecting it to a smartphone

■Recording location information and taking pictures

Start recording the location information on your smartphone

Start “Image App” (→260)

Select [ ]

Select [ Start geotagging]

Take pictures using the camera

End recording of the location information on your smartphone

Select [ Stop geotagging] to end recording of location information

■Writing location information to a picture

Preparation

(On the camera) Connect to a smartphone. (→261)

Operate the smartphone

Start “Image App” (→260)

Select [ ]

Select [ ] to send or write location information

• Follow the messages on the screen to perform the operation.

• [ ] is displayed for pictures that have location information written to it.

●The smartphone battery drains faster while location information is being recorded. When recording

of location information is not necessary, stop it.

●For details about the operating procedure, etc., refer to [Help] in the “Image App” menu.

• On the smartphone, you can set the acquisition interval of location information and check the

transfer status of location information

●The location information cannot be written in the following cases:

• Images recorded after location information was sent to the camera

• Pictures that already have location information

• Motion pictures recorded in [AVCHD] format

• Protected pictures

• There is not enough free space on your card

• Card switch is in “LOCK” position

• When connected to computer/printer

• Pictures recorded using cameras other than this unit

271 SQW0419

Wi-Fi

Operating the camera by connecting it to a smartphone

Combining motion pictures recorded with Snap Movie

according to your preference on a smartphone

Using a smartphone, you can combine motion pictures recorded with the camera’s

[Snap Movie] function (→221). Music can be added to motion pictures to be combined. In

addition, you can save the combined motion picture or upload it on a web service.

Record motion pictures

with [Snap Movie]

Send the recorded

motion pictures

Edit

WEB

services

Combine the motion

pictures, save the

combined motion picture,

and send it to a web

service

Combine the motion

pictures, and save the

combined motion picture

272 SQW0419

Wi-Fi

Operating the camera by connecting it to a smartphone

■Combining motion pictures by operating a smartphone

Connect to a smartphone (→261)

Operate the smartphone

Select [ ]

• [Snap Movie] motion pictures with recent recording dates will be selected and automatically

sent to the smartphone.

• When motion pictures with recent recording dates are not available, a screen that lets you

select motion pictures will be displayed. Select motion pictures and send them.

Edit the motion pictures

• Operate the smartphone to edit the motion pictures, such as rearranging them, deleting

those that are unnecessary or adding music to them.

• You can combine the edited motion pictures and save the combined file on the smartphone

or upload it on a web service.

• Read the [Help] in the “Image App” menu for further details on how to operate [Snap Movie]

of “Image App”.

●

[Snap Movie] of the “Image App” requires a smartphone that supports Android OS 4.3 or higher.

●

The iPhone 4 and iPod touch (4th generation) do not support [Snap Movie] of the “Image App”.

●

The smartphone may not be able to play back and save [Snap Movie] motion pictures recorded with

another device.

273 SQW0419

Wi-Fi

Displaying still pictures on a TV

You can display still pictures on a TV that is compatible with a DLNA certified digital

media renderer (DMR) function.

Preparation

Set the TV to DLNA waiting Mode.

• Read the operating instructions for your TV.

1Set the menu

→ [Setup] → [Wi-Fi] → [Wi-Fi Function] → [New Connection]

→ [Playback on TV]

2Select [Via Network] or [Direct] to connect (→293, 296)

3Select the device you wish to connect to

• When the connection is established, the screen is displayed.

4Take or play back still pictures on this unit

• To terminate the connection, follow the steps below:

→ [Setup] → [Wi-Fi] → [Wi-Fi Function] → [Yes]

(You can also close the connection by pressing the [Wi-Fi] button. (→258))

●When you display the pictures on a TV using the Wi-Fi function, they are not output using 4K

resolution. To output pictures using 4K resolution, connect this unit to the TV using an HDMI micro

cable. (→303)

●When a TV is connected to this unit, the TV screen may temporarily return to the status before the

connection. Pictures are displayed again when you take or play back pictures.

●Even if [Effect] and [Sound] are set on this unit, these settings are disabled when the pictures are

played back on a TV during Slide Show playback.

●Motion pictures and 4K burst files cannot be played back.

●During the multi/calendar playback, pictures displayed on the screen of this unit are not displayed

on TV.

274 SQW0419

Wi-Fi

When sending pictures, first select [New Connection], then

select the method of sending pictures.

After you have completed connecting, you can also change

the sending settings, such as the size of pictures to be sent.

■Images that can be sent

Destination JPEG RAW MP4*1AVCHD*1, *24K Burst File*1

[Smartphone] (→277) ○–○*3– –

[PC] (→280) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

[Cloud Sync. Service]

(→286) ○–○*3– –

[Web service] (→282) ○–○*3– –

[AV device] (→279) ○– – – –

[Printer]*1 (→278) ○– – – –

*1 Sending by [Send Images While Recording] is not available.

*2 Motion pictures recorded in [AVCHD] can be sent in file sizes of up to 4 GB. Files larger than

4 GB cannot be sent.

*3 Excluding motion pictures recorded with [Rec Quality] of [4K].

• Some images may not be played back or sent depending on the device.

• For more information about picture playback, see the operating instructions of the

destination device, or check the WEB service to which you will send the pictures.

[Send Images While Recording]

A picture can be automatically sent to a specified device every time you take it.

• [ ] is displayed on the recording screen while connected by

[Send Images While Recording], and [ ] is displayed while

files are being sent.

• To terminate the connection, follow the steps below:

→ [Setup] → [Wi-Fi] → [Wi-Fi Function] → [Yes ]

• You can terminate the connection or change the send settings by pressing [Wi-Fi]

button. (→258)

You cannot change the settings while sending a still picture. Wait until sending is

complete.

Sending pictures

275 SQW0419

Wi-Fi

Sending pictures

●Since the camera gives priority to recording, sending may take longer during the recording.

●If you turn off the camera before you have completed sending, or if you close the Wi-Fi

connection, or in similar situations, unsent files will not be resent.

●You may not be able to delete files or use the [Playback] menu while sending.

●Motion pictures and 4K Burst files cannot be sent.

●If you set [Time Lapse Shot], the Wi-Fi connection is terminated and you cannot use this function.

[Send Images Stored in the Camera]

You can select and send recorded images.

■How to select an image(s) after selecting [Single Select] or [Multi Select]

[Single Select]

Select the picture

SetSet

Select [Set]

[Multi Select]

Select the picture (repeat)

• If selected again, the setting will be canceled.

2 3

4 5 6

Select [OK]

• The number of pictures that can be sent by [Multi Select] is

limited.

• To change the send settings on a screen that is displayed after the image has been

sent, press [DISP.] button. To close the connection, select [Exit].

●Details of the [Playback] menu [Favorite] or [Print Set] settings will not be sent.

●Some images taken with a different camera may not be able to be sent.

●Images that have been modified or edited with a computer may not be able to be sent.

276 SQW0419

Wi-Fi

Sending pictures

Changing the settings for sending images

After you have completed connecting, you can change the sending settings, such as the

size of pictures to be sent, by pressing the [DISP.] button.

Item Description

[Size]

Resize the image to send.

[Original] / [Auto]*1 / [Change]

• If you select [Auto], the image size is determined by the

circumstances at the destination.

• You can select the image size for [Change] from [M], [S], or [VGA].

The aspect ratio does not change.

[File Format]*2[JPG] / [RAW+JPG] / [RAW]

[Delete Location Data]*3

Select whether to delete the location information from images before

sending them.

[ON]: Delete the location information, then send.

[OFF]: Keep the location information and send.

• This operation only deletes the location information from the

images that are set to be sent. (The location information will not

be deleted from the original images stored in this unit.)

[Cloud Limit]*4

You can select whether to send images when the Cloud Folder runs

out of free space.

[ON]: Do not send images.

[OFF]: Delete images from the oldest ones, then send new images.

*1 Only available when the destination is set to [Web service].

*2 Only available when the destination is set to [PC].

*3 Only available when the destination for [Send Images Stored in the Camera] is set to [Cloud Sync.

Service] or [Web service].

*4 Only available when the destination is set to [Cloud Sync. Service].

277 SQW0419

Wi-Fi

Preparation

Install “Image App” in advance. (→260)

1Set the menu

→ [Setup] → [Wi-Fi] → [Wi-Fi Function] → [New Connection]

→ [Send Images While Recording] / [Send Images Stored in the Camera]

→ [Smartphone]

2Select [Via Network] or [Direct] to connect (→293, 296)

(On your smartphone)

■When connecting with [Via Network]

Set Wi-Fi function to “ON”

Select a wireless access point and set

Start “Image App” (→260)

■When connecting with [Wi-Fi Direct] or [WPS Connection] in [Direct]

Start “Image App” (→260)

■When connecting with [Manual Connection] in [Direct]

Set Wi-Fi function to “ON”

Select the SSID displayed on this unit

Start “Image App” (→260)

3Select the device you wish to connect to

4Check the send settings, and select [Set]

• To change the send setting, press the [DISP.] button. (→276)

[Send Images While Recording]

5Take a still picture (→274)

[Send Images Stored in the Camera]

5Select the picture (→275)

Sending pictures to a smartphone

278 SQW0419

Wi-Fi

Wireless printing

You can print out recorded still pictures wirelessly from a PictBridge (wireless

LAN-compatible)* printer.

* Compliant with the DPS over IP standards.

Contact the printer manufacturers for details on PictBridge (wireless LAN-compatible) printers.

1Set the menu

→ [Setup] → [Wi-Fi] → [Wi-Fi Function] → [New Connection]

→ [Send Images Stored in the Camera] → [Printer]

2Select [Via Network] or [Direct] to connect (→293, 296)

3Select a printer you want to connect

4Select the still picture and print

• Pictures are selected the same way as when connecting by USB connection cable. For details

(→314).

• To terminate the connection, press [Q.MENU ] button.

(You can also close the connection by pressing the [Wi-Fi] button. (→258))

●Motion pictures and 4K Burst files cannot be printed.

279 SQW0419

Wi-Fi

Sending pictures to AV device

Still pictures and motion pictures can be sent to AV devices in the home (home AV

devices), such as DLNA compatible recorders.

Wireless access point

Home AV device

Preparations

When sending a picture to AV devices, set your device to DLNA waiting Mode.

• Read the operating instructions of your device for details.

1Set the menu

→ [Setup] → [Wi-Fi] → [Wi-Fi Function] → [New Connection]

→ [Send Images While Recording] / [Send Images Stored in the Camera]

→ [AV device]

2Select [Via Network] or [Direct] to connect (→293, 296)

3Select the device you wish to connect to

4Check the send settings, and select [Set]

• To change the send setting, press the [DISP.] button. (→276)

[Send Images While Recording]

5Take a still picture (→274)

[Send Images Stored in the Camera]

5Select the picture (→275)

280 SQW0419

Wi-Fi

Sending pictures to a PC

Still pictures and motion pictures recorded by the camera can be sent to a PC.

Preparations

• Turn the computer on.

• Prepare folders for receiving images on the PC before sending a picture to the PC (below).

• If the standard settings are changed for the workgroup on the connected PC, you must change

settings in [PC Connection] on this unit. (→299)

To create a folder that receives images

• Create a PC user account (account name (up to 254 characters) and password (up to

32 characters)) consisting of alphanumeric characters. An attempt to create a receive

folder may fail if the account includes non-alphanumeric characters.

■When using “PHOTOfunSTUDIO”

Install “PHOTOfunSTUDIO” on the PC

• For details on hardware requirements and installation, read “Installing supplied software”

(→308, 310).

Create a folder that receives images with “PHOTOfunSTUDIO”

• To create the folder automatically, select [Auto-create]. To specify a folder, create a new folder,

or set a password to the folder, select [Create manually].

• For details, refer to the operating instructions of “PHOTOfunSTUDIO” (PDF).

■When not using “PHOTOfunSTUDIO”

(For Windows)

Supported OS: Windows 8.1 / Windows 8 / Windows 7 / Windows Vista

Example: Windows 7

Select a folder you intend to use for receiving, then right-click

Select [Properties], then enable sharing of the folder

• For details, refer to the operating instructions of your PC or Help on the operating system.

(For Mac)

Supported OS: OS X v10.5 to v10.10

Example: OS X v10.8

Select a folder you intend to use for receiving, then click on the items in the following

order

[File] → [Get Info]

Enable sharing of the folder

• For details, refer to the operating instructions of your PC or Help on the operating system.

281 SQW0419

Wi-Fi

Sending pictures to a PC

1Set the menu

→ [Setup] → [Wi-Fi] → [Wi-Fi Function] → [New Connection]

→ [Send Images While Recording] / [Send Images Stored in the Camera]

→ [PC]

2Select [Via Network] or [Direct] to connect (→293, 296)

3Select the PC you want to connect to

• If the PC you want to connect to is not displayed, select [Manual Input], then enter the computer

name (for Mac, enter the NetBIOS name).

4Select the folder you want to send to

5Check the send settings, and select [Set]

• To change the send setting, press the [DISP.] button. (→276)

[Send Images While Recording]

6Take a still picture (→274)

[Send Images Stored in the Camera]

6Select the picture (→275)

●Folders sorted by the sent date are created in the specified folder, and pictures are saved in those

folders.

●If the screen for a user account and password entry appears, enter the one you set on your PC.

●If the computer name (for Mac, the NetBIOS name) contains spaces, etc., the name may not be

properly recognized. If you cannot connect, we recommend changing the computer name (for

Mac, the NetBIOS name) to a combination of 15 or less alphanumeric characters only.

282 SQW0419

Wi-Fi

Using WEB services

Through “LUMIX CLUB”, you can send still pictures and motion pictures to social

networking services, etc. By selecting the setting to automatically transfer still pictures

and motion pictures to [Cloud Sync. Service], you can receive the transferred still pictures

and motion pictures on a PC or a smartphone.

Wireless access point

WEB services

Cloud

synchronization

services

LUMIX CLUB

When sending images to WEB service

Preparation

You need to register to “LUMIX CLUB” (→287) to send a picture to a WEB service.

To send images to a WEB service, you need to register the WEB service. (→283)

●Panasonic assumes no responsibility for the damages resulting from the leakage, loss, etc.

of images uploaded on WEB services.

●When uploading images to the WEB service, do not delete images from this camera, even

after they have finished sending, until you have checked that they have been properly

uploaded to the WEB service. Panasonic assumes no responsibility for the damages

resulting from the deletion of images stored in this unit.

●Images uploaded to the WEB service cannot be displayed or deleted with this camera. Check

images by accessing the WEB service with your smartphone or computer.

●If sending images fails, a report email outlining the failure will be sent to the email address

registered with “LUMIX CLUB”.

283 SQW0419

Wi-Fi

Using WEB services

Registering the WEB service to “LUMIX CLUB”

When sending images to WEB services, the WEB service being used must be registered

with the “LUMIX CLUB”.

• Check the “FAQ/Contact us” on the following site for compatible WEB services.

http://lumixclub.panasonic.net/eng/c/lumix_faqs/

Preparation

Make sure that you have created an account on the WEB service you want to use, and have the

1Connect to the “LUMIX CLUB” site using a smartphone or computer

http://lumixclub.panasonic.net/eng/c/

2Enter your “LUMIX CLUB” login ID and password and log in to the service

3If you have not registered your email address with “LUMIX CLUB”, register the

email address

4Select the WEB service to be used for WEB service link settings and register it

• Follow the instructions on the screen to register the service.

284 SQW0419

Wi-Fi

Using WEB services

Sending pictures

1Set the menu

→ [Setup] → [Wi-Fi] → [Wi-Fi Function] → [New Connection]

→ [Send Images While Recording] / [Send Images Stored in the Camera]

→ [Web service]

2Select [Via Network] and connect (→293)

3Select a WEB service you want to connect

4Check the send settings, and select [Set]

• To change the send setting, press the [DISP.] button. (→276)

[Send Images While Recording]

5Take a still picture (→274)

[Send Images Stored in the Camera]

5Select the picture (→275)

285 SQW0419

Wi-Fi

Using WEB services

■Quickly sending pictures in the camera to WEB services

Once you send a picture, you can send pictures to the WEB service as quickly and

easily as using a smartphone, only when the environment for connecting to a wireless

access point is available.

(The instructions below assume that you are already registered to “LUMIX CLUB”

and the camera has a record of a connection to a wireless access point.)

Display the picture

Use to select [Yes] after pressing

(When group pictures are being displayed, select

[Upload(Wi-Fi)] → [Yes])

• The same operation can be performed by touching [ ].

(When group pictures are selected, touch [ ], and select

[Upload(Wi-Fi)].)

Select a WEB service you want to connect

Check the send settings, and select [Set]

• The camera is connected to the previously used wireless access point and the pictures are

sent to the WEB service.

• To change the transmission setting for the picture, press the [DISP.] button. (→276)

• Step , are not necessary when you continue to send another image.

The pictures are sent using the same WEB service and the same picture transmission settings

as before.

• To terminate the connection, press [MENU/SET] or operate other controls to exit the playback

screen. You can also terminate the connection by pressing [Wi-Fi] button on the camera.

(→258)

To change the settings for sending images or web service

Terminate the Wi-Fi connection, and follow step and onwards again.

• You can also change the send settings by pressing [Wi-Fi] button while using a Wi-Fi

connection. (→258)

●If the camera has no records of connections to wireless access points that are available, a screen

that asks you to select a connection method is displayed. Select the connection method and

connect the camera to a wireless access point. (→293)

●When you are not registered to “LUMIX CLUB”, a screen that asks you to acquire a new login ID is

displayed. Get a login ID and set a password. (→288)

●When pictures are displayed as a group, they are all sent. When a single picture in a group is

displayed, only the picture being displayed is sent.

286 SQW0419

Wi-Fi

Using WEB services

When sending images to [Cloud Sync. Service]

Preparation

You need to register to “LUMIX CLUB” (→287) and configure the Cloud Sync. setting to send a

picture to a Cloud Folder. Use “PHOTOfunSTUDIO” on a PC or “Image App” on a smartphone to

configure the Cloud Sync. settings.

■About the images sent to a Cloud Folder by the use of [Cloud Sync. Service]

(Current as of July 2015)

• If you set the picture destination to [Cloud Sync. Service], sent pictures are

temporarily saved in the cloud folder, and they can be synchronized with the device

in use, such as the PC or smartphone.

• A Cloud Folder stores transferred images for 30 days (up to 1,000 pictures).

Transferred images are deleted automatically 30 days after the transfer.

Furthermore, when the number of stored images exceeds 1,000, some images may

be deleted depending on the [Cloud Limit] (→276) setting even within 30 days after

the transfer.

• When the download of images from a Cloud Folder to all specified devices is

complete, images may be deleted from the Cloud Folder even within 30 days after

the transfer.

1Set the menu

→ [Setup] → [Wi-Fi] → [Wi-Fi Function] → [New Connection]

→ [Send Images While Recording] / [Send Images Stored in the Camera]

→ [Cloud Sync. Service]

2Check the message and press [MENU/SET]

3Select [Via Network] and connect (→293)

4Check the send settings, and select [Set]

• To change the send setting, press the [DISP.] button. (→276)

[Send Images While Recording]

5Take a still picture (→274)

[Send Images Stored in the Camera]

5Select the picture (→275)

287 SQW0419

Wi-Fi

Using “LUMIX CLUB”

About the [LUMIX CLUB]

Acquire a “LUMIX CLUB” login ID (free).

If you register this unit to the “LUMIX CLUB”, you can synchronize images between the

devices you are using, or transfer these images to WEB services.

Use the “LUMIX CLUB” when uploading pictures to WEB services.

• You can set the same “LUMIX CLUB” login ID for this unit and a smartphone. (→290)

Refer to the “LUMIX CLUB” site for details.

http://lumixclub.panasonic.net/eng/c/

Please note;

• The service may be suspended due to regular maintenance or unexpected problems,

and service contents may be changed or added to, without prior notice to the users.

• The service may be stopped in whole or in part with a reasonable period of advance

notice.

288 SQW0419

Wi-Fi

Using “LUMIX CLUB”

Acquiring a new login ID ([New account])

1Set the menu

→ [Setup] → [Wi-Fi] → [Wi-Fi Setup] → [LUMIX CLUB]

2Select [Set/Add Account]

3Select [New account]

• Connect to the network. Proceed to the next page by selecting [Next].

• A confirmation screen will be displayed if a login ID has already been acquired for the camera.

Select [Yes] to acquire a new login ID, or [No] if you do not need to acquire a new login ID.

4Select the method for connecting to a wireless access point, and set

• For details (→293).

• The settings screen will only appear during the first connection. Connection methods set on this

unit are stored and will be used for subsequent connections. If you want to change the wireless

access point to connect to, press the [DISP.] button, then change the connecting destination.

• Proceed to the next page by selecting [Next].

5Read through the “LUMIX CLUB” terms of use and select [Agree]

• You can press to switch pages.

• Turn the zoom lever to the T side to enlarge the page display (x2 magnification).

• If you turn the zoom lever to the W side after enlarging the page, the page returns to its original

size (no magnification).

• You can use to move the position of the area to be enlarged.

• Press [ Q.MENU ] button to cancel the process without acquiring a login ID.

6Enter the password

• Enter any combination of 8 to 16 characters and numbers for the password.

• For details on how to enter characters, refer to “Entering Text” (→75).

7Check the login ID and select [OK]

• The login ID (12-digit number) will be displayed automatically.

When logging in to the “LUMIX CLUB” with a computer, you only

need to enter the numbers.

• A message is displayed when the connection is complete. Select

[OK].

• Be sure to make a note of the login ID and password.

289 SQW0419

Wi-Fi

Using “LUMIX CLUB”

Using a previously acquired login ID/confirming and changing login ID

and password ([Set Login ID])

Preparation

To use a previously acquired login ID, confirm your ID and password.

To change the “LUMIX CLUB” password on the camera, access the “LUMIX CLUB” website from

your smartphone or PC and change the “LUMIX CLUB” password in advance.

1Set the menu

→ [Setup] → [Wi-Fi] → [Wi-Fi Setup] → [LUMIX CLUB]

2Select [Set/Add Account]

3Select [Set Login ID]

• The login ID and password are displayed.

• The password is displayed as “ ”.

• Close the menu if only checking the login ID.

4Select the item you wish to change

5Enter your login ID or password

• For details on how to enter characters, refer to “Entering Text” (→75).

• Enter the new password you have created on your smartphone or PC into the camera. If the

password differs from the one you created on your smartphone or PC, you will not be able to

upload images.

6Select [Exit]

290 SQW0419

Wi-Fi

Using “LUMIX CLUB”

To set the same login ID for the camera and the smartphone

• Setting the same login ID on this unit and your smartphone is convenient for sending

images on this unit to other devices or WEB services.

■When either this unit or the smartphone has acquired the login ID

Connect this unit to the smartphone (→261)

From the “Image App” menu, set the common login ID

• The login IDs for this unit and the smartphone become the same.

• After connecting this unit to the smartphone, the setup screen for a common login ID

may appear when you display the playback screen. You can also set a common login

ID by following the on-screen instructions.

• This operation is not available for [Wi-Fi Direct] connection.

■When this unit and the smartphone have acquired different login IDs

When you want to use the smartphone’s login ID for this unit

Change the login ID and password for this unit to those acquired by the smartphone.

When you want to use this unit’s login ID for the smartphone

Change the login ID and password for the smartphone to those acquired by this unit.

Check the “LUMIX CLUB” terms of use

Check the details if the terms of use have been updated.

1Set the menu

→ [Setup] → [Wi-Fi] → [Wi-Fi Setup] → [LUMIX CLUB]

2Select [Terms of use]

• The camera will connect to the network and the terms of use will be displayed.

291 SQW0419

Wi-Fi

Using “LUMIX CLUB”

Delete your login ID and account from the “LUMIX CLUB”

Delete the login ID from the camera when transferring it to another party or disposing of it.

You can also delete your “LUMIX CLUB” account.

1Set the menu

→ [Setup] → [Wi-Fi] → [Wi-Fi Setup] → [LUMIX CLUB]

2Select [Delete account]

• The message is displayed. Select [Next].

3Select [Yes] in the login ID delete confirmation screen

• The message is displayed. Select [Next].

4Select [Yes] on the confirmation screen for deleting the “LUMIX CLUB” account

• If you want to continue using the service, selecting [No] will only delete the login ID. Exit the

menu after it is executed.

5Select [Next]

• The login ID is deleted, and then the message notifying the deletion of your account is displayed.

Select [OK].

●Changes and other actions to login IDs can only be made to the login ID acquired with the camera.

292 SQW0419

Wi-Fi

About connections

If you have selected [New Connection], select the Wi-Fi function and sending destination,

and then select the connection method.

If you are connecting with the same settings as used previously, you can quickly start

using the Wi-Fi function by connecting with [Select a destination from History] or [Select a

destination from Favorite].

This section describes connection methods.

• When connecting with the same settings as used previously, refer to (→297).

When a screen similar to the one below is displayed, select a connection method.

• Example of operation for displaying a screen:

→ [Setup] → [Wi-Fi] → [Wi-Fi Function] → [New Connection]

→ [Send Images While Recording] → [Smartphone]

Wireless access point

Connection method Description

[Via Network] Connects through a wireless access point. (→293)

[Direct] Your device connects directly to this unit. (→296)

If you are out and unable to use your wireless access point, or temporarily connecting to

equipment you do not ordinarily use, or in a similar situation, it is convenient to make a

direct connection.

293 SQW0419

Wi-Fi

About connections

[Via Network] Connecting via a wireless access point

Select a connection method to the wireless access point.

• WPS refers to a function that allows you to easily configure

the settings related to the connection and security of

wireless LAN devices. To check if the wireless access

point you are using is compatible with WPS, refer to the

instruction manual of the wireless access point.

Connection method Description

[WPS (Push-Button)]

Save push button type wireless access point that is compatible with

Wi-Fi Protected Setup™ with a WPS mark.

1Press the wireless access point WPS button until it

switches to WPS Mode

• Refer to the wireless access point instruction manual for details.

[WPS (PIN code)]

Save PIN code type wireless access point that is compatible with

Wi-Fi Protected Setup with a WPS mark.

1On the camera screen, select the wireless access point

you are connecting to

2Enter the PIN code displayed on the camera screen

into the wireless access point

3Press [MENU/SET] on the camera

• Refer to the wireless access point instruction manual for details.

[From List]

Select this option when you are not sure about the WPS compatibility,

or when you want to search for and connect to a wireless access

point.

• For details (→294).

294 SQW0419

Wi-Fi

About connections

If you are not sure about the WPS compatibility

(connecting by [From List])

Search for available wireless access points.

• Confirm encryption key of the selected wireless access point if the network

authentication is encrypted.

• When connecting by [Manual Input], confirm SSID, network authentication type,

encryption type, encryption key of the wireless access point you are using.

1Select the wireless access point you are connecting to

• Pressing [DISP.] button will search for a wireless access point

again.

• If no wireless access point is found, refer to “When connecting

with [Manual Input]” (→295).

2(If network authentication is encrypted)

Enter the encryption key

• For details on how to enter characters, refer to “Entering Text” (→75).

295 SQW0419

Wi-Fi

About connections

■When connecting with [Manual Input]

On the screen of step 1 of “If you are not sure about the WPS compatibility

(connecting by [From List])”, select [Manual Input] (→294)

Enter the SSID of the wireless access point you are connecting to, then select [Set]

• For details on how to enter characters, refer to “Entering Text” (→75).

Select the network authentication type

• For information on network authentication, see the instruction manual of the wireless access

point.

Select the encryption type

• The type of settings that can be changed may vary depending on the details of network

authentication settings.

Network authentication type Encryption types that can be set

[WPA2-PSK] / [WPA-PSK] [TKIP] / [AES]

[Common Key] [WEP]

[Open] [No Encryption] / [WEP]

(When an option other than [No Encryption] is selected)

Enter the encryption key

●Check the wireless access points instruction manual and settings when a saving wireless access

point.

●If no connection can be established, the wireless access point’s radio waves may be too weak.

Refer to “Message displays” (→332) and “Q&A Troubleshooting” (→340) for details.

●Transmission speed may decrease, or may not be usable depending on the environment it is used

in.

296 SQW0419

Wi-Fi

About connections

[Direct] Connecting directly

You can select the connection method to your equipment.

Select a connection method with which your equipment is

compatible.

Connection method Description

[Wi-Fi Direct]

1Set the device to Wi-Fi Direct® mode

2Select [Wi-Fi Direct] on the camera screen

3On the camera screen, select the device to connect to

[WPS Connection]

[WPS (Push-Button)]

1Select [WPS (Push-Button)]

2Set the device to WPS mode

• You can wait longer for a connection by pressing the [DISP.] button on

this unit.

[WPS (PIN code)]

1Select [WPS (PIN code)]

2Enter the PIN code of the device into the camera

[Manual Connection]

1Enter the SSID and password

into the device. The SSID and

password are displayed on the

connection waiting screen of this

unit

SSID and Password

• If a device to be connected is [Smartphone],

the password is not displayed. Select SSID

to connect. (→261)

●Read the operating instructions of your device for details.

297 SQW0419

Wi-Fi

About connections

Connecting quickly with the same settings as used previously

([Select a destination from History] / [Select a destination from

Favorite])

The camera keeps a History of times you used the Wi-Fi function. You can register items

in the History to Favorite.

You can easily connect with the same settings as used previously by connecting from

History or Favorite.

Check to see if the Wi-Fi settings of the device to connect to are the same as used

previously.

• If the settings of the device to connect to have been changed, it may not be possible to

connect to the device.

1Set the menu

→ [Setup] → [Wi-Fi] → [Wi-Fi Function]

2Select [Select a destination from History] or [Select a

destination from Favorite]

Item Description

[Select a destination from

History]

Connects using the same settings as

used previously.

[Select a destination from

Favorite]

Connects using settings registered in

Favorite.

3Select the desired connection setting

• If the device you want to connect to (smartphone, etc.) is

connected to a wireless access point other than the camera, you

cannot connect the device to the camera using [Direct]. Change

the Wi-Fi settings of the device you want to connect to so that the

access point to be used is set to the camera. You can also select

[New Connection] and reconnect the devices. (→261)

Registering History items to Favorite

1Set the menu

→ [Setup] → [Wi-Fi] → [Wi-Fi Function]

→ [Select a destination from History]

2Select the item you wish to register and press

3Enter a registration name

• For details on how to enter characters, refer to “Entering Text” (→75).

• Up to 30 characters can be entered. A double-byte character will be treated as two characters.

298 SQW0419

Wi-Fi

About connections

Editing items registered in Favorite

1Set the menu

→ [Setup] → [Wi-Fi] → [Wi-Fi Function]

→ [Select a destination from Favorite]

2Select the Favorite item you wish to edit and press

3Select item

Item Description

[Remove from Favorite] —

[Change the Order in Favorite] Select the destination

[Change the Registered Name]

• For details on how to enter characters, refer to “Entering Text”

(→75).

• Up to 30 characters can be entered. A double-byte character

will be treated as two characters.

Registering and saving frequently used Wi-Fi connection settings to

Favorites

●The number of settings that can be saved in the history is limited. We recommend that

you register and save frequently used Wi-Fi connection settings to Favorite. (→297)

Checking connection details of History or Favorite

●When selecting History or Favorite items, you can view connection details by pressing

the [DISP.] button.

●Performing [Reset Wi-Fi Settings] deletes content registered in History and Favorite.

●When using [Select a destination from History] or [Select a destination from Favorite] to connect to

a network to which many PCs are connected, it may be difficult to make the connection because

the camera searches for previously connected equipment out of a large number of equipment

pieces. If you cannot connect, retry the connection using [New Connection].

299 SQW0419

Wi-Fi

[Wi-Fi Setup]

Configure the settings required for the Wi-Fi function.

[Wi-Fi Setup] cannot be changed when connected to Wi-Fi.

1Set the menu

→ [Setup] → [Wi-Fi] → [Wi-Fi Setup] → Desired setting

Item Description

[Wi-Fi Password]

You can improve security

by enabling password entry

for a direct connection to a

smartphone.

[ON]: Connects the camera and a smartphone using an SSID and

password. (→263)

[OFF]: Connects the camera and a smartphone using an SSID.

(→261)

• When [ON] is selected, you can also set up a connection by

scanning a QR code. (→264, 265)

[LUMIX CLUB]

Acquires or changes the

“LUMIX CLUB” login ID.

• For details (→287).

[PC Connection]

You can set the workgroup.

You must connect to the same workgroup as the destination

computer when sending pictures to the computer.

(The default is set to “WORKGROUP”)

[Change Workgroup Name]:

Enter the workgroup of the connecting computer.

[Restore to Default]:

Returns settings to default settings.

• For details on how to enter characters, refer to “Entering Text”

(→75).

• To use with a computer of the standard settings, you do not have

to change the workgroup.

[Device Name]

You can change the name

(SSID) of this unit.

Press [DISP.] button

Enter the desired device name

• For details on how to enter characters, refer to “Entering Text”

(→75).

• Up to 32 characters can be entered.

300 SQW0419

Wi-Fi

[Wi-Fi Setup]

Item Description

[Wi-Fi Function Lock]

To prevent incorrect operation

or use of the Wi-Fi function

by a third party and to protect

saved personal information,

it is recommended that you

protect the Wi-Fi function with

a password.

Setting a password will automatically display the password input

screen when the Wi-Fi function is used.

[Setup]: Enter any 4-digit numbers as the password.

[Cancel]

• For details on how to enter characters, refer to “Entering Text”

(→75).

• Make a copy of password. If you forget the password, you can

reset it with [Reset Wi-Fi Settings] in the [Setup] menu, however

other settings will also be reset. (excluding [LUMIX CLUB])

[Network Address]

Displays the MAC address and

IP address of this unit.

• A “MAC Address” is a unique address that is used to identify

network equipment.

• “IP address” refers to a number that identifies a PC connected to

a network such as the Internet. Usually, the addresses for homes

are automatically assigned by the DHCP function such as a

wireless access point. (Example: 192.168.0.87)

[Approved Regulations]*

The authentication number is

displayed.

–

* [Approved Regulations] is only available on the version DMC-FZ300PP

301 SQW0419

Connecting with other devices

Enjoying 4K motion pictures

Viewing 4K motion pictures

■Viewing on TV screen

When you connect this unit to a 4K-compatible TV and play

back a motion picture recorded with [Rec Quality] of [4K],

you can enjoy high-resolution 4K motion pictures. Although

resolution output will be lower, you can also play back 4K

motion pictures by connecting to a high-definition TV and

other devices that do not have 4K support.

Preparations

• Set [HDMI Mode (Play)] (→71) to [AUTO] or [4K].

• When connecting to a TV that does not support 4K motion picture, select [Auto].

Connect this unit to a 4K-compatible TV using an HDMI micro cable and display the

playback screen (→303)

• When the [VIERA Link] setting on the camera is set to [ON] and the camera is connected to

a VIERA Link (HDMI)-compatible Panasonic television (VIERA), the television automatically

switches its input and the playback screen is displayed. For details (→305).

• When you have motion pictures recorded with [Rec Format] set to

[MP4] and their size set to [4K] in [Rec Quality], you can also play

them back by inserting the card into the SD card slot of a TV that

supports motion pictures in 4K.

• Read the operating instructions for the TV.

■Viewing 4K motion pictures on a PC screen

To play back motion pictures recorded with [Rec Quality] of [4K]

on a PC, use the software “PHOTOfunSTUDIO” stored in the DVD

(supplied).

• To play back and edit 4K motion pictures, a high-performance PC

environment is required.

• For details, refer to the operating instructions of

“PHOTOfunSTUDIO” (PDF).

302 SQW0419

Connecting with other devices

Enjoying 4K motion pictures

Storing 4K motion pictures

■Storing 4K motion pictures on your PC

For details (→307).

■Storing 4K motion pictures on a DVD

You cannot transfer or copy motion pictures recorded in [Rec Quality] with [4K] to a

Blu-ray disc or DVD using a Panasonic recorder. (Current as of July 2015)

You can use the supplied DVD software “PHOTOfunSTUDIO” to convert the file size of

a motion picture to a smaller size or copy it to a DVD.

• For details, refer to the operating instructions of “PHOTOfunSTUDIO” (PDF).

303 SQW0419

Connecting with other devices

Viewing on TV screen

You can view pictures on a TV screen by connecting your camera to your TV with the

HDMI micro cable or AV cable (optional).

Preparation

Turn off both camera and TV.

1Connect camera to TV

Check the plug direction and insert it straight in. (If the cable is inserted in the wrong

direction, the plug could become deformed and cause faulty operation) Also, do not

insert into the wrong socket. Doing so may cause damage to this unit.

■To connect with an HDMI micro cable

An HDMI micro cable can be used to enable viewing of still and motion pictures in

high-resolution.

Align the marks, and insert. [HDMI] socket

To HDMI video/audio

input socket

HDMI micro cable

Use a “High Speed HDMI micro cable” with the HDMI logo. Cables that do not

comply with the HDMI standards will not work.

“High Speed HDMI micro cable” (Type D-Type A plug, up to 2 m (6.6 feet) long)

■To connect with an AV cable (optional)

Align the marks, and insert.

[AV OUT/DIGITAL] socket

AV cable (optional)

Yellow:

To video socket

White:

To audio socket*

*Monaural audio output.

2Turn on the TV and switch the TV input source to match the

connection socket

3Turn on the camera and press the playback button

• Input of the TV will switch automatically and playback screen is displayed when

connected to a VIERA Link-compatible TV using an HDMI micro cable with the

[VIERA Link] set to [ON]. (→305)

304 SQW0419

Connecting with other devices

Viewing on TV screen

●Bars may appear at the sides or at the top and bottom of the screen, depending on the aspect

ratio setting.

●Change the screen mode on your TV if the picture is displayed with the top or bottom cut off.

●When pictures are displayed, they may not be displayed properly depending on the type of TV.

●Pictures rotated to portrait may be blurred slightly.

●When the AV cable (optional) and HDMI micro cable are connected at the same time, priority is

given to the output from the HDMI micro cable.

●Read the operating instructions for the TV.

■To connect with an HDMI micro cable

• Check the [HDMI Mode (Play)]. (→71)

• To play back 24p motion pictures, set [HDMI Mode (Play)] to [AUTO]. Otherwise, the picture is

not output at 24 frames per second.

• When an HDMI micro cable is connected, pictures are not displayed on the screen.

• HDMI output will be canceled if a USB connection cable (supplied) is connected simultaneously.

• Audio output is stereo.

■To connect with an AV cable (optional)

• Check the [TV Aspect]. (→70)

• Always use a genuine Panasonic AV cable (DMW-AVC1: optional).

• The viewfinder display cannot be used.

The recorded pictures can be played back on a TV with an SD

Memory Card slot

●Proper playback (aspect ratio) will be dependent on the TV used for viewing.

●The file format of the motion pictures that can be played back differs depending on the

TV model.

●You may not be able to play back panorama pictures. Also you cannot perform

automatic scrolling playback of panorama pictures.

●For cards compatible with playback, refer to the operating instructions of the TV.

305 SQW0419

Connecting with other devices

Viewing on TV screen

VIERA Link (HDMI) (HDAVI Control™)

What is VIERA Link (HDMI)?

●VIERA Link is a function that automatically links this camera to VIERA Link-

compatible devices by connecting HDMI micro cables for enabling easy operation

with the VIERA remote control. (Some operations are not available.)

●VIERA Link (HDMI) is an exclusive Panasonic function added to the industry-

standard HDMI control functions known as HDMI CEC (Consumer Electronics

Control). Operation is not guaranteed when connecting with non-Panasonic HDMI

CEC-compatible devices. Refer to your product manual to verify compatibility with

VIERA Link (HDMI).

●This camera supports VIERA Link (HDMI) Version 5. This is the Panasonic standard

that also supports previous Panasonic VIERA Link devices.

Preparation

Set [VIERA Link] to [ON] (→72).

1Connect the camera to a VIERA Link (HDMI)-compatible Panasonic television

(VIERA) with an HDMI micro cable (→303)

2Turn on the camera and press the playback button

3Operate with the remote control for the TV

●To play back the audio of the motion pictures in a slide show, set the [Sound] in the Slide Show

setting screen to [AUTO] or [Audio].

●It is recommended to connect this unit to an HDMI terminal other than the HDMI1 if there are 2 or

more HDMI input terminals on the TV.

●If the [VIERA Link] setting on the camera is [ON], operations via the camera buttons will be limited.

306 SQW0419

Connecting with other devices

Viewing on TV screen

■Other related operations

Turning the unit OFF

• The camera can also be turned off when the television is turned off with the remote

control.

Automatic input select

• This function automatically switches the television input to the camera screen

whenever the camera is turned on while it is connected via the HDMI micro cable.

The television can also be switched on via the camera from Standby Mode

(if “Power on link” on the television is set to “on”).

• If VIERA Link (HDMI) does not function correctly (→352)

●If you do not know if your TV is VIERA Link (HDMI) compatible, see the TV’s operating

instructions.

●Use a “High Speed HDMI micro cable” with the HDMI logo. Cables that do not comply with the

HDMI standards will not work.

“High Speed HDMI micro cable” (Type D-Type A plug, up to 2 m (6.6 feet) long)

●When VIERA Link is activated, the [HDMI Mode (Play)] setting of this unit is automatically

recognized.

307 SQW0419

Connecting with other devices

Storing recorded still pictures and motion pictures

on your PC

Still/motion pictures can be copied from the camera to your computer by connecting the

two together.

• Some computers can read directly from the camera’s memory card.

For details, see the instruction manual for your computer.

• If your computer does not support SDXC Memory Cards, a message will be displayed

requesting you to format the card. (Do not format the card. This will erase recorded

pictures.)

If the card is not recognized, refer to the following support website.

http://panasonic.net/avc/sdcard/information/SDXC.html

■Computer specifications

You can connect the camera to a computer that can detect a mass storage device

(device that stores a large volume of data).

• Windows: Windows 8.1 / Windows 8 / Windows 7 / Windows Vista

• Mac: OS X v10.5 - v10.10

Some motion pictures recorded in [AVCHD] may not be scanned

correctly by copying a file or folder

●When using Windows, be sure to use the “PHOTOfunSTUDIO” software on the

supplied DVD to copy motion pictures recorded in [AVCHD].

●When using Mac, you can copy motion pictures recorded in [AVCHD] using “iMovie”.

Note, however, that it may not be possible to copy pictures depending on the picture

quality settings.

(For details about iMovie, please contact Apple Inc.)

308 SQW0419

Connecting with other devices

Storing recorded still pictures and motion pictures on your PC

About supplied software

The supplied DVD contains the following software.

Install the software on your computer before using.

PHOTOfunSTUDIO 9.7 PE

You can capture still pictures or motion pictures to your PC, or organize captured pictures

by categorizing by recording date, model name of the digital camera used to record, etc.

You can also correct still pictures, edit motion pictures, or write to DVD.

•Operating environment

Supported OS

Windows® 8.1 (32-bit/64-bit)

Windows® 8 (32-bit/64-bit)

Windows® 7 (32-bit/64-bit) and SP1

Windows Vista® (32-bit) SP2

CPU

Windows® 8.1

Pentium® ΙΙΙ 1 GHz or higherWindows® 8

Windows® 7

Windows Vista®Pentium® ΙΙΙ 800 MHz or higher

Display 1024×768 pixels or more (1920×1080 pixels or more recommended)

RAM

Windows® 8.1

1 GB or more (32-bit) / 2 GB or more (64-bit)Windows® 8

Windows® 7

Windows Vista®512 MB or more

Free hard disk

space 450 MB or more for installing software

• To edit 4K motion pictures, you need the 64-bit versions of Windows 8.1, Windows 8,

or Windows 7.

• Refer to the operating instructions of “PHOTOfunSTUDIO” (PDF) for further

information about the operating environment.

309 SQW0419

Connecting with other devices

Storing recorded still pictures and motion pictures on your PC

SILKYPIX Developer Studio 4.3 SE

This software develops and edits RAW file pictures. Edited pictures can be saved in a file

format such as JPEG or TIFF that can be displayed on a PC, etc.

•Operating environment

Supported OS

Windows® 8.1

Windows® 8

Windows® 7

Windows Vista®

Mac® OS X v 10.6 - v 10.10

• For details on the operating environment and how to use the SILKYPIX Developer

Studio, refer to the “Help” or the Ichikawa Soft Laboratory’s support website:

http://www.isl.co.jp/SILKYPIX/english/p/support/

LoiLoScope 30 day full trial version

(Windows 8.1 / 8 / 7 / Vista)

Motion pictures can be edited easily.

• This will only install a shortcut to the trial version download site.

•For more information on how to use LoiLoScope and its operating environment,

read the LoiLoScope manual available for download at the link below.

Manual URL: http://loilo.tv/product/20

310 SQW0419

Connecting with other devices

Storing recorded still pictures and motion pictures on your PC

Installing supplied software

The software compatible with your PC will be installed.

Preparations

• Check your PC’s specifications and operating environment for each software.

• Before inserting the DVD (supplied), close all running applications.

1Insert the DVD with the supplied software

• If the automatic playback screen is displayed, you can display the menu by selecting and

executing [Launcher.exe].

• In Windows 8.1/Windows 8, you can display the menu by clicking a message that is displayed

after inserting the DVD and then selecting and executing [Launcher.exe].

• You can also display the menu by double-clicking [SFMXXXX] in [Computer]. (The “XXXX”

portion differs depending on the model.)

2Click [Applications]

3Click [Recommended Installation]

●If you are using a Mac, you can manually install SILKYPIX.

Insert the DVD with the supplied software

Double-click the application folder on the DVD

Double-click the folder that automatically appears

Double-click the icon in the folder

●PHOTOfunSTUDIO / LoiLoScope are not compatible with Mac.

311 SQW0419

Connecting with other devices

Storing recorded still pictures and motion pictures on your PC

Copying still pictures and motion pictures

Preparations

• Install “PHOTOfunSTUDIO” on your computer before starting the copying procedure. (→310)

• Turn on the camera and computer.

1Connect camera to computer

• Turn the camera monitor toward you.

• Check the plug direction and insert it straight in. (If the cable is inserted in the wrong direction,

the plug could become deformed and cause faulty operation) Also, do not insert into the wrong

socket. Doing so may cause damage to this unit.

• Do not use any other USB connection cables except the supplied one or a genuine Panasonic

USB connection cable (DMW-USBC1: optional).

Align the marks, and insert.

[AV OUT/DIGITAL] socket

[Access] (sending data)

• Do not disconnect the USB connection cable

(supplied) while [Access] is displayed.

USB connection cable (supplied)

2Use to select [PC] and press [MENU/SET]

• If you set the [USB Mode] (→70) to [PC] in the [Setup] menu in advance, the camera will be

automatically connected to the PC without displaying the [USB Mode] selection screen.

• If you connect the camera to a PC with the [USB Mode] set to [PictBridge(PTP)], a message

may appear on the PC screen. In such a case, close the message and remove the USB

connection cable safely, and then reset the [USB Mode] to [PC].

3Use “PHOTOfunSTUDIO” to copy pictures to your computer

• Do not delete or move copied files and folders using Windows Explorer or other browsers.

Otherwise, you will not be able to play back or edit the files using “PHOTOfunSTUDIO”.

■For PTP mode

The camera can be connected to your computer even if [USB Mode] (→70) is set to

[PictBridge(PTP)].

• Data can be read only from the card in the PC.

• It may not be possible to import if there are 1,000 or more pictures on the card.

• Motion pictures cannot be played back in the PTP mode.

312 SQW0419

Connecting with other devices

Storing recorded still pictures and motion pictures on your PC

■Copying to your computer without using “PHOTOfunSTUDIO”

You can save pictures to use on your computer by dragging and dropping folders and

files into separate folders on your computer.

•The card of this unit contains the following files (folder structure).

●Windows

Drive (“LUMIX”) is

displayed in [Computer].

●Mac

Drive (“LUMIX”) is

displayed on the desktop.

DCIM (Still/motion pictures)

100_PANA (Up to 999 pictures/folder)

Folder number

P1000001.JPG*1

File number

P1000999.JPG

101_PANA

999_PANA

MISC (DPOF files, Favorite)

PRIVATE

AVCHD (Motion pictures in AVCHD)

Color Space P: sRGB

_: AdobeRGB

Card

*1 .JPG: Still pictures

.RW2: Still pictures recorded in RAW file

.MP4: [MP4] Motion Pictures

*2 New folders are created in the following cases:

• When there is a picture with file number 999 inside the folder.

• When using cards already containing the same folder number (for example, pictures taken with

other cameras, etc.).

• When recording after performing [No.Reset]. (→73)

●Before inserting or removing a card, turn the camera off and disconnect the USB connection

cable. Otherwise, data may be destroyed.

●Use a battery with sufficient battery power or the AC adaptor (optional) and DC coupler (optional).

●When the battery begins to run out during communication, a warning beep sounds. Remove the

USB connection cable safely. Otherwise, data may be destroyed.

●Before connecting or disconnecting the AC adaptor (optional), turn the camera off.

313 SQW0419

Connecting with other devices

Storing recorded still pictures and motion pictures in

the recorder

Copying by inserting the card into the recorder

You can copy pictures using Panasonic equipment (such as

Blu-ray disc recorders) with support for each file format.

•The method of importing still pictures and motion pictures

recorded in this unit to other devices will vary depending on

the file format (JPEG, RAW, AVCHD, or MP4).

• You cannot copy 4K burst files (MP4 format) with [Aspect Ratio] set to an option other

than [16:9] to hard disk drives, including those of Panasonic recorders compatible with

import of 4K motion pictures. (As of July 2015)

• See the instruction manual for the recorder for details for copying and playing back.

Dubbing with non-compatible equipment

You can dub the content played back using this unit to non-compatible equipment such

as recorders and video players by connecting this unit to the non-compatible equipment

using an AV cable (optional). Non-compatible equipment will be able to play back the

content. This is convenient if you wish to pass around dubbed content. In this case, the

content will be played back in standard rather than high-definition picture quality.

1Connect camera to recorder

• Check the plug direction and insert it straight in. (If the cable is inserted in the wrong direction,

the plug could become deformed and cause faulty operation) Also, do not insert into the wrong

socket. Doing so may cause damage to this unit.

Align the marks, and insert. [AV OUT/DIGITAL] socket

AV cable (optional) To recorder’s input socket

2Start playback on camera

3Start recording on recorder

• To stop recording (dubbing), stop the recording on your recorder first before stopping the

playback on the camera.

●Always use a genuine Panasonic AV cable (DMW-AVC1: optional).

●When using a TV with a 4:3 aspect ratio, always change the camera’s [TV Aspect] setting (→70)

to [4:3] before dubbing. Motion pictures copied in the [16:9] setting will appear vertically stretched

when viewed on a 4:3 TV screen.

●For details on dubbing and playback methods, refer to your recorder’s operating instructions.

314 SQW0419

Connecting with other devices

Printing

You can connect directly to a PictBridge-compatible printer for printing.

Preparations

• Adjust the print quality or other settings on your printer, as needed.

• Turn on the camera and printer.

1Connect camera to printer

• Turn the camera monitor toward you.

• Check the plug direction and insert it straight in. (If the cable is inserted in the wrong direction,

the plug could become deformed and cause faulty operation) Also, do not insert into the wrong

socket. Doing so may cause damage to this unit.

• Do not use any other USB connection cables except the supplied one or a genuine Panasonic

USB connection cable (DMW-USBC1: optional). Using cables other than the above may cause

a malfunction.

Align the marks, and insert. [AV OUT/DIGITAL] socket

• Do not disconnect the USB connection cable

(supplied) when the cable disconnection icon [ ] is

displayed (may not be displayed with some printers).

USB connection cable (supplied)

2Use to select [PictBridge(PTP)] and press [MENU/SET]

3Use to select a picture and press [MENU/SET]

4Use to select [Print start] and press [MENU/SET]

(Print settings (→317))

315 SQW0419

Connecting with other devices

Printing

Printing multiple pictures

Multiple pictures are printed at one time.

1Press to select [Multi Print] in step 3 (→314)

2Use to select the item and press [MENU/SET]

• [Multi Select]: Scroll between pictures with , select pictures to print with

the [MENU/SET] (Press [MENU/SET] again to release selection.)

Use to select [OK], and press [MENU/SET]

• [Select All]: Print all pictures.

• [Print Set (DPOF)]: Print pictures selected in [Print Set]. (→253)

• [Favorite]: Print pictures selected as [Favorite]. (→252)

3Use to select [Print start] and press [MENU/SET]

(Print settings (→317))

●The group pictures are displayed one by one instead of all pictures at the same time.

●Disconnect USB connection cable (supplied) after printing.

●Use a battery with sufficient battery power or the AC adaptor (optional) and DC coupler (optional).

When the battery begins to run out during communication, a warning beep sounds. Cancel printing

and disconnect USB connection cable (supplied).

●Before connecting or disconnecting the AC adaptor (optional), turn the camera off.

●Before inserting or removing a card, turn the camera off and disconnect the USB connection

cable.

●Some printers can print directly from the camera’s memory card. For details, see the manual for

your printer.

●An orange “●” displayed during printing indicates an error message.

●When printing a large number of pictures, the remaining sheets display may differ from the number

of pictures set for printing.

●Motion pictures and 4K burst files cannot be printed.

●Still pictures recorded in a RAW file cannot be printed. (The still pictures recorded in JPEG file

format at the same time as the RAW file can be printed.)

316 SQW0419

Connecting with other devices

Printing

Printing with date and text

Time and date can be set to be printed on the picture when taking the picture by

activating the [Text Stamp] function in the [Playback] menu. (→246)

■Printing date without [Text Stamp]

Printing in store:

Only recording date can be printed. Request date printing in store.

• Making [Print Set] (→253) settings on the camera in advance allows settings for

numbers of copies and date printing to be designated before giving the card to the

store.

• You cannot request a store to print the characters entered for [Age] or [Name] of

[Profile Setup] or [Face Recog.], [Travel Date], [Location], and [Title Edit].

Using computer:

Print settings for recording date and text information can be made using

“PHOTOfunSTUDIO” software on the supplied DVD.

Using printer:

Recording date can be printed by setting [Print Set] on the camera, or by setting [Print

with Date] (→317) to [ON] when connecting to a printer compatible with date printing.

317 SQW0419

Connecting with other devices

Printing

Making print settings on the camera

Setting options include the number of printed pictures and their size. Make settings before

selecting [Print start].

1Use to select the item and press [MENU/SET]

Item Settings

[Print with Date] [ON] / [OFF]

[Num.of prints] Set number of pictures (up to 999 pictures)

[Paper Size] When [ ] is selected, the printer settings take priority.

[Page Layout] [ ] (printer takes priority) / [ ] (1 picture, no border) /

[ ] (1 picture, with border) / [ ] (2 pictures) / [ ] (4 pictures)

2Use to select the setting and press [MENU/SET]

●When [Print Set (DPOF)] has been selected, the [Print with Date] and [Num.of prints] items are not

displayed.

●If the printer does not support date printing, the date cannot be printed on the picture.

●When setting [Print with Date] to [ON], check the date printing settings on the printer (printer

settings may be prioritized).

●To print a picture on which text or a date has been stamped, set [Print with Date] to [OFF]. (The

still picture is printed with the date superimposed on it.)

●In some printers, dates for pictures taken with the aspect ratio set to [1:1] will be printed vertically.

●Items may not be displayed if incompatible with printer.

●To print to paper sizes/layouts not supported by this camera, set to [ ] and make settings on the

printer. (Consult your printer’s operating manual.)

●Even with completed [Print Set] settings, dates may not be printed, depending on the shop or

printer used.

318 SQW0419

Others

Optional accessories

Conversion Lens (optional)

With the optional conversion lenses, you can record even more faraway pictures and take

close-up pictures of smaller subjects. Set the [Rec] menu after mounting the lens.

■Mounting the conversion lens

Preparation

Remove the lens cap and lens hood.

Attach the lens adaptor

• Rotate the lens adaptor slowly and carefully

Attach the tele conversion lens

• Close-up lens (DMW-LC55: optional) can be attached in a similar manner.

Lens adaptor

(DMW-LA7: optional)

Tele conversion lens

(DMW-LT55: optional)

Tele conversion lens Close-up lens

Focal distance when

converted to a 35 mm film

camera*1

(Max. number of pixels*2)

352 mm to 600 mm 121 mm to 600 mm

Recordable

range

W side

5.5 m (18 feet) to

27 cm (0.89 feet)

to 50 cm (1.6 feet)

T side 33 cm (1.08 feet)

to 50 cm (1.6 feet)

Maximum

aperture

W side F4.0

T side

*1 When you zoom, the actual focal distance becomes 1.7 times that of the display

*2 When the [Aspect Ratio] is set to [4:3] (→122)

319 SQW0419

Others

Optional accessories

■Set the [Rec] menu

Recording mode:

Turn on the camera and set the menu

→ [Rec] → [Conversion]

When you attach the tele conversion lens.

When you attach the close-up lens.

[OFF] —

Press to select [ ]/[ ], and press [MENU/SET] to set

•Do not cover the air vent (shown below) with your finger or any other object.

The sound of air passing through may be heard from the air vent. This is not a

malfunction.

• Always set to [OFF] when the conversion lens is taken off.

Example: How to hold the camera during handheld recording when the tele

conversion lens is attached

Air vent

●Lens adaptor (optional) is needed to use the conversion lens.

●Do not use with anything other than DMW-LC55 or DMW-LT55.

●MC protector (optional) or ND filters (optional) cannot be used together with the conversion lens.

Remove them before attaching the conversion lens.

●When using the tele conversion lens:

• We recommend using a tripod.

• The Stabilizer function may not work sufficiently.

• The focus indication may light due to the jitter even if the subject is not focused.

• The time required for focusing may become longer than usual.

●Refer to the operating instructions of the conversion lens for further details.

320 SQW0419

Others

Optional accessories

Filter (optional)

PL filter (DMW-LPL52: optional) will suppress the reflected light from a metal or non

spherical surfaces (flat non-metallic surfaces, water vapor or invisible particles in the air),

making it possible to take a picture with enhanced contrast.

The ND filter (DMW-LND52: optional) reduces the amount of light to approximately 1/8th

(equal to adjusting the aperture value 3 increments) without affecting the color balance.

The MC protector (DMW-LMC52: optional) is a transparent filter which affects neither the

colors nor the amount of light, so it can always be used to protect the camera’s lens.

●Do not attach multiple filters at the same time.

●If the filter is tightened too much, you may not be able to remove it. Do not tighten it too much.

●If the filter is dropped, it may be destroyed. Be careful not to drop it when attaching it to the

camera.

●Be careful not to get a fingerprint, dirt, etc., on the filter when it is attached, otherwise the focus

may be adjusted to the lens, resulting in the subject being out of focus.

●Refer to the operating instructions for each filter for details.

321 SQW0419

Others

Optional accessories

External Flash (optional)

After attaching the flash (DMW-FL360L, DMW-FL580L: optional), the effective range will

be increased when compared to the camera’s built-in flash.

Preparation

Close the built-in flash and set the camera [ON/OFF] switch to [OFF].

■Using the flash (DMW-FL360L: optional)

Attach the external flash to the hot shoe and then turn on the camera and the

external flash

Set the menu

→ [Rec] → [Flash] → [Flash Mode]

Press to select the item and press [MENU/SET]

• While the external flash is connected, the following icons are displayed.

: External flash Forced ON

: External flash Red-Eye Removal Forced ON*

: External flash Slow Sync.

: External flash Red-Eye Removal Slow Sync.*

: External flash Forced OFF

• Signal-flashing with wireless flashes is also disabled.

* When the flash mode is set to [AUTO] or [MANUAL] on the external flash, you cannot select

the item.

When using other commercially available external flashes that don’t

offer direct communication with the camera (DMC-FZ300)

• It is necessary to set the exposure on the external flash when it is used. When you use

an external flash in Auto Mode, use an external flash that allows you to set the aperture

value and ISO sensitivity to match the same settings on the camera.

• Set the camera to Aperture-Priority AE Mode or Manual Exposure Mode and then set

the same aperture value and ISO sensitivity on the external flash. (The proper exposure

cannot be achieved because the aperture value changes in Shutter-Priority AE Mode.

The light of the external flash cannot be properly adjusted since the aperture value

cannot be fixed in Program AE Mode.)

322 SQW0419

Others

Optional accessories

●You can set the aperture value, shutter speed and ISO sensitivity on the camera even when the

external flash is attached.

●Some commercially available external flashes have synchro terminals with high-voltage or

reversed polarity. If such flashes are used, they could cause a malfunction or hinder normal

operation of the camera.

●If you use commercially available external flashes (with communication functions) other than the

ones compatible with this unit, they may not operate normally or they may be damaged. Do not

use them.

●Even if the external flash is turned off, the camera may enter the external flash mode when the

external flash is attached. When you are not using the external flash, detach it.

●Do not open the built-in flash when an external flash is attached.

●The camera will become unstable when attaching the external flash, it is recommended to use a

tripod when taking picture.

●Detach the external flash when you carry the camera.

●Be sure to hold both the camera and the external flash when it is attached to the camera. If you

hold only the external flash, it could become detached from the camera.

●If the White Balance is set to [ ] when the external flash is used, perform fine adjustment of the

White Balance if the recording results are not satisfactory. (→120)

●If you take pictures close to the subject while taking wide-angle pictures, the light of the flash is

obstructed by the lens and the bottom of the screen may be dark.

●Refer to (→213) about the settings for the wireless flash.

●Refer to the operating instructions of the external flash for further details.

Using the AC adaptor (optional) and DC coupler (optional)

instead of the battery

By using the AC adaptor (DMW-AC10: optional) and DC coupler (DMW-DCC8: optional),

you can record and play back without worrying about the remaining battery charge.

The optional DC coupler can only be used with the designated Panasonic AC adaptor.

●Always use a genuine Panasonic AC adaptor (optional).

●Also read the AC adaptor and DC coupler operating instructions.

323 SQW0419

Others

Optional accessories

Shutter Remote Control (optional)

If you use the shutter remote control (DMW-RSL1: optional), you

can avoid jitter (camera shake) when using a tripod and you can

keep the shutter pressed fully when taking pictures with [B] (Bulb)

or Burst Mode. The shutter remote control works similar to the

shutter button on the camera.

●Record with Creative Video Mode (→108) when using for motion picture recording. Motion picture

recording can be started/stopped with the shutter remote control.

●Refer to the operating instructions of the shutter remote control for further details.

●You cannot use the shutter remote control to cancel the sleep mode.

External Microphone (optional)

Using a stereo shotgun microphone (DMW-MS2: optional) or

stereo microphone (VW-VMS10: optional), you can record

sounds with quality superior to those recorded with the built-in

microphone.

Using the stereo shotgun microphone (DMW-MS2: optional), you

can switch between the gun (ultra-directional) recording and the

wide range stereo recording.

Preparation

Close the built-in flash and set the camera [ON/OFF] switch to [OFF].

■Setting the range within which the stereo shotgun microphone (DMW-MS2:

optional) will record sounds

Attach the dedicated stereo shotgun microphone to the hot shoe of this unit, and

then turn this unit on

Set the menu

→ [Motion Picture] → [Special Mic.]

Press to select the item and press [MENU/SET]

[STEREO] Allows stereo recording of sound over a wide area.

[SHOTGUN] Allows recording from one direction by shutting out background and

surrounding noise.

324 SQW0419

Others

Optional accessories

■Reducing the wind noise when using an external microphone

The camera will effectively reduce the wind noise when recording sound with an

external microphone.

→ [Motion Picture] → [Wind Cut]

Settings: [HIGH] / [STANDARD] / [LOW] / [OFF]

• This item is available only when using an external microphone.

• Setting [Wind Cut] may alter the usual sound quality.

●While the external microphone is connected, [ ] is displayed on the screen.

●When the external microphone is connected, [Mic Level Disp.] (→226) is automatically set to [ON],

and the mic level is displayed on the screen.

●Be sure to hold both the camera and the external microphone when it is attached to the camera. If

you hold only the external microphone, it could become detached from the camera.

●If the noises are recorded when you use an AC adaptor (optional), use a battery.

●When a stereo microphone (VW-VMS10: optional) is used, [Special Mic.] is fixed to [STEREO].

●If the sound of the camera in operation such as the sound of zoom operation are recorded, we

recommend using a shoe adaptor.

●Refer to the operating instructions of the external microphone for further details.

325 SQW0419

Others

List of monitor/viewfinder displays

• The following images are examples of when the display screen is set to [ ] (monitor

style) in the monitor.

• The information displayed, such as histograms, magnifications, and numeric values, are

only for the purpose of reference.

In recording

Recording mode (→40)

Custom Set (→111)

[Photo Style] (→113)

Flash Mode (→208, 321)

Flash

(→208, 213)

60p

[Rec Format]/[Rec Quality]

(→218)

[Snap Movie] (→221)

[Aspect Ratio]/[Picture Size]

(→122)

Image size (Panorama Shot

Mode) (→93)

Picture effect (Filter)

adjustment display (→102, 115)

EXPS Types of picture effects (Filter)

(→115)

Card (displayed only during

recording) (→29)

XXhXXmXXs

Elapsed recording time*1

(→215)

Simultaneous recording

indicator (→220)

Automatic switching between

viewfinder and monitor (→51)

[Peaking] (→151)

[Highlight Shadow] (→117)

[HDR] (→126)/[iHDR] (→79)

[Multi Exp.] (→189)

[Conversion] (→319)

Electronic shutter (→159)

Picture Mode (Photo Priority)

(→220)

Overheat indicator

(→166, 341, 343)

60p

326 SQW0419

Others

List of monitor/viewfinder displays

[Quality] (→123)

240fps 120fps

[High Speed Video] (→109)

AFS AFF AFC MF

Focus Mode (→129)

AF Mode (→130)

[Pull Focus] (→222)

[Face Recog.] (→192)

AFL AF Lock (→152)

Burst (→161)

[4K PHOTO] (→164)

[Auto Bracket] (→178)

[Self Timer] (→180)

Remaining battery (→25)

Macro recording (→145)

[Level Shot] (→225)

[Stabilizer] (→199)

Jitter alert (→200)

Recording state (Flashes red.)

(→215)/

Focus (Lights green.) (→38)

Focus (Under low illumination)

(→128)

Focus (Starlight AF)

(→128)

Wi-Fi connection status

Histogram (→47)

Name*2 (→195)

Travel elapsed days*3 (→65)

Age in years/months*2 (→195)

Location*3 (→65)

Current date/time*3

Travel destination setting*3: (→64)

Exposure meter (→84)

Zoom (→203)

AF area (→128, 137, 141)

Spot metering target (→158)

Center marker display (→196)

[Self Timer]*4 (→180)

[Zoom Mic] (→227)

[Mic Level Disp.] (→226)

[Mic Level Limiter] ([OFF])

(→226)

[Silent Mode] (→191)

External Microphone (→323)

AEL AE Lock (→152)

[Metering Mode] (→55, 158)

Program Shift (→84)

2.8 Aperture value (→84)

60 Shutter speed (→84)

Exposure compensation value

(→154)

Brightness (exposure)

(→81, 105)

Manual Exposure Assist (→89)

ISO sensitivity (→155)

327 SQW0419

Others

List of monitor/viewfinder displays

*1 [h], [m] and [s] indicate “hour”, “minute” and “second”.

*2 This is displayed for about 5 seconds when the camera is turned on if the [Profile Setup] setting is

set.

*3 This is displayed for about 5 seconds when the camera is turned on, after setting the clock and after

switching from Playback Mode to Recording mode.

*4 This is displayed during countdown.

*5 It is possible to switch the display between the number of recordable pictures and available

recording time with the [Remaining Disp.] setting in the [Custom] menu.

Touch tab (→52)

Touch zoom (→205)

Touch Shutter (→54)

[Touch AE] (→55)

[Peaking] (→151)

Function buttons (→62)

(→110)

Coloring (→81)

Defocus control function

(→80, 105)

Brightness (exposure)

(→81, 105)

Type of defocus ([Miniature

Effect]) (→106)

[One Point Color] (→107)

[Sunshine] (→107)

Picture effect (Filter)

adjustment display

(→102, 115)

Picture effects (Filter)

(→115)

Aperture value (→38)

Shutter speed (→38)

ISO sensitivity (→155)

[Mic Level Adj.] (→226)

[Dial Guide] (→42)

White Balance Bracket (→121)

White Balance Fine Adjustment

(→120)

White Balance (→118)

Coloring (→81)

98 Number of recordable

pictures*5 (→31)

RXXmXXs Available recording time*1, *5

(→31)

328 SQW0419

Others

List of monitor/viewfinder displays

Recording mode (→40)

F2.8 Aperture value (→38)

1/60 Shutter speed (→38)

Remaining battery (→25)

ISO sensitivity (→155)

Exposure compensation value

(→154)

Brightness (exposure)

(→81, 105)

Manual Exposure Assist (→89)

Flash Mode (→208, 321)

Flash (→208, 211, 213)

Single (→160)

Burst (→161)

[4K PHOTO] (→164)

[Auto Bracket] (→178)

[Self Timer] (→180)

AFS AFF AFC MF

Focus Mode (→129)

AF Mode

(→130)

[Quality] (→123)

[Aspect Ratio]/[Picture Size]

(→122)

Wi-Fi Wi-Fi (→257)

Function button setting (→61)

[Photo Style] (→113)

AWB

White Balance (→118)

[i.Dynamic] (→125)

[Metering Mode] (→55, 158)

98 Number of recordable pictures

(→31)

RXXmXXs Available recording time*

(→31)

■On-monitor recording information

* [h], [m] and [s] indicate “hour”, “minute” and “second”.

329 SQW0419

Others

List of monitor/viewfinder displays

In playback

Playback Mode (→238)

Protected picture (→254)

Number of prints (→253)

With location information

(→240, 270)

Favorites (→252)

Cable disconnect prohibit icon

(→314)

Motion picture playback

(→229)

Panorama picture playback

(→95)

Continuous playback of burst

picture group (→232)

Save pictures from the 4K

burst file (→169, 173)

Continuous playback of Time

Lapse Shot picture group

(→232)

Continuous playback of stop

motion animation group

(→232)

Text stamped display (→246)

XXhXXmXXs

Elapsed playback time*1

4K Photo (4K burst file) (→164)

[Aspect Ratio]/[Picture Size]

(→122)

60p

[Rec Format]/[Rec Quality]

(→218)

[Snap Movie] (→221)

[Quality] (→123)

240fps 120fps

[High Speed Video] (→109)

Remaining battery (→25)

1/98 Picture number/Total pictures

Wi-Fi connection status

15 pic. Number of group pictures

XXhXXmXXs

Motion picture recording time*1

(→229)

15 pic.15 pic.

1ST DAY1ST DAY

11 months 20 days

330 SQW0419

Others

List of monitor/viewfinder displays

Clear Retouch completed icon

(→244)

Acquiring information icon

(→335)

Playback (Motion Pictures)

(→229)

1ST DAY Travel elapsed days (→65)

Upload (Wi-Fi) icon (→285)

Submenu icon (→233, 285)

[Silent Mode] (→191)

11 months 20 days

Age in years/months

(→194, 195)

Multi Playback (→231)

Delete (→234)

Name*2 (→194, 195)

Location*2 (→65)

Title*2 (→245)

Recording information*3

Recording information

[i.Dynamic]*3 (→125)

[HDR]*4 (→126)/[iHDR]*4 (→79)

[i.Resolution] (→125)

Recording date/time

World time (→64)

[Aspect Ratio]/[Picture Size]

(→122)

60p

[Rec Format]/[Rec Quality]

(→218)

240fps 120fps

[High Speed Video] (→109)

[Quality] (→123)

[Color Space]*4 (→127)

4K Photo (4K burst file) (→164)

100-0001 Folder/File number*3 (→312)

■Detailed information display

100-0001

AM10:00 DEC. 1.2015

331 SQW0419

Others

List of monitor/viewfinder displays

Histogram (→49)

Recording information*3

1/98 Picture number/Total pictures

100-0001 Folder/File number*3 (→312)

*1 [h], [m] and [s] indicate “hour”, “minute” and “second”.

*2 It is displayed in order of [Title], [Location], [Name] ([Baby1]/[Baby2], [Pet]), [Name] ([Face Recog.]).

*3 This is not displayed for motion pictures recorded in [AVCHD].

*4 This is not displayed for motion pictures.

■Histogram display

100-00011/98

332 SQW0419

Others

Message displays

The following explains the meaning of major messages displayed on the monitor or

viewfinder, and how to respond to them.

■Memory cards

[Memory Card Error] [Format this card?]

• The card format cannot be used with this camera.

→Save needed data on a computer or other device, and then use [Format] on the camera. (→30)

• Try with a different card.

[Insert SD card again] [Try another card]

• Access to card has failed.

→Insert card again.

• Try with a different card.

[Read Error] / [Write Error] [Please check the card]

• Data read has failed.

→Check whether card has been inserted correctly (→28).

• Data write has failed.

→Turn off the camera and remove the card. Reinsert the card and turn the camera on again.

• Card may possibly be damaged.

→Try with a different card.

[Motion recording was cancelled due to the limitation of the writing speed of the card]

• The speed class of a required card varies depending on [Rec Format] and [Rec Quality] of a motion

picture. 4K photo recording requires a card that meets a particular speed class rating. Use a card

that meets the rating. Be sure to use a card of the recommended speed class. For details, refer to

“About motion picture/4K photo recording and speed class ratings” (→29).

→If recording stops even when using a card of the recommended speed class (→29), the data

writing speed has dropped. If this happens, we recommend backing up the data on the memory

card and formatting it (→30). Depending on the type of the card, recording may stop in the

middle.

[Memory Card Error] [This memory card cannot be used]

• Not compatible with the camera. Use a compatible card. (→29)

[Cannot record due to incompatible format(NTSC/PAL) data on this card.]

• Format the card after saving necessary data on a PC etc. (→30)

→Insert a different card.

333 SQW0419

Others

Message displays

■Battery

[This battery cannot be used]

• Use a genuine Panasonic battery. Consult the dealer or your nearest Service Center if display still

remains.

• Battery cannot be recognized as terminal is dirty.

→Wipe any dirt away from the battery terminal.

■Wi-Fi function

[Failed to connect wireless access point] / [Connection failed] / [No destination found]

• Check following regarding the wireless access point.

– The wireless access point information set on this unit is wrong. Check the authentication type,

encryption type, and encryption key. (→294)

– Power of the wireless access point is not turned on.

– Setting of the wireless access point is not supported by this unit.

• Check the network setting of the destination.

• Radio waves from other devices may block the connection to a wireless access point.

→Check other devices that are connected to the wireless access point and devices that use the

2.4 GHz band.

[No picture to send]

• This is displayed when there is no image to transmit due to the restriction of the destination.

Check the file type of the image to transmit. (→274)

[Connection failed. Please retry in a few minutes.] / [Network disconnected. Transfer stopped.]

• Radio waves from the wireless access point are getting weak.

→Perform the connection closer to the wireless access point.

• There is no reply from the server or it has exceeded the communication processing time.

→Try again after a while.

• Depending on the wireless access point, connection may be automatically disconnected after

specific time has passed.

→Reconnect the connection again.

[Upload to the Cloud Folder is available after Cloud Sync settings have been set up on

downloadable devices such as PCs or smartphones.]

• Devices that download images from a cloud folder are not registered.

• Perform Cloud Sync setting. Configure the settings on a PC with “PHOTOfunSTUDIO” or on a

smartphone with “Image App”. For details on [Cloud Sync. Service], refer to (→286).

334 SQW0419

Others

Message displays

[Connection failed]

• Check following regarding the smartphones you intend to connect.

→The smartphone does not operate.

→Change the access point to connect to in the smartphone Wi-Fi settings to this camera.

→There is no free storage space on the smartphone.

[Login failed. Please check Login ID and Password.]

• Login ID or password for the “LUMIX CLUB” is not correct. Please enter it again. If you have

forgotten the login ID or the password, there is information in the login screen of the “LUMIX CLUB”

website.

[Some files cannot be sent because of destination limit] /

[Transfer completed. Some files are left because of destination limit.]

• Check the file format of the image to send. (→274)

• Sending motion pictures may fail if the file size is too large. Split the motion picture using [Video

Divide]. (→247)

[Unavailable. Please set Login settings on LUMIX CLUB web site.]

• Login to the “LUMIX CLUB” from your smartphone or PC, and set the login details of the

destination WEB service.

[Both picture and video sharing service cannot be selected together]

• WEB services designed only for pictures, and WEB services designed only for motion pictures

cannot be selected at the same time. Deselect one of the services.

[Cannot get IP address. Please set wireless AP’s IP address setting to DHCP.]

• Turn on DHCP settings of the IP address of the connected wireless access points.

[Cannot connect to server]

• If a message is displaying asking to update the root certificate, agree to update the root certificate.

335 SQW0419

Others

Message displays

■Others

[This picture is protected]

• Delete the picture after canceling the protect setting (→254).

[Some pictures cannot be deleted] [This picture cannot be deleted]

• Non-DCF pictures (→228) cannot be deleted.

→Save needed data on a computer or other device, and then use [Format] on the camera. (→30)

[Cannot be set on this picture]

• [Print Set], [Title Edit], [Text Stamp], and other functions cannot be used for pictures that are not

compliant with the DCF standard (→228).

[Please turn camera off and then on again] [System Error]

• The lens is not working correctly.

→Turn the camera on again. (Consult the dealer or your nearest Service Center if display still

remains.)

[A folder cannot be created]

• Folder numbers in use have reached 999.

→Save needed data on a computer or other device, and then use [Format] on the camera (→30).

Folder number is reset to 100 when performing [No.Reset] (→73).

[Picture is displayed for 16:9 TV] [Picture is displayed for 4:3 TV]

• Select [TV Aspect] in the [Setup] menu if you want to change the TV aspect. (→70)

• USB connection cable (supplied) is only connected to camera.

→Message disappears when cable is also connected to another device.

[Editing operation cannot proceed as another operation is taking place.]

• If you display the playback screen when the camera contains many picture files, the acquiring

information icon [ ] or [ ] may be displayed for a long time. While either one

of these icons is displayed, some of the [Playback] menus cannot be used. You cannot create

pictures from motion pictures or play back 4K burst files recorded with the 4K Photo function. If you

have been playing back a motion picture, stop the playback and wait for while until the message

disappears.

→When the camera is turned off while information is being acquired, only the pictures whose

information has been acquired up to that time are saved as a group. When the camera is turned

on again, the camera once again begins acquiring information of the remaining pictures in the

group.

336 SQW0419

Others

Menu list

[Rec]

• The [Photo Style], [Filter Settings], [AFS/AFF], [Metering Mode], [Highlight Shadow],

[i.Dynamic], [i.Resolution], [Diffraction Compensation], [i.Zoom], [Digital Zoom], and

[Conversion] menu items are common for both [Rec] and [Motion Picture] menus. If a

setting in one menu is changed, the setting with the same name in other menu will also

be changed automatically.

[Photo Style] →113

[Filter Settings] →115

[Aspect Ratio] →122

[Picture Size] →122

[Quality] →123

[AFS/AFF] →129

[Metering Mode] →158

[Burst Rate] →161

[4K PHOTO] →164

[Auto Bracket] →178

[Self Timer] →180

[Highlight Shadow] →117

[i.Dynamic] →125

[i.Resolution] →125

[iHandheld Night Shot] →78

[iHDR] →79

[HDR] →126

[Multi Exp.] →189

[Time Lapse Shot] →182

[Stop Motion Animation]→185

[Panorama Settings] →94

[Shutter Type] →159

[Flash] →208

[Red-Eye Removal] →209

[ISO Limit Set] →157

[ISO Increments] →157

[Diffraction Compensation] →127

[i.Zoom] →202

[Digital Zoom] →203

[Conversion] →319

[Color Space] →127

[Stabilizer] →199

[Face Recog.] →192

[Profile Setup] →195

337 SQW0419

Others

Menu list

[Motion Picture]

• The [Photo Style], [Filter Settings], [AFS/AFF], [Metering Mode], [Highlight Shadow],

[i.Dynamic], [i.Resolution], [Diffraction Compensation], [i.Zoom], [Digital Zoom], and

[Conversion] menu items are common for both [Rec] and [Motion Picture] menus. If a

setting in one menu is changed, the setting with the same name in other menu will also

be changed automatically.

For details, refer to the corresponding item of the [Rec] menu.

[Snap Movie] →221

[Rec Format] →218

[Rec Quality] →218

[Exposure Mode] →108

[High Speed Video] →109

[Picture Mode] →220

[Continuous AF]→219

[Level Shot] →225

[Flkr Decrease] →225

[Silent Operation] →110

[Mic Level Disp.] →226

[Mic Level Adj.]→226

[Special Mic.] →323

[Mic Level Limiter] →226

[Wind Noise Canceller] →227

[Wind Cut] →324

[Zoom Mic] →227

338 SQW0419

Others

Menu list

[Custom]

[Cust.Set Mem.] →111

[Silent Mode] →191

[AF/AE Lock] →152

[AF/AE Lock Hold] →152

[Shutter AF]→143

[Half Press Release] →143

[Quick AF]→143

[Eye Sensor AF]→51

[Pinpoint AF Time]→140

[Pinpoint AF Display]→140

[AF Assist Lamp]→144

[Direct Focus Area]→137

→148

[Focus/Release Priority] →144

[AF+MF] →144

[MF Assist]→150

[MF Assist Display]→148

[MF Guide] →150

[Peaking] →151

[Histogram] →47

[Guide Line] →48

[Center Marker] →196

[Highlight] →49

[Zebra Pattern] →196

[Monochrome Live View] →197

[Constant Preview] (M Mode) →89

[Expo.Meter] →84

[Dial Guide] →42

[LVF Disp.Style] →46

→47

[Monitor Disp. Style] →46

→47

[Monitor Info. Disp.] →48

[Rec Area]→215

[Remaining Disp.] →32

[Auto Review] →39

[Fn Button Set] →61

[Side Button Setting] →44

[Zoom lever] →204

[Side Lever] →204

[Zoom Resume] →204

[Q.MENU] →60

[Dial Set.] →43

[Video Button] →215

[Eye Sensor] →51

[Touch Settings] →52

[Touch Scroll] →228

[Menu Guide] →100

339 SQW0419

Others

Menu list

[Setup]

[Clock Set] →34

[World Time] →64

[Travel Date] →65

[Wi-Fi] →299

[Beep] →66

[Live View Mode] →66

[Monitor Display]/[Viewfinder] →67

[Monitor Luminance] →68

[Economy] →69

[USB Mode] →70

[TV Connection] →70

[m/ft] →72

[Menu Resume] →72

[Menu Background] →72

[Menu Information] →72

[Language] →72

[Version Disp.] →73

[Exposure Comp. Reset] →73

[Self Timer Auto Off] →73

[No.Reset] →73

[Reset] →74

[Reset Wi-Fi Settings] →74

[Format] →30

[Playback]

[Slide Show] →237

[Playback Mode] →238

[Location Logging] →240

[RAW Processing] →241

[Clear Retouch] →244

[Title Edit] →245

[Text Stamp] →246

[Video Divide] →247

[Time Lapse Video] →248

[Stop Motion Video] →248

[Resize] →249

[Cropping] →250

[Rotate] →251

[Rotate Disp.] →251

[Favorite] →252

[Print Set] →253

[Protect] →254

[Face Rec Edit] →254

[Picture Sort] →255

[Delete Confirmation] →255

340 SQW0419

Others

Q&A Troubleshooting

Try checking these items (→340 - 354) first.

If the problem persists,

Performing [Reset] in the [Setup] menu may resolve the issue (→74). (Note that

except for some items such as [Clock Set], all settings are returned to their values at

the time of purchase.)

Also, see the Panasonic support site for the latest support information.

http://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/dsc/

(This site is available in English only.)

■Battery, power

Camera does not work even if the camera is turned on. Camera switches off as soon as the

camera is turned on.

• Battery needs recharging.

• If you leave the camera on, the battery will be exhausted.

→Turn the camera off frequently by using the [Economy] etc. (→69)

This unit is turned off automatically.

• [Economy] is activated. (→69)

• The linked operation of VIERA Link (HDMI) is enabled.

→If you are not using VIERA Link (HDMI), set [VIERA Link] to [OFF]. (→72)

Card/battery door does not close.

• Insert the battery securely all the way in. (→28)

The battery runs down quickly.

• The drive mode is set to [4K PHOTO] and [4K PHOTO] is set to [ ] ([4K Pre-Burst]).

→When [ ] ([4K Pre-Burst]) has been selected, the battery drains faster.

Select [ ] ([4K Pre-Burst]) only when recording.

• The Wi-Fi connection has been on for a long time.

→The battery is used up faster with a Wi-Fi connection. Turn off the camera as often as possible

using [Economy] (→69) or other methods.

341 SQW0419

Others

Q&A Troubleshooting

■Recording

Cannot record pictures. The shutter will not operate immediately when the shutter button is

pressed.

• When the drive mode is set to 4K Photo and [4K PHOTO] in the [Rec] menu is set to [ ] ([4K Pre-

Burst]), the camera temperature rises. In some cases, the camera may display [ ], switch to [ ]

([4K Burst]) and stop the recording to protect itself. Wait until the camera cools down.

• Focus is not aligned.

→When [Focus/Release Priority] is set to [FOCUS], the camera will not record until proper

focusing is achieved. (→144)

Recorded pictures look white.

• Lens is dirty (fingerprints, etc.).

→Turn the camera off and clean the lens surface with a soft dry cloth.

Recorded pictures are too bright/too dark.

• Adjust the exposure (→154).

• AE Lock (→152) is set inappropriately.

Some pictures are taken when I press the shutter button just once.

• Cancel the following settings:

– [Burst]/[Auto Bracket]/[ ] of the self-timer (→160)

– White Balance Bracket (→121)

Focus not aligned correctly.

• Subject outside of focus range. (→38)

• Caused by jitter or subject movement. (→199)

• [Focus/Release Priority] is set to [RELEASE]. (→144)

• [Shutter AF] is set to [OFF]. (→143)

• AF Lock (→152) is set inappropriately.

• If there are fingerprints or dirt on the lens, the focus may be set to the lens and not the subject.

(When the Scene Guide Mode is set to [Soft Image of a Flower], and during macro recording)

Recorded pictures are blurred. The stabilizer function ineffective.

• Shutter speed is slower in dark locations and the stabilizer function is less effective.

→Hold camera firmly with both hands, keeping arms close to body.

→Use a tripod and the self-timer when using a slower shutter speed (→180).

• If you take a picture of a moving subject using the electronic shutter, the subject in the picture may

be skewed in some cases. (→159)

Taking pictures using White Balance Bracket is not possible.

• Is there any memory remaining on the card?

342 SQW0419

Others

Q&A Troubleshooting

Recorded pictures appear coarse, or there is interference.

• We recommend trying the following methods.

→Lower ISO sensitivity (→155).

→Take pictures in brighter locations.

→Either adjust [Noise Reduction] of [Photo Style] to a higher setting or set each item other than

[Noise Reduction] to a lower setting. (→114)

→Change the settings of [Picture Size] (→122) and [Quality] (→123).

• When Digital Zoom is used, the picture quality will become lower if you zoom in higher.

Subject appears skewed in pictures.

• If you take a picture of a moving subject in the electronic shutter mode, motion picture recording

mode, or 4K photo recording mode, the subject in the picture may be skewed in some cases.

This is characteristic of MOS sensors which serve as the camera’s pickup sensors. This is not a

malfunction.

Striping or flicker may appear under lighting such as fluorescent lighting and LED lighting

fixture.

• This is characteristic of MOS sensors which serve as the camera’s pickup

sensors. This is not a malfunction.

• If you are taking still pictures using the electronic shutter, the striping may be

reduced by setting a slower shutter speed. (→87)

• When noticeable flicker or striping is seen under lighting such as a fluorescent

or LED lighting fixture in the motion picture recording mode, you can reduce

the flicker or striping by setting up [Flkr Decrease] (→225) and fixing the

shutter speed. It is possible to select a shutter speed from [1/50], [1/60],

[1/100], or [1/120]. You can set the shutter speed manually in the Creative

Video Mode. (→108)

Brightness or coloring of recorded picture different from real life.

• When recording under fluorescent or LED lighting fixture etc., increasing the shutter speed may

introduce slight changes to brightness and color. These are a result of the characteristics of the

light source and do not indicate a malfunction.

• When recording subjects in extremely bright locations or recording under fluorescent lighting, LED

lighting fixture, mercury lamp, sodium lighting etc., the colors and screen brightness may change or

horizontal striping may appear on the screen.

Zoom does not operate properly.

• Set [Conversion] to [OFF].

Subject cannot be locked. (AF tracking not possible)

• Set the AF area to the distinctive color of the subject if there is a part that is different from the

surrounding color. (→132)

Low or inaudible operating sound.

• The speaker is blocked.

343 SQW0419

Others

Q&A Troubleshooting

Panorama picture recording stops before finishing.

• If the pan motion of the camera is too slow, the camera assumes that the operation has been

aborted and stops recording.

• If the pan motion of the camera is too shaky when it is moved toward the recording direction, the

camera stops recording.

4K photo recording stops before finishing.

• When the ambient temperature is high or recording with [ ] ([4K Burst]) or [ ] ([4K Burst(S/S)])

of the 4K Photo function is performed continuously, the camera may display [ ] and stop the

recording to protect itself. Wait until the camera cools down.

■Motion Picture

Cannot record motion pictures.

• When a large capacity card is used, you may not be able to take a picture for a while after you turn

on the camera.

Motion picture recording stops midway.

• When the ambient temperature is high or motion picture is recorded continuously, the camera may

display [ ] and stop the recording to protect itself. Wait until the camera cools down.

• The speed class of a required card varies depending on [Rec Format] and [Rec Quality] of a motion

picture. Be sure to use a card of the recommended speed class. For details, refer to “About motion

picture/4K photo recording and speed class ratings” (→29).

• If recording stops even when using a card of the recommended speed class, the data writing

speed has dropped. If this happens, we recommend backing up the data on the memory card and

formatting it (→30).

The screen turns dark while recording motion pictures.

• While motion pictures are being recorded, the screen may turn dark as time passes in order to slow

battery consumption. This condition, however, will not affect the recorded motion picture.

The screen turns momentarily black or noise is recorded.

• While motion pictures are being recorded, the screen may momentarily turn black or noise may be

recorded due to static electricity or strong electromagnetic waves (radio transmitters, high-voltage

lines, etc.) under some environmental conditions.

Sometimes focus adjustment with Auto Focus mode is difficult while recording 4K motion

pictures.

• This may occur when taking a picture by reducing the Auto Focus speed in order to adjust the

focus at high precision. This is not a malfunction.

344 SQW0419

Others

Q&A Troubleshooting

An unusual noise, such as a clicking or buzzing noise, is recorded on a motion picture. Audio

is recorded at low volumes.

• With recording in a quiet environment, the sound of aperture, focus and other actions may be

recorded in motion pictures. This is not a malfunction. The focus operation during recording of

motion pictures can be set to [OFF] in [Continuous AF] (→219).

• Use of [Silent Operation] is recommended if you are concerned about operational sounds. (→110)

• If you block the microphone with your fingers while motion pictures are being recorded, the audio

may be recorded at a low volume or may not be recorded at all. In this case, the camera may pick

up the lens operating sounds more easily.

Operating sounds are recorded at the end of the motion picture recording.

• If the operation sound of the motion picture button pressed to end recording bothers you, try the

following:

→Record the motion picture about three seconds longer, and then divide the last part of the motion

picture using [Video Divide] (→247) in the [Playback] menu.

→Set the camera to Creative Video Mode, and use a shutter remote control (DMW-RSL1: optional)

to record motion pictures. (→323)

■Flash

No flash emitted.

The flash becomes unavailable in the following cases.

• The flash is closed. (→206)

• When the electronic shutter is used (→159)

→Set [Shutter Type] to [AUTO] or [MSHTR].

• When [Silent Mode] is set to [ON] (→191)

→Set [Silent Mode] to [OFF].

The flash fires twice.

• The flash fires twice. (Except when [Firing Mode] of [Flash] is set to [MANUAL]) When red-eye

reduction (→209) is set, the firing interval will be longer. Make sure that the subject does not move

until the second firing is completed.

345 SQW0419

Others

Q&A Troubleshooting

■Monitor/viewfinder

The monitor/viewfinder is turned off although the camera is turned on.

• If no operations are performed during the set time period [Auto LVF/Monitor Off] (→69) is activated,

and the monitor/viewfinder turns off.

• When a hand or object is close to the eye sensor, the monitor display mode could be switched to

viewfinder display mode without your knowledge. (→51)

The screen is too bright/too dark.

• Check [Monitor Luminance] setting. (→68)

• Use [Monitor Display]/[Viewfinder] to adjust the brightness of the screen. (→67)

It may flicker for an instant or the brightness of the screen may change significantly for an

instant.

• This occurs due to the aperture of the lens changing when the shutter button is pressed halfway, or

when the brightness of the subject changes. This is not a malfunction.

Pictures do not show on the monitor.

• Viewfinder display mode is activated.

→Press the [LVF] button to switch to the monitor display mode. (→50)

• Monitor is turned off.

→Press the [DISP.] button to switch the display information. (→46)

Cannot switch between the monitor and viewfinder when pressing [LVF] button.

• When it is connected to a computer or printer, the camera can display pictures on the monitor only.

Black, white, red, blue and green dots appear on the Monitor/Viewfinder.

• This is not a fault, and will not be recorded on the actual pictures.

Noise appears on the monitor/viewfinder.

• In dark places, noise may appear to maintain the brightness of the monitor/viewfinder.

Unevenly bright parts or irregular colors appear on the Viewfinder.

• Viewfinder of this unit adopts OLED. Screen burn-in may occur on the screen/viewfinder when a

same image is displayed for a long period of time. This does not affect recorded pictures.

The color tone of the viewfinder differs from the actual tone.

• Being a characteristic of the viewfinder of this unit, this phenomenon is not a problem. This does

not affect recorded pictures.

346 SQW0419

Others

Q&A Troubleshooting

■Playback

The picture being played back is not rotated, or is rotated in an unexpected direction, when

displayed.

• When [Rotate Disp.] is set to [OFF], the picture is displayed without changing its orientation.

(→251)

• You can rotate pictures with the [Rotate] function. (→251)

Cannot view pictures. There are no recorded pictures.

• A card is not inserted in the camera.

• There is no picture on the card to play back.

• Has the file name of the picture been changed on a computer? If so, it cannot be played back on

the camera.

→It is recommended to use the “PHOTOfunSTUDIO” software in the DVD (supplied) to write

pictures from PC to card.

• [Playback Mode] is set to other than [Normal Play].

→Set [Playback Mode] to [Normal Play]. (→238)

Folder/file number displayed as [-]. Picture is black.

• Is this a non-standard picture, a picture which has been edited using a PC or a picture which was

taken by another device?

• Battery removed immediately after picture taken, or picture taken with low battery.

→Save needed data on a computer or other device, and then use [Format] on the camera. (→30)

Playback and operation sounds are too low.

• The speaker is blocked. (→18)

Incorrect date displayed in Calendar Search.

• Is the clock in the camera set properly? (→34)

• Pictures edited on a PC or pictures recorded on other cameras might display a different date to the

recorded date during Calendar Playback.

White round spots like soap bubbles appear on the recorded picture.

• If you take a picture with the flash in a dark place or indoors, white round spots

may appear on the picture caused by the flash reflecting particles of dust in the

air. This is not a fault.

[Thumbnail is displayed] is shown on the screen.

• The pictures may have been recorded on another device. If so, they may be displayed with poor

picture quality.

347 SQW0419

Others

Q&A Troubleshooting

Red areas in pictures appear blackened.

• When the digital red-eye correction ([ ], [ ]) is operating, red areas may be blackened.

→We recommend either closing the flash, or setting the flash mode to [ ] or [Red-Eye Removal]

to [OFF] before recording. (→209)

Motion pictures taken with this camera cannot be played in other cameras.

• Even if a motion picture is played back on a compatible device, it may have bad picture quality or

sound quality upon playback, or it may not be played back. Also, the recording information may not

be displayed correctly.

348 SQW0419

Others

Q&A Troubleshooting

■Wi-Fi function

It cannot connect to the wireless LAN. Radio waves get disconnected. Wireless access point

is not displayed.

General tips for using a Wi-Fi connection

• Use within the communication range of the wireless LAN network.

• Is any device, such as microwave oven, cordless phone, etc., that uses 2.4 GHz frequency

operated nearby?

→Radio waves may get interrupted when used simultaneously. Use them sufficiently away from

the device.

• When the battery indicator is flashing red, the connection with other equipment may not start or the

connection may be disrupted. (A message such as [Communication error] is displayed.)

• When this unit is placed on a metal table or shelf, the connection may not be established easily

because the camera is affected by radio waves. Use the camera away from metal surfaces.

About a wireless access point

• Check if the wireless access point to connect is in operating state.

• The camera may not display or connect to a wireless access point depending on the radio wave

condition.

→Perform the connection closer to the wireless access point.

→Remove the obstacles between this unit and the wireless access point.

→Change the direction of this unit.

→Move the location or change the angle of the wireless access point.

→Perform the [Manual Input]. (→295)

•

It may not display even if the radio waves exist depending on the setting of the wireless access

point.

• Is the network SSID of the wireless access point set not to broadcast?

→It may not be detected when it is set not to broadcast. Enter and set the network SSID. (→294)

Alternatively, set the network SSID of the wireless access point to broadcast.

• Connection types and security setting methods are different depending on the wireless access

point.

→Refer to the operating instructions of the wireless access point.

• Is the 5 GHz/2.4 GHz switchable wireless access point connected to other equipment using the

5 GHz band?

→The use of a wireless access point that can use 5 GHz/2.4 GHz simultaneously is

recommended. It cannot be used simultaneously with this camera if it is not compatible.

349 SQW0419

Others

Q&A Troubleshooting

It takes long time every time to connect to a smartphone.

• It may take longer time to connect depending on the Wi-Fi connection setting of the smartphone,

but it is not a malfunction.

This unit is not displayed in the Wi-Fi setting screen of the smartphone.

• Try switching the ON/OFF of the Wi-Fi function in the Wi-Fi settings of the smartphone.

I have forgotten the login ID or password for the “LUMIX CLUB”.

• Check the information in the login screen of “LUMIX CLUB”.

http://lumixclub.panasonic.net/eng/c/

I do not have a wireless access point at my home, but I would like to perform service user

registration of the “LUMIX CLUB”.

• Service user registration for the “LUMIX CLUB” is not possible in the environment without a

wireless access point.

The camera cannot be connected to Mac computer/Windows PC via Wi-Fi connection.

→Please confirm login name and password are correctly typed.

→When the system time of Mac computer or Windows PC connected to a camera differs severely

from that of the camera, the camera cannot be connected to the computer or PC in some OSs.

Please confirm clock set and world time of the camera matches with time, date and time zone in

Windows PC or Mac computer. When both settings do not match severely, please match them.

I am having a problem connecting to my Windows 8 PC. The user name and password are not

recognized.

• Depending on the OS version, on Windows 8, for example, there are two types of user account

(local account/Microsoft account).

→Be sure to set the local account and use the user name and password for the local account.

350 SQW0419

Others

Q&A Troubleshooting

The Wi-Fi connection is not recognizing my PC.

• By default, the Wi-Fi connection uses the default workgroup name of “WORKGROUP”. If the name

of the workgroup has been changed, it will not be recognized.

→Select [PC Connection] then [Change Workgroup Name] in the [Wi-Fi Setup] to change the

workgroup name to match that of your PC. (→299)

Pictures cannot be transmitted to the computer.

• If a firewall is enabled by the OS or security software, this unit may be unable to connect to the

computer.

Images cannot be transmitted to the WEB service.

• Confirm that the login information (login ID/user name/email address/password) is correct.

• WEB service server or the network may be busy.

→Try again after a while.

→Check the site of the WEB service you are sending the image to.

It takes time to transmit an image to the WEB service.

• Is the size of the image too large?

→Transmit after dividing the motion picture with [Video Divide] (→247).

→Reduce the image size at [Size] (→276), and then send.

• It may take longer time to transmit when distance to the wireless access point is far.

→Transmit closer to the wireless access point.

The image that was supposed to have uploaded to the WEB service is not there.

• Upload may not complete when it is disconnected while transmitting the image.

• It may take some time after uploading the image to be reflected in the WEB service depending on

the status of the server.

→Wait for a while and try again.

• You can check the transmission status on the WEB service link settings by logging into “LUMIX

CLUB”.

I would like to return the image in the WEB service to the camera.

• The images in the WEB Service cannot be saved (downloaded) to this unit. Do not delete the

uploaded images, and make a backup of them.

351 SQW0419

Others

Q&A Troubleshooting

I cannot display or delete the images uploaded to the WEB service by this unit.

• The images uploaded to the WEB service cannot be displayed or deleted by this unit.

→Perform the task using a smartphone or a PC.

Your “LUMIX CLUB” login ID and password were deleted after sending the camera in to be

repaired.

• The settings stored in the camera may be deleted depending on the type of repair.

→Always make a copy of important settings.

Transmission of the image fails midway. There is an image that could not be transmitted.

• Image cannot be transmitted when the battery indicator is flashing red.

• Is the size of the image too large?

→Divide the motion picture using [Video Divide] (→247).

→Reduce the image size at [Size] (→276), and then send.

• File format of the picture that can be sent differs depending on the destination. (→274)

• Capacity or number of images in the WEB service is full.

→Login to “LUMIX CLUB”, and check the status of the destination on the WEB service link

settings.

I have forgotten the password for the Wi-Fi.

→Execute the [Reset Wi-Fi Settings] in the [Setup] menu. (→74)

However, the information you have set on the [Wi-Fi Setup] will be reset.

I cannot send images to an AV device.

• Sending may fail depending on the operational status of the AV device. Also, sending may take a

while.

352 SQW0419

Others

Q&A Troubleshooting

■TV, computer, printer

No image appears on TV. Image blurred or not colored.

• Not connected correctly (→303).

• The television has not been switched to auxiliary input.

The display on the TV and on the camera do not match.

• Aspect ratio may be incorrect or edges may be cut off with certain televisions.

Cannot play motion pictures on TV.

• Card is inserted into TV.

→Connect with AV cable (optional) or HDMI micro cable and play on camera (→303).

Picture is not displayed on full TV screen.

• Check [TV Aspect] settings (→70).

No sound is output from the camera speaker.

• When the AV cable (optional) or HDMI micro cable is connected to the camera, no sound is output

from the camera.

VIERA Link (HDMI) is not working.

• Is the HDMI micro cable connected correctly? (→303)

→Check that the HDMI micro cable is fully inserted.

• Is the camera’s [VIERA Link] setting set to [ON]? (→72)

→The input setting may not be able to be changed automatically with certain television HDMI

sockets. In this case, please change the input setting with your television’s remote control

(consult your television’s operating instructions for details).

→Check the VIERA Link (HDMI) settings on the device you are connecting to.

→Turn the camera off and on again.

→Turn the “VIERA Link control (HDMI device control)” setting on your television (VIERA) to off and

then to on again. (Consult your VIERA’s operating instructions for details.)

Cannot communicate with the computer.

• Not connected correctly (→311).

• Check whether computer has recognized camera.

→Set [USB Mode] to [PC] (→70).

→Turn the camera off and then on again.

353 SQW0419

Others

Q&A Troubleshooting

Computer does not recognize card.

• Disconnect USB connection cable (supplied) and reconnect with card in place.

• If there are two or more USB terminal on a single PC, try connecting the USB connection cable to

another USB terminal.

Computer does not recognize card. (When using an SDXC Memory Card)

→Check whether your computer is compatible with SDXC Memory Cards.

http://panasonic.net/avc/sdcard/information/SDXC.html

→A message prompting you to format the card may appear when you connect it. Do not format the

card.

→If the [Access] indicator on the screen does not go off, turn the camera off before disconnecting

the USB connection cable.

Cannot print when connecting to printer.

• Printer not compatible with PictBridge.

• Set [USB Mode] to [PictBridge(PTP)] (→70, 314).

The edges of pictures are cut off when printing.

• Release any trimming or edgeless printing settings on printer before printing. (Refer to the

instruction manual for the printer.)

• The aspect ratio of pictures is different from that of paper used for printing.

→If printing in shop, check if 16:9 sizes can be printed.

Cannot print panorama pictures properly.

• The aspect ratio of panorama pictures is different from that of regular still pictures, and some

panorama pictures may not be printed correctly.

→Use a printer with support for panorama pictures. (Refer to the instruction manual for the printer.)

→We recommend adjusting the size of a picture in accordance with print paper using the

“PHOTOfunSTUDIO” software on the DVD (supplied).

354 SQW0419

Others

Q&A Troubleshooting

■Others

Menu not displayed in desired language.

• Change [Language] setting (→72).

The lens makes a clicking noise.

• When the camera is turned on or off, the lens is moved, or an aperture operation is performed,

such a noise may be heard. This is not a malfunction.

• When the brightness changes after a zooming operation or moving the camera, the lens may make

a noise while adjusting the aperture. This is not a malfunction.

Zooming stops instantaneously.

• When using the Extended Optical Zoom, the zooming action will stop temporarily. This is not a

malfunction.

Red lamp illuminated when pressing shutter button halfway in dark locations.

• [AF Assist Lamp] is set to [ON] (→144).

AF Assist Lamp is not illuminated.

• [AF Assist Lamp] is set to [OFF] (→144).

• Not illuminated in bright locations.

Part of a picture flashes black and white.

• [Highlight] is set to [ON]. (→49)

Camera is hot.

• Camera may become a little warm during use, but this does not affect performance or quality.

Clock is incorrect.

• If you do not use the camera for a long time, the clock may be reset.

→Reset the clock (→35).

When using zoom, picture becomes slightly warped and the edges of the subject become

colored.

• Pictures may be slightly warped or colored around the edges, depending on the zoom ratio, but this

is not a fault.

File numbers are not recorded in sequence.

• If you perform an operation after performing a specific operation, the picture may be saved in a

folder with a different folder number than the previous folder number.

File numbers have jumped backwards.

• If you insert or remove the battery before turning off the camera, the folder and file numbers for the

pictures taken will not be stored in the memory. Therefore, when the camera is turned on again and

pictures are taken, they may be stored under file numbers which should have been assigned to

previous pictures.

355 SQW0419

Others

Usage cautions and notes

When in use

●Camera may become warm if used for long periods of time, but this is not a fault.

●Keep this unit as far away as possible from electromagnetic equipment (such as

microwave ovens, TVs, video games etc.).

• If you use this unit on top of or near a TV, the pictures and/or sound on this unit may

be disrupted by electromagnetic wave radiation.

• Do not use this unit near cell phones because doing so may result in noise adversely

affecting the pictures and/or sound.

• Recorded data may be damaged, or pictures may be distorted, by strong magnetic

fields created by speakers or large motors.

• Electromagnetic wave radiation may adversely affect this unit, disturbing the pictures

and/or sound.

• If this unit is adversely affected by electromagnetic equipment and stops functioning

properly, turn this unit off and remove the battery or disconnect AC adaptor (optional).

Then reinsert the battery or reconnect AC adaptor and turn this unit on.

Do not use this unit near radio transmitters or high-voltage lines.

• If you record near radio transmitters or high-voltage lines, the recorded pictures and/

or sound may be adversely affected.

●Do not extend the supplied cord or cable.

●Do not allow camera to come into contact with pesticides or volatile substances (can

cause surface damage or coating to peel).

●Never leave the camera and the battery in a car or on a car hood in the summer.

Doing so may cause leakage of the battery electrolyte, overheating, fire or a battery

explosion due to the high temperature.

Caring for your camera

To clean your camera, remove the battery, the DC coupler (optional) or a card, or

disconnect the power plug from the outlet, and wipe with a soft, dry cloth.

●Use a damp cloth to remove stubborn stains, before wiping with a dry cloth.

●Do not use benzine, thinners, alcohol, or kitchen detergent, as these may damage the

outer casing and finish of the camera.

●If using a chemically-treated cloth, read the supplied instructions carefully.

●For care of the viewfinder/eye cup

• As the eye cup cannot be removed, blow away the dust on the viewfinder surface

with a blower (commercially available), gently wipe it with a dry and soft cloth, and be

careful not to remove it.

• If you wipe the eye cup too hard and it is removed, consult the dealer or Panasonic.

356 SQW0419

Others

Usage cautions and notes

When not using for a while

●Turn off the camera before removing battery and card (ensure that battery is removed

to prevent damage through over-discharge).

●Do not leave in contact with rubber or plastic bags.

●Store together with a drying agent (silica gel) if leaving in drawer, etc. Store batteries in

cool (15 °C to 25 °C (59 °F to 77 °F)) places with low humidity (40%RH to 60%RH) and

no major temperature changes.

●Charge battery once per year and use completely before storing again.

●Check all the parts before taking pictures when you have not used the camera for a

long period of time.

Monitor/viewfinder

●Do not press hard on the monitor. This may cause uneven display and damage the

monitor.

●In cold climates or other situations when the camera becomes cold, the monitor or

the viewfinder may appear slightly darker than normal immediately after the camera is

turned on. Normal brightness will return once the internal components have warmed up.

The monitor and viewfinder are made with extremely high precision technology.

However there may be some dark or bright spots (red, blue or green) on the screen.

This is not a malfunction. The monitor and viewfinder screens are controlled with

extremely high precision, but some pixels may be inactive. The spots will not be

recorded on pictures on a card.

Lens

●Do not press the lens with excessive force.

●When there is dirt (water, oil, and fingerprints, etc.) on the surface of the lens, the

picture may be affected. Lightly wipe the surface of the lens with a soft, dry cloth before

and after taking pictures.

●Do not leave the camera with the lens facing the sun as rays of light from the sun may

cause it to malfunction. Also, be careful when placing the camera outside or near a

window.

●Retract the lens when carrying the camera.

357 SQW0419

Others

Usage cautions and notes

Battery

The battery is a rechargeable lithium ion battery.

This battery is easily affected by temperature and humidity, and is affected more when the

temperature is high or low.

●The time required for charging varies depending on conditions of battery usage.

Charging takes longer at high or low temperatures and when the battery has not been

used in some time.

●Battery will be warm during charging and for some time thereafter.

●Battery will run out if not used for long periods of time, even after being charged.

●Do not leave any metal items (such as clips) near the contact areas of the power plug.

Otherwise, a fire and/or electric shocks may be caused by short-circuiting or the

resulting heat generated.

●Frequently charging up battery is not recommended.

(Frequently charging battery reduces maximum usage time and can cause battery to

expand.)

●If available battery power is significantly reduced, battery is reaching end of lifespan.

Please purchase a new battery.

●When charging:

• Wipe dirt from the battery terminal with a dry cloth.

• Keep at least 1 m (3.3 feet) away from AM radio (may cause radio interference).

●Do not use a damaged or dented battery (especially connectors), e.g. by dropping (can

cause faults).

Charger

●Depending on the environment while charging, the charging light may flicker due to

static electricity or electromagnetic radiation, etc. This has no effect on charging.

●Keep at least 1 m (3.3 feet) away from AM radio (may cause radio interference).

●The charger may generate whirring sounds when it is being used. This is not a

malfunction.

●After use, be sure to disconnect the power supply device from the electrical outlet. (A

very small amount of current is consumed if it is left connected.)

●Keep the terminals of the charger and battery clean. When they get dirty, clean with a

dry cloth.

358 SQW0419

Others

Usage cautions and notes

Memory cards

●To prevent damage to cards and data

• Avoid high temperatures, direct sunlight, electromagnetic waves, and static electricity.

• Do not bend, drop, or expose to strong impacts.

• Put the card in the card case or the storage bag after use and when storing or

carrying the card.

• Do not touch terminals on reverse of card or allow them to become dirty or wet.

●Recorded data may be damaged or lost if the camera breaks down due to inappropriate

handling. Panasonic will not be liable for any damage caused due to loss of recorded

data.

●When disposing of/transferring memory cards

• If using the “format” or “delete” functions on your camera or computer, this only

changes the file management information, and does not completely delete the data

from within the memory card. When disposing of or transferring your memory cards,

we recommend physically destroying them, or using commercially available computer

data erasing software to completely delete the data from the card. Data within

memory cards should be managed responsibly.

When using a tripod or unipod

●Do not apply excessive force or tighten screws when they are crooked. (This may

damage the camera, screw hole, or label.)

●Ensure that the tripod is stable. (Refer to the tripod instructions.)

●You may not be able to remove the card or the battery when using a tripod or unipod.

359 SQW0419

Others

Usage cautions and notes

Personal Information

To protect personal information, we recommend that you set a Wi-Fi password or a Wi-Fi

function lock. (→299, 300)

If names or birthdays are set in [Profile Setup] or in the [Face Recog.] function, keep in

mind that the camera and recorded pictures will contain personal information.

Be sure to pay special attention to the privacy, likeness rights, etc. of a subject and

take your own responsibility when you use the [Silent Mode], or use functions such

as writing the location information and changing the shutter noise, etc.

●Disclaimer

• Data containing personal information can be altered or lost due to malfunction, static

electricity, accidents, breakdowns, repairs, or other operations.

Panasonic will not be liable for any damage that occurs, direct or indirect, as a result

of the alteration or loss of data containing personal information.

●When ordering repairs or transferring/disposing of the camera

• After you make a note of the personal information, perform [Reset Wi-Fi Settings]/

[Delete account] to delete data containing personal information such as wireless LAN

connection settings that you registered or set in this unit. (→74, 291)

• To protect your personal information, please reset the settings. (→74)

• Remove the memory card from the camera.

• When ordering repairs, settings may be returned to the initial purchase state.

• If the above operations cannot be performed because of a camera malfunction,

consult with the dealer or nearest Service Center.

●When transferring or disposing of your memory card, see “When disposing of/

transferring memory cards” in the previous section. (→358)

●Uploading pictures to WEB services

• Pictures may contain personal information that can be used to identify the user, such

as titles, recording dates and times, and location information. Before uploading the

pictures to WEB services, check the pictures carefully for information that should not

be disclosed.

360 SQW0419

Others

Usage cautions and notes

Wi-Fi function

■Use the camera as a wireless LAN device

When using equipment or computer systems that require more reliable security than

wireless LAN devices, ensure that the appropriate measures are taken for safety

designs and defects for the systems used. Panasonic will not take any responsibility

for any damage that arises when using the camera for any purpose other than as a

wireless LAN device.

■Use of the Wi-Fi function of this camera is presumed to be in countries where

this camera is sold

There is the risk that the camera violates the radio wave regulations if used in countries

other than those where this camera is sold, and Panasonic takes no responsibility for

any violations.

■There is the risk that data sent and received via radio waves may be intercepted

Please note that there is the risk that data sent and received via radio waves may be

intercepted by a third party. We strongly recommend that you enable encryption in the

settings of your wireless access point to ensure information security.

■Do not use the camera in areas with magnetic fields, static electricity or

interference

• Do not use the camera in areas with magnetic fields, static electricity or interference,

such as near microwave ovens. Radio waves may not reach the camera.

• Using the camera near devices such as microwave ovens or cordless telephones

that use the 2.4 GHz radio wave band may cause a decrease in performance in both

devices.

■Do not connect to the wireless network you are not authorized to use

When the camera utilizes its Wi-Fi function, wireless networks will be searched

automatically. When this happens, wireless networks that you are not authorized to use

(SSID*) may be displayed, however do not attempt to connect to the network as it may

be considered as unauthorized access.

* SSID refers to the name that is used to identify a network over a wireless LAN connection. If the

SSID matches for both devices, transmission is possible.

361 SQW0419

Others

Usage cautions and notes

●SDXC Logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.

●HDMI, the HDMI Logo, and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered

trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC in the United States and other countries.

●HDAVI Control™ is a trademark of Panasonic Corporation.

●“AVCHD”, “AVCHD Progressive” and the “AVCHD Progressive” logo are trademarks of

Panasonic Corporation and Sony Corporation.

●Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby and the double-D symbol are

trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.

●Adobe is a trademark or registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United

States and/or other countries.

●Pentium is a trademark of Intel Corporation in the U.S. and/or other countries.

●Windows and Windows Vista are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft

Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.

●iMovie, Mac and Mac OS are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other

countries.

●iPad, iPhone, iPod, and iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other

countries.

●App Store is a service mark of Apple Inc.

●Android and Google Play are trademarks or registered trademarks of Google Inc.

●The Wi-Fi CERTIFIED™ Logo is a certification mark of Wi-Fi Alliance®.

●The Wi-Fi Protected Setup™ Identifier mark is a certification mark of Wi-Fi Alliance®.

●“Wi-Fi®” and “Wi-Fi Direct®” are registered trademarks of Wi-Fi Alliance®.

●“Wi-Fi Protected Setup™”, “WPA™”, and “WPA2™” are trademarks of Wi-Fi Alliance®.

●DLNA, the DLNA Logo and DLNA CERTIFIED are trademarks, service marks, or certification

marks of the Digital Living Network Alliance.

●QR Code is a registered trademark of DENSO WAVE INCORPORATED.

●This product uses “DynaFont” from DynaComware Corporation. DynaFont is a registered

trademark of DynaComware Taiwan Inc.

●Other names, company names, and product names mentioned in these instructions are

trademarks or registered trademarks of the companies concerned.

362 SQW0419

Others

Usage cautions and notes

This product is licensed under the AVC Patent Portfolio License for the personal use of a consumer

or other uses in which it does not receive remuneration to (i) encode video in compliance with

the AVC Standard (“AVC Video”) and/or (ii) decode AVC Video that was encoded by a consumer

engaged in a personal activity and/or was obtained from a video provider licensed to provide AVC

Video. No license is granted or shall be implied for any other use. Additional information may be

obtained from MPEG LA, L.L.C.

See http://www.mpegla.com

363 SQW0419

Others

Usage cautions and notes

This product incorporates the following software:

(1) the software developed independently by or for Panasonic Corporation,

(2) the software owned by third party and licensed to Panasonic Corporation, and/or

(3) open source software

The software categorized as (3) is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,

but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY, without even the implied warranty of

MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.

Please refer to the detailed terms and conditions thereof displayed by selecting

[MENU/SET] → [Setup] → [Version Disp.] → [Software info].

Panasonic DMC FZ300 Owner’s Manual For Advanced Features En Adv Om

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation